Daniel

Unlocked for the

Final
Generation
 Scriptural references are based on
the New International Version
and the King James Version.

Scripture taken from the HOLY BIBLE, NEW INTERNATIONAL

VERSION®. Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984 International Bible
Society. Used by permission of Zondervan. All rights reserved.

The “NIV” and “New International Version” trademarks are

registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office by
International Bible Society. Use of either trademark requires the
permission of International Bible Society. Italics and brackets used
in quotations from Scripture have been inserted by the author.

Larry W
W.. Wilson
ISBN 0-9668099-4-7

Wake Up America Seminars, Inc.

P.O. Box 273
Bellbrook, Ohio 45305
(937) 848-3322
http://www.wake-up.org

Cover: Comstock.com

Copyright © 2003
All rights reserved.
Second Printing (December 2009)
 Daniel
Unlocked for the FFinal
inal Generation
Table of Contents

Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 1 – Daniel 2 - The Rock of Ages . . . . . . . . . . 11

Chapter 2 – Daniel 3 - A Faith of Pure Gold . . . . . . . . 31

Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 - God Is Sovereign . . . . . . . . . . 49

Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 - The Antichrist . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Chapter 5 – Daniel 6 - The Question of Loyalty . . . . 143

Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 - God’s Timing Is Perfect . . . . . 163

Chapter 7 – Daniel 7 - Israel’s Prophetic Destiny . . . . 221

Chapter 8 – Daniel 11:36 to 12:13 - The King of the North . 249

Bible Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

List of Supplemental Study Helps . . . . . . . 269

 Forward
orward
The Time of the End
“But thou, O Daniel, shut up the words, and seal the book,
even to the time of the end: many shall run to and fro, and
knowledge shall be increased.” (Daniel 12:4, KJV) If a chart
were drawn showing the increase of knowledge on Earth during the
past twenty-six centuries, the line would slowly rise until it reached
the nineteenth century. Then, the line would suddenly curve
upwards because knowledge has dramatically increased during the
past two hundred years. In fact, I have heard it said that the half-
life of knowledge today is about five years. If this statement is true,
this means there will be twice as much knowledge in five years!
How can the doubling of knowledge continue at such a rapid pace,
and furthermore, who can absorb all of the knowledge that is
current? There is so much to learn and life is so short!
School, by definition, is a series of progressive classes. For example,
basic arithmetic is a prerequisite for Algebra I, and Algebra I is a
prerequisite for Algebra II, and Algebra II is a prerequisite for
Calculus and so on. This progression in learning is necessary
because knowledge in mathematics is additive in nature. A student
must have a working knowledge of basic arithmetic and algebra
before he* can understand calculus. Bible prophecy is similar to
mathematics. The Bible student must understand certain
fundamental concepts before he can appreciate the larger issues
presented in Bible prophecy.
Many people think Bible prophecy is merely future telling. This
definition is terribly inadequate. Bible prophecy encompasses the
study of an infinite God and His mysterious ways. Bible prophecy
has been unfolding for the past 6,000 years and it reveals the
actions and plans of God as nothing else can. Bible prophecy proves
that God is deliberate and purposeful in everything He does. Bible
prophecy not only reveals the foreknowledge of God, it also reveals
the plans of God. Bible prophecy has much to say about the future,
but there is very little in the future that has not been witnessed in

* In this book, for the sake of brevity, the pronoun he is used in certain
situations to identify both genders, male and female.
Forward 5

times past. This is the beauty of Bible prophecy. Almost everything

that God plans to do in the future, He has done at various times in
the past. This is why Bible prophecy is an encompassing study of an
infinite God and His mysterious ways.
Why Now?
Daniel was told that knowledge would be increased at the time of
the end. (Daniel 12:4) True to His word, God has granted mankind
more knowledge during the past two hundred years than during the
past two thousand years! Why has He done this? Perhaps God
planned from the beginning to populate the world with as many
people as possible at the time of the end. If so, one could say that
God has controlled the population of Earth through knowledge. We
know that the resources necessary to sustain life on this planet are
limited, and access to these resources was impossible until the
nineteenth century. Now that knowledge has been given to
mankind, access to these resources has brought about a population
explosion. For example, the industrial revolution of the nineteenth
century produced mechanical machinery of various types. As a
result, farming equipment and agricultural techniques were
developed which allow a small number of people to feed an ever
expanding global population. Transportation and commerce moves
food and supplies to distant places and this translates into larger
numbers of surviving people. Advances in medicine also contribute
to a longer life span; thus the population of Earth increased because
people lived longer and their offspring survived longer. Railroads,
freeways, ocean-going super tankers, telephones, banking, energy
and computers enable businesses to flourish so that the physical
needs of billions of people can be met. Think about this: The
expansive infrastructures of our world are built upon knowledge and
technology that did not exist a mere two hundred years ago.
Consequently, the population of Earth has now passed the six billion
mark and experts say it will exceed nine billion by 2050. Evidently,
this is what God planned. He appears to be crowding this planet
with people at the time of the end so that He might populate Heaven
with the largest number of people possible!
Knowledge of Bible Prophecy Necessary for Salvation?
When people say, “I don’t need to understand Bible prophecy
because it has nothing to do with salvation,” they are right in a
6 Forward

limited sense. Many generations of people have died without

understanding apocalyptic prophecy. However, there is a profound
difference between past generations and the last generation. A time
is coming when prophetic understanding will have everything to do
with salvation! (As it did in Noah’s day.) The final generation will
experience a series of tests that no other generation has faced. This
is why God warns us in the book of Revelation about the mark of the
beast and the importance of receiving the seal of God.
By increasing our knowledge of His Word and His ways, God has
made the plan of salvation so simple that any searching person can
understand it. But, God offers more in the Bible than the basics of
salvation. (Hebrews 5:11-6:1) God offers to explain Himself. People
who truly love God and deeply appreciate His generous offer of
salvation want to know everything they can about the One who first
loved us! A life of discovering a loving God never ends. He is the
most interesting subject in all the universe. If the plan of salvation
is interesting to study, Bible prophecy is even more interesting
because the fulfillment of salvation involves a series of prophetic
events!
Five Prerequisites
The study of Bible prophecy forces the student into a theological
corner. This occurs because the student has to reconcile his
conclusions on prophecy with everything he knows about God into
one harmonious theology. Notice how this process evolves: Some
people support the doctrine of a pre-tribulation rapture with the
idea that God will not allow Christians to suffer wrath during the
Great Tribulation. (1 Thessalonians 5:9) These people claim a pre-
tribulation rapture is consistent with the experiences of Noah, Lot,
Rahab, etc. What do Noah, Lot and Rahab have to do with the
Great Tribulation? Actually, nothing. “But,” they say, “if Noah, Lot
and Rahab were saved from God’s wrath, God will save Christians
from His coming wrath.” (Luke 21:36) This use of logic and a few
“proof texts” demonstrates how certain prophetic conclusions are
reconciled within a theological framework. Even though I do not
believe the Bible teaches a pre-tribulation rapture, this example
demonstrates why prophetic conclusions and theological beliefs are
inseparable.
Forward 7

It is almost impossible for two people to discuss the prophecies of

Daniel and Revelation if they are not in agreement on essential
Bible doctrines. I find there are five essential doctrines in the Bible,
and they are easy to remember because they can be associated with
the letter “S.” The essential doctrines are: Salvation by faith in
Jesus Christ, the Second Coming of Jesus, the Sabbath rest of
Jesus, the State of man in death, and God’s use of parallel
Sanctuaries. These five doctrines are prerequisites for a study of
Bible prophecy. Two examples demonstrate the reasons for this
conclusion. First, if a person does not understand the state of man
in death, then portions of Daniel 7 and 12, Revelation 6 and 20 will
make no sense. If a person is judged at the time of death and he
immediately goes to Heaven or hell, why is there a resurrection and
a white throne judgment at the end of the 1,000 years in Revelation
20 for those who were previously burning in hell? Second, if a
person does not understand God’s use of parallel sanctuaries, he
cannot understand the casting down of the censer at Heaven’s Altar
of Incense. (Revelation 8:5) One has to understand the services at
the earthly Altar of Incense before he can understand the services at
the heavenly Altar of Incense. Again, certain prerequisites are
necessary to understand Bible prophecy. This relationship will be
identified at various places in this book and you will be referred to
my companion volume, Jesus, The Alpha and The Omega, for further
study on the five essential doctrines.
Four Rules: Trash or Treasure?
There are hundreds, maybe thousands of books on Bible prophecy
and most of these books do not agree on the meaning of Bible
prophecy. This diversity of opinion leads many people to conclude
that no one actually understands what Bible prophecy says. If Bible
scholars cannot agree, how are lay people supposed to decipher the
meaning of prophecy? This is a good question. Perhaps you should
be warned that this book perpetuates the tradition, because it does
not agree with thousands of books already written on this subject.
Why, then, should another book on Bible prophecy be written? This
book was written because I have stumbled, through God’s generous
grace, into a discovery of four rules of interpretation that allows
Bible prophecy to be understood just as it reads. In days to come,
this discovery could prove to be more profound than a cure for
cancer or AIDS! Of course, time will tell whether my discovery is
8 Forward

trash or treasure, but nevertheless, I am excited about the new end-

time story that springs from Bible prophecy, because a significant
part of the story is about to take place!
Apocalyptic Prophecy Points to the End of Sin
Because Bible prophecy is much more than future telling, the books
of Daniel and Revelation offer a lot more than an explanation of how
the world will end. These two prophetic books reveal the ways of
God. Furthermore, Bible prophecy serves many purposes, and its
ultimate purpose is a revelation of God’s love for man. The five
essential doctrines explain why our world is in a fallen condition and
Bible prophecy explains how and when God will rescue mankind
from the curse of sin.
Many people are surprised to learn that Revelation’s story does not
end with the Second Coming. Actually, the story continues for 1,000
years after the Second Coming because Revelation’s story is
ultimately concerned with something larger than the end of the
world as we know it. This “something” is the elimination of the sin
problem. If a person looks into Revelation to merely foretell how the
world will end, he will miss the best part of the story because God’s
greatest problem is the presence of sin within His universe. God’s
solution to the sin problem has cost the Father and the Son
everything They could give. Consequently, a correct understanding
of the sin problem is a prerequisite for understanding Bible
prophecy. Bible prophecy indicates God will ultimately eliminate
sin and annihilate a large number of people whom He deeply loves.
Even more, Bible prophecy reveals that God will be fully justified in
the eyes of His subjects when He does this! This is an incredible
story that has many dimensions and it takes some effort to
understand it.
An Omnipotent Jesus
The books of Daniel and Revelation declare an omnipotent Jesus.
Jesus is the centerpiece of apocalyptic prophecy. He is Sovereign
God and He oversees the final events of Earth from His throne
during the time of the end. (Daniel 7:13,14; John 1:1-14; Matthew
26:64; John 5:23; Revelation 1:8; 4, 5) A great war is about to begin.
At this very moment, two kings are preparing for a war that will
determine the fate of everyone living on Earth. Jesus and Lucifer
Forward 9

are extremely powerful and they have legions of angels at their

command. A declaration of war has existed between them for
thousands of years. For the past 6,000 years, human beings have
been trapped in a cosmic drama between Christ, the king of
righteousness, and Lucifer, the king of evil. To Jesus, we are objects
of greatest affection. To Lucifer, we are targets for destruction.
Like it or not – believe it or not, the last generation to live on Earth
will be caught in the middle of a no-holds-barred spiritual and
physical war that will take place between these two great rulers.
The Great Tribulation will become The Great Divide of the human
race. God will test the people of Earth to see who will stand on the
side of righteousness and who will capitulate and unite with the
forces of evil. Because the coming war is both spiritual and literal,
the Bible predicts the inhabitants of Earth will see the physical
appearing of both kings. Lucifer, the prince of this world (John
16:11; Revelation 17:8), will gloriously appear first. Later, Jesus,
the prince of Heaven’s host (Revelation 19:11-21), will majestically
appear in clouds of glory and Jesus will destroy Lucifer (the
Antichrist), and his followers with a single command that comes out
of His mouth! (This command is represented as a sharp sword in
Revelation 19:15,21.)
The books of Daniel and Revelation tell a drama that involves truth
and lies, death and resurrection. The presence of sin has caused God
to do things that He would have not done otherwise. If sin had not
occurred, Jesus would not have died for sinners. If Jesus had not
died at Calvary, the universe would know less about the depths of
God’s love, because the death of Jesus on Calvary demonstrates
what Jesus was willing to do for man before He created Adam and
Eve. Jesus knew our parents would sin before He created them, but
His foreknowledge did not keep Him from creating them nor did He
predispose Adam and Eve to sin. They were created with a powerful
tendency to live in perfect harmony with their Creator. But, they
chose to sin of their own free will, and God chose of His own free will
to deal with the lemon of sin by converting this tragic event into
lemonade. Because of His love for man, Jesus went to His death in
order that we might have life. It is incomprehensible that Jesus was
willing to perish forever so that Adam and Eve and their offspring
might have the opportunity to spend eternity with His Father. What
love! What amazing grace! Because God is love, the rise of sin
10 Forward

produced an opportunity for the Godhead to reveal their true

character of love. Of course, the Godhead did not need sin’s presence
to reveal their infinite love for their creation. However, sin
happened because God’s children have the power of choice. The
Godhead used this misfortune to expose their souls before a whole
universe so that every thoughtful observer might understand the
righteousness and fairness of God’s government and God’s ways.
Because we live in the darkness of degeneracy and sin, we need
spiritual eyesight to understand a host of things that we cannot
physically see. (1 Corinthians 2:12) For this reason Jesus has sent
the Spirit, the Spirit of prophecy, to guide us into an understanding
of prophetic truth. (Revelation 1:9; 19:10; John 16:13) When Bible
prophecy is properly understood, the entire Bible harmoniously
declares a loving God, an unbelievably generous offer of salvation,
the promise of victory over sin, a resurrection to eternal life, and the
final annihilation of sin with all its harmful consequences. This is
wonderful news that everyone should understand! This is why this
book was written. The books of Daniel and Revelation tell us the
present world order – which groans under the curse of sin – is soon
to end and a new-world order is about to begin. The book of Daniel
closes with these encouraging words: “Blessed is the one who
waits for and reaches the end of the 1,335 days [for he shall
behold the Lamb of God without experiencing death].” (Daniel
12:12, insertion mine)
In closing, I would like to express deepest appreciation to those who
helped to make this book a reality. Suzy, Gail and Evonne worked
very hard to find and correct my typographical errors. Suzy also did
the painstaking research necessary to create the index of Bible
texts. Marty spent many tedious hours putting the book in its final
format and Shelley searched through piles of photos for the best
possible picture for the cover. The product of our hands is in your
hands. May the Lord use this little book to His glory is my prayer.

Larry Wilson
June, 2003
 Chapter 1
Daniel 2 – The Rock of Ages
Ages

“Trust in the Lord forever, for the Lord, the Lord, is the Rock
eternal.”
– Isaiah 26:4

Because of God’s love for Abraham, God chose the descendants of

Abraham to be His representatives on Earth. Beginning with the
Exodus from Egypt, God did everything possible to get the nation of
Israel to love Him and obey His commands. Israel was to be a
nation of priests; they were to be representatives of the Most High
God throughout the earth. They were to be a light unto the world
demonstrating the wisdom of God’s laws and reflecting the kindness
and generosity of His love. “I, the Lord, have called you in
righteousness; I will take hold of your hand. I will keep you
and will make you to be a covenant for the people and a light
for the Gentiles, to open eyes that are blind, to free captives
from prison and to release from the dungeon those who sit in
darkness.” (Isaiah 42:6,7) For more than 800 years, God gave Israel
every blessing and opportunity, and they gave Him rebellion and
rejection in return. Finally, God could not endure Israel’s insolence
any longer. Around 620 B.C., God spoke through the prophet
Jeremiah saying, “O house of Israel . . . . I am bringing a
distant nation against you – an ancient and enduring nation,
a people whose language you do not know, whose speech you
do not understand. Their quivers are like an open grave; all
of them are mighty warriors. They will devour your harvests
and food, devour your sons and daughters; they will devour
your flocks and herds, devour your vines and fig trees. With
the sword they will destroy the fortified cities in which you
trust. Yet even in those days . . . I will not destroy you
completely. And when the people ask ‘Why has the Lord our
God done all this to us?’ you will tell them, ‘As you have
forsaken me and served foreign gods in your own land, so
12 Chapter 1 – Daniel 2

now you will serve foreigners in a land not your own. . . .’

This is what the Lord Almighty, the God of Israel, says:
‘Listen! I am going to bring on this city and the villages
around it every disaster I pronounced against them, because
they were stiff-necked and would not listen to my words. . . .
I will hand all Judah over to the king of Babylon, who will
carry them away to Babylon or put them to the sword.’ ”
(Jeremiah 5:15-19, 19:15, 20:4)
These verses reveal three interesting points about God. First, from
these and many other Bible texts, it is clear that God’s patience with
sin and rebellion has a limit. God’s comments to Jeremiah and His
subsequent actions leave no room for doubt about this. Second, when
the time came to punish Israel, God fully warned Israel about His
forthcoming actions. Even though they did not believe Him, God
told Israel what He was going to do before He did it! He made it
clear that He was going to use the sword of King Nebuchadnezzar
against His people. Third, God’s treatment of Israel is a mirror
reflecting how He treats all nations! “. . .God is no respecter of
persons.” (Acts 10:34, KJV) In other words, if God destroyed
Jerusalem and His chosen people because of sin and degeneracy, we
can be sure that He has followed the same policy with all nations.
Indeed, the Bible confirms this to be the case. (Genesis 6:7, 15:16;
Leviticus 24:18-24; Isaiah 16:6-14; Isaiah 19:1-12; Ezekiel 14:12-21)
Like Pharaoh, who would not let Israel leave Egypt, Nebuchadnezzar
did not know the God of Israel. Yet, God knew the Babylonian king
very well and God empowered Nebuchadnezzar to be a “servant-
destroyer.” (Jeremiah 25:9) God moved the heart of Nebuchadnezzar
to put Jerusalem to the sword just as surely as He moved the heart
of King Cyrus to set His people free seventy years later. Notice
these two texts:
“ ‘I will summon all the peoples of the north and my servant
Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylon,’ declares the Lord, ‘and I
will bring them against this land and its inhabitants and
against all the surrounding nations. I will completely destroy
them and make them an object of horror and scorn, and an
everlasting ruin.’ ” (Jeremiah 25:9, emphasis mine)
Chapter 1 – Daniel 2 13

“In the first year of Cyrus king of Persia, in order to fulfill

the word of the Lord spoken by Jeremiah, the Lord moved
the heart of Cyrus king of Persia to make a proclamation
throughout his realm and to put it in writing: ‘This is what
Cyrus king of Persia says: “The Lord, the God of heaven, has
given me all the kingdoms of the earth and he has appointed
me to build a temple for him at Jerusalem in Judah.” ’ ” (Ezra
1:1,2, emphasis mine)
The Bible indicates that God affects the hearts of men to do His
bidding. God used Nebuchadnezzar to tear down Jerusalem and
God used Cyrus to rebuild it! Since the Bible declares that God is
proactive in managing the nations and kings of Earth, let us
consider a vision which God gave to King Nebuchadnezzar about
600 B.C.
The Foundational Prophecy: Daniel 2
Daniel 2 contains the first prophecy in the book of Daniel. In this
respect, Daniel 2 is a foundational prophecy and all subsequent
prophecies in Daniel and Revelation are built on it. The prophecy in
Daniel 2 reveals three interesting facts. First, God not only knows
the future, but He has also predetermined that certain events will
occur in the future. Second, God chooses the kings of Earth and He
sets them up and takes them down according to His higher
purposes. Third, beginning with the kingdom of Babylon, God has
predestined the appearing of seven global empires. Think of the
number seven as God’s signature. He has put His signature on
many things to remind us that He is our Creator and our Creator
has a plan! The number seven suggests fullness or completion. For
example, in Daniel and Revelation there are seven kingdoms, seven
heads, seven eyes, seven horns, seven thunders, seven seals, seven
trumpets, seven churches, seven bowls and seven angels who stand
before God. Consider our physical world, there are seven continents,
seven colors in the rainbow, seven notes in our musical scale, seven
days in a week, and Jesus spoke seven times when He was on the
cross. God’s signature is everywhere! Even our seven-day week is
terminated with God’s seventh-day rest. The use of seven in Daniel
and Revelation is deliberate and important to God. The seven
kingdoms presented in Daniel 2 declare a finished plan. The seven
14 Chapter 1 – Daniel 2

kingdoms presented in Daniel 2 consist of six kingdoms governed by

men and an eternal kingdom governed by God. The interesting
climax in this vision is that God destroys the kingdoms of men
before He establishes His kingdom on Earth!

Parts of the Daniel 2 Image

1. Head - Gold
2. Chest - Silver
3. Thighs - Bronze
4. Legs - Iron
5. Feet - Iron & Clay
6. Toes - Iron & Clay
7. Rock - Indestructible & Eternal
Note: Even though the toes are made of the same materials as the
feet, the “toes” are a distinct kingdom separate from the kingdom of
the feet. The toes are identified as “a kingdom” in verse 42, just like
the “chest” is identified as a kingdom in verse 39. Even though the
composition of the feet and toes is identical, they represent two
different world orders. Currently, we are living in the kingdom of
the feet. During the Great Tribulation, the present order of this
world will drastically change and we will enter the final phase of
world order represented by the toes. Even though this vision does
not explicitly say there are “ten” toes on the metal man, we can
safely assume this anatomical feature is implied in Daniel 2 because
the book of Revelation predicts that ten kings (ten horns) will rule
over the whole world for a very short period of time during the very
last moments of Earth’s history. (Revelation 17:12-14) Obviously,
the kingdom of the toes has not arrived, but it is coming. When it
does arrive, Daniel 2:44 says, “In the time of those kings
[represented by the ten toes], the God of heaven will set up a
kingdom that will never be destroyed, nor will it be left to
another people. It will crush all those kingdoms and bring
them to an end, but it will itself endure forever.” (Insertion
mine)
Chapter 1 – Daniel 2 15

The Timeline of Daniel 2

605 B.C. 538 B.C. 331 B.C. 168 B.C. A.D. 476 ? ?

Medo- Many
Babylon Grecia Rome 10 Kings Jesus
Persia Kings

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Gold Silver Bronze Iron Iron/Clay Iron/Clay Rock

Head Chest Thighs Legs Feet Toes Eternal

Chart 1.1
The Vision
“. . .Thy dream, and the visions of thy head upon thy bed, are
these; As for thee, O king, thy thoughts came into thy mind
upon thy bed, what should come to pass hereafter: and he
that revealeth secrets maketh known to thee what shall
come to pass. But as for me, this secret is not revealed to me
for any wisdom that I have more than any living, but for
their sakes that shall make known the interpretation to the
king, and that thou mightest know the thoughts of thy heart.
“Thou, O king, sawest, and behold a great image. This great
image, whose brightness was excellent, stood before thee;
and the form thereof was terrible. This image’s head was of
fine gold, his breast and his arms of silver, his belly and his
thighs of brass, His legs of iron, his feet part of iron and part
of clay. Thou sawest till that a stone was cut out without
hands, which smote the image upon his feet that were of iron
and clay, and brake them to pieces. Then was the iron, the
clay, the brass, the silver, and the gold, broken to pieces
together, and became like the chaff of the summer
threshingfloors; and the wind carried them away, that no
place was found for them: and the stone that smote the
image became a great mountain, and filled the whole earth.”
(Daniel 2:28-35, KJV)
16 Chapter 1 – Daniel 2

The Meaning of the Vision

“This is the dream; and we will tell the interpretation thereof
before the king. Thou, O king, art a king of kings: for the God
of heaven hath given thee a kingdom, power, and strength,
and glory. And wheresoever the children of men dwell, the
beasts of the field and the fowls of the heaven hath he given
into thine hand, and hath made thee ruler over them all.
Thou art this head of gold. And after thee shall arise another
kingdom inferior to thee, and another third kingdom of
brass, which shall bear rule over all the earth. And the
fourth kingdom shall be strong as iron: forasmuch as iron
breaketh in pieces and subdueth all things: and as iron that
breaketh all these, shall it break in pieces and bruise. And
whereas thou sawest the feet and toes, part of potters’ clay,
and part of iron, the kingdom shall be divided; but there
shall be in it of the strength of the iron, forasmuch as thou
sawest the iron mixed with miry clay. And as the toes of the
feet were part of iron, and part of clay, so the kingdom shall
be partly strong, and partly broken. And whereas thou
sawest iron mixed with miry clay, they shall mingle
themselves with the seed of men: but they shall not cleave
one to another, even as iron is not mixed with clay. And in
the days of these kings shall the God of heaven set up a
kingdom, which shall never be destroyed: and the kingdom
shall not be left to other people, but it shall break in pieces
and consume all these kingdoms, and it shall stand for ever.
Forasmuch as thou sawest that the stone was cut out of the
mountain without hands, and that it brake in pieces the iron,
the brass, the clay, the silver, and the gold; the great God
hath made known to the king what shall come to pass
hereafter: and the dream is certain, and the interpretation
thereof sure. Then the king Nebuchadnezzar fell upon his
face, and worshiped Daniel, and commanded that they
should offer an oblation and sweet odours unto him. The
king answered unto Daniel, and said, Of a truth it is, that
your God is a God of gods, and a Lord of kings, and a
revealer of secrets, seeing thou couldest reveal this secret.”
(Daniel 2:36-47, KJV)
Chapter 1 – Daniel 2 17

Comments
Two men saw the vision of the image. King Nebuchadnezzar saw the
vision first and later, God gave a copy of this vision to Daniel so that
he could explain the vision to the king. The vision occurred around
600 B.C., but it spans a time period of more than 2,600 years so far.
This vision has not been fulfilled. We are still waiting for the
kingdom of the ten toes and the eternal kingdom that is established
when Jesus (the Rock) destroys the kingdoms of men. By right of
sovereign authority, God predetermined a chronological progression
of seven world empires, and He revealed this information to
Nebuchadnezzar for our benefit. The real impact of this vision (pun
intended) belongs to the final generation. Many people in the final
generation on Earth will thoughtfully consider the merits of this
vision during the Great Tribulation, and they will discover that God
has a predetermined plan that has been unfolding for more than
twenty-six centuries. Because this vision and world history are in
perfect harmony, the final generation will have a bundle of evidence
upon which to base its faith in God’s Word. “Have you not heard?
Long ago I ordained it. In days of old I planned it; now I have
brought it to pass. . . .” (2 Kings 19:25)
If we consider the architecture of this vision (see Chart 1.1), we
discover three interesting points. First, this vision has a beginning
and an ending point in time. The vision begins with the kingdom of
Babylon as the head of gold and the vision ends when Jesus, The
Rock of Ages, King of kings and Lord of lords, destroys the ten kings
who will be ruling over the world at the time of the Second Coming.
(See Revelation 17:12,13; 19:11-21.) Second, there is chronological
order within the vision. The elements within the vision occur in the
order they are given. For example, the kingdom represented by the
thighs of brass fell to the kingdom represented by the legs of iron,
etc. The third point concerns the use of language. God used the
symbol of a man to represent a succession of kingdoms that would
occur on Earth. Within the context of this vision, the use and the
meaning of the symbol is explained by the Bible. These three points
are highlighted so you can observe a distinct pattern that emerges
from Daniel, and this pattern will prove to be very important later in
this book.
18 Chapter 1 – Daniel 2

The Succession of World Empires

The kingdoms that follow Babylon are represented by metals of
lesser value. This decline suggests that fallen man degenerates
with the passage of time. According to Daniel 2, the chest and arms
of silver represented a kingdom that would succeed Babylon. It is
interesting to note that the silver kingdom had two arms (as in two
armies). This feature accurately reflected the Medo-Persian empire
which overran Babylon in 538 B.C. The Medo-Persian kingdom
consisted of two kings and two armies. Eventually, the Persian side
of this kingdom became dominant.
The third kingdom, represented by thighs of brass, rose to power
with the fall of the Medo-Persians. The Grecian empire was noted
for its extensive use of bronze. In fact, the Grecian period is
sometimes called “The Bronze Age.” The fourth empire was
represented by legs of iron and this feature accurately represented
the Roman empire. The Romans were noted for their ferocious
conquests and their weapons of unbreakable iron. The Roman
empire also included a larger geographical territory than any of the
previous empires. Perhaps this expansion is reflected in the two legs
of iron. The Romans dominated a large portion of the East, as well
as the West.
The fifth kingdom, represented by the feet of iron and clay,
represents the breakup of the Roman empire into many kingdoms;
some became strong and others weak. When Rome fell in A.D. 476,
a distinctive change occurred. After this date, the empires of the
world were no longer universal. Instead, the world was
permanently fractured into small empires. Through the ages, God
has predetermined that some kingdoms would be strong as iron and
others would be weak or breakable like brittle clay. One-world
empires like Babylon, Medo-Persia, Grecia and Rome will not exist
again until God permits the Antichrist to rule over Earth during the
Great Tribulation. Men such as Napoleon, Charlemagne, Hitler,
Kaiser Wilhelm and other conquerors have vainly tried to unite the
world under their rule, but their efforts could not succeed because
God’s Word cannot be defeated.
The sixth and last kingdom of man is represented by the toes.
Remember that the toes represent a brief reign of ten kings. About
two thirds of the way through the Great Tribulation, the devil
Chapter 1 – Daniel 2 19

himself will physically appear on Earth masquerading as God. After

a successful conquest to take control of Earth, the Antichrist
(Lucifer) will divide the world into ten sectors, and he will appoint
ten kings to rule over these ten sectors. (Revelation 17:12-14) )
During the days of these kings, the Rock will come out of Heaven
and destroy all of the kingdoms of men. This Rock is Jesus Christ,
the Rock of Ages. At the appointed time, Jesus will annihilate the
wicked on Earth and establish the seventh and final world empire.
His kingdom will never end. Remember, seven is God’s signature.
God’s kingdom of righteousness will bear His likeness and He will
only establish His kingdom on Earth after He has destroyed the
kingdoms of men. Notice this text: “In the time of those kings
[the ten kings], the God of heaven will set up a kingdom that
will never be destroyed, nor will it be left to another people.
It will crush all those kingdoms and bring them to an end,
but it will itself endure forever.” (Daniel 2:44, insertion mine)
“The Rock of Ages”
Before “The Rock of Ages” sets up His kingdom, He will destroy all
of the kingdoms of men. Daniel told King Nebuchadnezzar, “. . . a
rock was cut out, but not by human hands. It struck the
statue on its feet of iron and clay and smashed them. Then
the iron, the clay, the bronze, the silver and the gold were
broken to pieces at the same time and became like chaff on a
threshing floor in the summer. The wind swept them away
without leaving a trace. But the rock that struck the statue
became a huge mountain and filled the whole earth.” (Daniel
2:34,35) Three points within these verses need to be considered.
First, the Bible leaves no wiggle room on the fact that the kingdom
of God cannot co-exist with the kingdoms of men. Before Jesus sets
up His kingdom on Earth, all previous kingdoms have to be
destroyed – swept away without a trace! Jesus will not reign on or
over a sinful Earth. Jesus will reign on Earth only after sin and
unrepentant sinners have been annihilated. According to the final
chapters of Revelation, Jesus does not begin to reign on Earth until
there is a New Heaven and a New Earth.
Second, the sequence of events described in Daniel 2 terminates at
the Second Coming. Through the years, people have asked if the
Rock crushing the metal man occurs at the Second Coming or at the
20 Chapter 1 – Daniel 2

end of the 1,000 years mentioned in Revelation 20. The Rock

crushes the kingdoms of men at the end of the Great Tribulation (at
the Second Coming), when the ten kings are ruling upon Earth.
(Daniel 2:44) In other words, after desolating this planet of all life
(2 Thessalonians 2:8; Revelation 19:19-21) and putting the devil
back in the abyss for 1,000 years (Revelation 20:1-3), Jesus has
total control over Earth. However, when Jesus appears at the
Second Coming, He does not touch Earth. Instead, the saints will be
caught up in the sky to meet the Lord in the air. (1 Thessalonians
4:17) This gathering up of the saints occurs because they will be
taken to “the Father’s house” in Heaven for 1,000 years before
returning to Earth in the Holy City with Jesus. (John 14:1-3;
Revelation 21:1-4) During the 1,000 years, the saints will sit in court
and determine the punishment that each wicked person must
receive. (1 Corinthians 6:1-3; Revelation 20:4) Obviously, Daniel 2
does not address these details, but the final chapters of Revelation
collaborate with Daniel 2. Using this relationship,we can determine
what will occur during and after the 1,000 years of Revelation 20.
The third point concerns this phrase, “The rock that was cut out,
but not by human hands. . . .” The Rock of Ages and His seventh
kingdom are divine in origin. The kingdom of God will not be a
modification of earthly kingdoms. Consider what this language
meant to King Nebuchadnezzar. Ancient peoples built altars to
their gods (and there were many) on mountain tops and the “high
places” of Earth. They believed the gods dwelt in the lofty grandeur
and vast expanses of snow capped mountains. (Jeremiah 3:6; Ezekiel
6:13; Psalm 15:1) Even among the Jews, the Mountain of Sinai was
called the Mountain of God. (Exodus 4:27) Today, in the United
States, the government buildings where laws are made are exalted
with the title “The Capitol Building” or “Capitol Hill,” even though
the building itself is only slightly elevated above the surrounding
area. We use this type of language to identify the place of a nation’s
highest authority. The same idea was used in a religious sense in
ancient times.
When God gave Nebuchadnezzar this vision, He used very simple
terms the king could grasp. God told the king that six kingdoms
would rise and fall. God also revealed that man would not rule over
Earth indefinitely. God has predetermined an end to the rule of
men. A day will come when the “Rock,” the Son of God, will establish
Chapter 1 – Daniel 2 21

His kingdom on Earth. The idea of a rock being cut out of a

mountain without human effort is language that uniquely describes
God (the Mountain) and the Son of God (the Rock). The Son will
come from Heaven and remove all traces of Earth’s previous
kingdoms before He establishes His own kingdom. The “Rock” will
establish a city whose builder and maker is God. (Hebrews 11:10)
Almighty God gave Nebuchadnezzar the great honor of beholding
His plans. Who can prevent His coming kingdom? Who can stop
Him? Who can thwart the fulfillment of this blueprint? God showed
Nebuchadnezzar the climax of the ages. He saw “The Rock of Ages”
utterly destroy the kingdoms of men and take possession of Earth.
Thus, the ancient words of Isaiah will be fulfilled: “. . . and the
government will be on his shoulders.” (Isaiah 9:6)
Twenty-six hundred years ago, Daniel told King Nebuchadnezzar,
“. . .The great God has shown the king what will take place in
the future. The dream is true and the interpretation is
trustworthy.” (Daniel 2:45) Even though this vision has not yet
been fulfilled, we have enough evidence from completed sequences
within the vision to confirm the truthfulness of this vision.
Apocalyptic prophecy is history written in advance and the passage
of time has confirmed the accuracy of all that God said regarding the
future. Nothing proves the veracity of God’s Word like the fulfillment
of Bible prophecy.
Notes and Comments on Chapter 1
The comments that follow are crucial to the concepts presented in
this book, so please give the following paragraphs careful
consideration. Bible students come to varied conclusions about
Bible prophecy because there are many different methods of
interpretation. For this reason, you may want to read and review
this section from time to time as you progress through this book. I
have placed these notes at the end of Chapter 1 rather than at the
beginning of the book so that newcomers to the study of prophecy
would not become discouraged or overwhelmed by the depth of Bible
prophecy. It is all too easy to lay books aside that require thinking
and processing.
Methods of interpretation is a catch-all phrase that has a lot of
bearing on the interpretation of Bible prophecy. The phrase
“methods of interpretation” describes a set of ideas or a particular
22 Chapter 1 – Daniel 2

view in a person’s head before he starts to study and interpret

prophecy. Methods of interpretation include religious views,
spiritual presuppositions, scholastic assumptions and concepts
about the role and authority of the Bible, the authority of prophets,
and church traditions. For example, a Catholic scholar will
approach the study of Bible prophecy with Catholic beliefs and
traditions in mind, and his prophetic conclusions will reflect the
ideas and views that were in his mind before he began to study.
Similarly, a Baptist scholar will approach the study of Bible
prophecy with methods of interpretation that are very different than
his Catholic counterpart, and the Baptist scholar will arrive at very
different conclusions than the Catholic scholar because their
methods of interpretation are different. Obviously, no one
approaches the study of prophecy without some kind of intellectual
and religious baggage. This baggage is loosely called “methods of
interpretation” or hermeneutics.
Faulty Interpretations until the Time of the End
The book of Daniel contains 533 sentences. While the book is very
short, it contains volumes of information. Daniel was written about
twenty-six centuries ago, but unlike the other 65 books in the Bible,
the book of Daniel was sealed up “until the time of the end.” The
angel, Gabriel, said to Daniel, “. . .Go your way, Daniel, because
the words are closed up and sealed until the time of the end.”
(Daniel 12:9) What does “closed up and sealed until the time of the
end” mean? It means that God placed certain information in the
book of Daniel that remains “top secret” until the time of the end
arrives. Has the time of the end arrived? On the basis of fulfilled
prophecy and an understanding of God’s timing, I am convinced “the
time of the end” has arrived. If this is true, the time has come for
the secrets in Daniel to be unveiled.
The secret information God coded into Daniel 2,600 years ago is
something like the “Rosetta Stone.” The Rosetta Stone was
accidently unearthed in 1799 near Rosetta, Egypt, by French
soldiers. The marvelous thing about this buried rock is that it bears
a message written during the second century B.C. in two forms of
Egyptian script – demotic and hieroglyphics. When archeologists
examined the rock, they were thrilled because they were able to
Chapter 1 – Daniel 2 23

solve a very perplexing mystery. Prior to 1799, archeologists could

not read the clay tablets bearing Egyptian hieroglyphics because no
one could decipher the language. When the Rosetta Stone was
discovered and translated, the demotic inscriptions enabled Thomas
Young (1773-1829) and J.F. Champollion (1790-1832) to decipher the
hieroglyphics of the ancient Egyptians.
In a similar way, I believe God embedded four secrets in the book of
Daniel 2,600 years ago. By God’s grace, I believe I have stumbled
into an understanding of the four secrets that were sealed up in the
book of Daniel. (Of course, the passage of time will prove or
disprove the validity of my claim.) These four secrets shatter
centuries of prophetic exposition, because all interpretations of
Daniel are necessarily faulty and incomplete until the book of
Daniel is unsealed. In other words, certain truths in the book of
Daniel were deliberately reserved for the generation that would live
“at the time of the end.”
Three Levels of Information
As a person might expect, God buried His secrets in the book of
Daniel very well. However, when God wants something known, He
enables ordinary men and women to discover extraordinary things
He has hidden. Through the ages we find this discovery process at
work: On or about the time of fulfillment, elements of prophecy are
understood. For example, when it came time to understand the
timing of Christ’s birth, the wise men from the East figured it out.
(Matthew 2:2) The apostle Paul also noticed this phenomenon.
Consider his words: “Surely you have heard about the
administration of God’s grace that was given to me for you,
that is, the mystery made known to me by revelation, as I
have already written briefly. In reading this, then, you will
be able to understand my insight into the mystery of Christ,
which was not made known to men in other generations as it
has now been revealed by the Spirit to God’s holy apostles
and prophets. This mystery is that through the gospel the
Gentiles are heirs together with Israel, members together of
one body, and sharers together in the promise in Christ
Jesus.” (Ephesians 3:2-6)
24 Chapter 1 – Daniel 2

What did God hide in the book of Daniel? The answer to this
question requires a little explanation. The book of Daniel offers
three levels of knowledge. They are:
1. Dramatic stories of faith
2. Visions revealing God’s plans
3. Apocalyptic architecture
The first (and easiest) level of knowledge in Daniel contains
dramatic stories of faith in God. These stories of faith and loyalty to
God were recorded for the benefit of all generations. However,
Earth’s final generation will benefit the most from these stories of
courage since the fiery trials in the first chapters of the book of
Daniel are mini-parallels of coming events. For example, in Daniel 3
we read about Shadrach, Meshach and Abednego facing the
mandatory worship of a golden image which the king of Babylon
constructed. In Revelation 13:15, we read about the inhabitants of
the world facing the mandatory worship of an image which the king
of modern Babylon will construct. These parallels and their
outcomes were put in the book of Daniel for our encouragement.
(Note: I hope you will read my book, Bible Stories With End Time
Parallels, which reveals end-time issues through the lives of certain
Bible characters.)
The second (and more difficult) level of knowledge in Daniel
concerns the meaning of the visions in the book of Daniel. The
visions God gave to King Nebuchadnezzar and Daniel faithfully
predict the passage of time and the fulfillment of all that God
predestined to occur. Even more, these visions reveal what God
planned to do long before He told Nebuchadnezzar or Daniel of His
plans. Because students of prophecy have understood something of
Daniel’s visions for hundreds of years, we cannot say the visions
were entirely sealed up until “the time of the end.” However,
something in the book of Daniel was sealed up, and that something
uniquely applies to the people who live at the end of the world. What
is it?
The Book Unsealed
The third (and deepest) level of knowledge found in Daniel is the
architecture of apocalyptic prophecy. The prophecies in Daniel
conform to a structure or pattern that controls their meaning. The
Chapter 1 – Daniel 2 25

exciting thing about this structure is that it is also present in

Revelation! In other words, when you understand how the
architecture of Daniel behaves, you will understand the architecture
in Revelation because it is the same architecture! This architecture
produces four rules (methods of interpretation) that govern the
interpretation of Daniel and Revelation. These four rules are like
combinations to a safe. When these four rules are applied to the
interpretation of the prophecies in Daniel as well as Revelation, a
marvelous result occurs. The prophecies make perfect sense just as
they read! This point is extremely important. Portions of Daniel
and Revelation have been a mystery for 2,600 years and then
suddenly, the words make sense just as they read! What causes this
change to occur? When the architecture of Daniel is understood, the
contents of Daniel can be understood.
When the four rules found in Daniel are applied to each line of
prophecy in Daniel and Revelation, a comprehensive story unfolds
that is completely harmonious with everything the Bible has to say
about the ways of God. Furthermore, all of the details God gave in
the prophecies of Daniel and Revelation are in perfect harmony and
synchrony with each other. The four rules force all of the prophecies
in Daniel and Revelation into a chronological matrix of layers that
are orderly in nature. To visualize this matrix, think of the
seventeen* prophecies in Daniel and Revelation as a wedding cake
of seventeen layers! The larger pieces are at the bottom of the stack
and the smaller pieces are on top. The “toothpicks” that hold the
seventeen layers together are events that unite and align the
seventeen layers in Daniel and Revelation into one grand story. The
toothpicks are necessary because two or more layers can describe
the same prophetic event! Because the same event is described in
two different ways – in two different layers – a precise alignment of
the prophecies is not only possible, but essential to understanding
the big picture. This feature will be examined in Chapter 3.

* For the past fifteen years, I have maintained there are eighteen
apocalyptic prophecies in Daniel and Revelation. However, I have
recently discovered that my division of Daniel 10-12 into two
prophecies was unnecessary. Because Daniel 10-12 is one prophecy
and not two prophecies, the total number of apocalyptic prophecies in
Daniel and Revelation is seventeen – five in Daniel and twelve in
Revelation.
26 Chapter 1 – Daniel 2

The Value and Importance of Rules

A beginning student of Bible prophecy may not appreciate the
necessity of a valid set of rules of interpretation (or hermeneutics) at
first, so hopefully the following parallel will help you understand
why rules of interpretation are essential to prophetic study:
Scientists achieve advances in the study of genetics at the cellular
level. By studying various cells within the human body, they have
been able to determine how certain cells operate. In more and more
cases, they have been able to predict the behavior of cells under
controlled circumstances, because they now know some of the secrets
of proteins and the DNA structure. Scientists are constantly testing
for “consistent behavior” within their studies of cells. Once the
behavior of a specific cell is understood, cell behavior can be changed
or influenced through drugs compounded to produce the desired
results. Pharmaceutical companies spend billions of dollars on this
type of painstaking research because they know that a genuine cure
for most diseases must occur at the cellular level.
Consistent Behavior
In a similar way, the architecture in Daniel is distilled through a
careful study of Daniel’s prophecies. Because the visions within
Daniel behave in a predictable way, this behavior allows us to
decipher things about the meaning of prophecy that we could not
otherwise know. For example, here is a consistent behavior that
occurs throughout the book of Daniel. Each of Daniel’s prophecies
have a beginning point and an ending point in time, and the events
in each prophecy occur in the order in which they are given. This
behavior may sound simple, but it has profound ramifications.
Consider the results of violating this self-evident rule. If the events
given within each prophecy of Daniel do not occur in their given
order, how, then, is the order of events determined? This question
brings up an even greater question. Does the Bible speak for itself
or must it have an interpreter? After many years of study on this
question, I find the Bible has to speak for itself and the Bible has to
be its own interpreter. The constant and predictable architecture
within Daniel’s prophecies is the basis for Rule One. This rule is:
Each apocalyptic prophecy has a beginning point and an ending
point in time and the events within each prophecy must occur in the
order they are given. Keep in mind, I am not inventing this rule.
Chapter 1 – Daniel 2 27

Instead, I am expressing a consistent behavior that recurs without

exception throughout the book of Daniel (as well as Revelation).
When the fulfilled elements of each prophecy in Daniel are aligned
with widely published historical records, the validity of Rule One
proves true every time! The prophecies in the book of Daniel cover
more than 2,600 years so far. This great span of time contains
everything necessary to validate the four rules that spring from the
architecture of Daniel. As a bonus, the book of Daniel provides a
historical foundation for certain prophecies in Revelation. Because
some of the prophecies in Revelation run parallel to the prophecies
in Daniel, we can link them together and establish the timing of
events mentioned in both books. So, the discovery of Daniel’s
architecture, like the discovery of the Rosetta Stone, enables the
Bible student to resolve many prophetic mysteries that would
otherwise be impossible to solve.
How Can the Bible Tell Us Things We Don’t Want to Believe?
Knowingly or unknowingly, every student of prophecy implements a
method of interpretation to support his prophetic conclusions. The
problem, of course, is that invalid rules will not produce valid
conclusions. For example, some people believe, “A day in Bible
prophecy always equals a year.” A rule cannot have an exception,
for if it does, who has the authority to determine when the rule
should be applied or ignored? So, if we accept the idea that a day for
a year rule is always true, then the 1,000 years of Revelation 20
would have to be 365,242 years in length. (365.242 days in a year x
1,000 years = 365,242 years) For many reasons, I believe the all-
inclusive day-for-a-year rule is invalid. There are places in Daniel
and Revelation where God measures time according to the Jubilee
Calendar where a day represents a year (like the seventy weeks of
Daniel 9), but there are also places in Scripture where God
measures time in literal units (like the 42 months in Revelation
13:5). In fact, Rule Four tells us when God is using a day for a year
and when He is using literal time. The point is that rules force the
conclusions. If our rules are flawed or inadequate, our prophetic
conclusions will be flawed.
Popular eschatology today is “a nose of wax” which expositors
manipulate for political, religious or personal reasons. Millions of
people believe things that have no truth in them. If an idea is
28 Chapter 1 – Daniel 2

reasonable, then it is believable. However, we cannot ignore the

other side of the coin – that reasonableness does not ensure validity.
For thousands of years, people believed Earth stood still and the
Sun traveled in its orbit around Earth, until Copernicus came along
and ruined a very reasonable idea. Rules of interpretation are
vitally important to this study of prophecy because students of Bible
prophecy need a method whereby the Bible can tell us things that
we do not want to believe. We want a valid process whereby the
Bible can tell us things that run contrary to everything we believe so
that our understanding of God’s truth can increase. Therefore, we
need rules to test our conclusions and beliefs. In short, valid rules of
interpretation allow Bible prophecy to say all that it has to say, and
they help us listen to God’s truth so that we might learn of His
plans.
Private Interpretation
Any interpretation of prophecy which does not conform to a stated
set of valid rules is classified as a “private interpretation.” The word
“private” in this context does not mean obscure. Millions of people
can believe and endorse a private interpretation (and they do). A
private interpretation is an interpretation which does not have an
external means of validation. In other words, a private interpre-
tation cannot be tested and validated by an impartial jury given a
set of stated rules. This emphasizes our need to understand the
apocalyptic architecture in Daniel. There is one architecture in
Daniel and Revelation and there is one truth. Looking for that truth
is the joy of every Bible student. Even if we have the right rules of
interpretation, the likelihood of reaching the intended meaning is
not guaranteed, but it is greatly improved! (It is one thing to have
the right formula, but it is another to correctly solve the problem.)
The Four Rules
When the rules of interpretation are valid, the prophecies in Daniel
and Revelation will make sense just as they read, because the Bible
is its own interpreter. On the other hand, a private interpretation
requires an interpreter. An interpreter stands between the Bible
and its meaning; whereas, valid rules explain the meaning without a
go-between. Consider the difference. A private interpretation
prevents people from independently arriving at the same conclusion
without the coaxing of an interpreter, but a valid set of rules enables
Chapter 1 – Daniel 2 29

people to arrive at similar conclusions without knowing one another.

Many Christians believe whatever their leaders say about prophecy
without actually studying the conclusions for themselves. Lay
people usually “go along” because their church endorses a particular
view. Because the subject of Bible prophecy is complex and
complicated, and the average Christian does not study prophecy, it
is easier to follow the leader. Of course, the mysteries of Bible
prophecy will vanish during the Great Tribulation because everyone
will see the evidence of what is predicted in Bible prophecy.
However, until the Great Tribulation begins, we need a set of valid
rules to guide our prophetic faith. If our rules of interpretation are
valid, the books of Daniel and Revelation will form a unified story. A
comprehensive explanation of God’s ways will unfold in a drama
that is in perfect harmony with all Scripture!
Since the following four rules will be used frequently throughout
this book, you may want to bookmark this page. After several years
of study and discovery, I am excited to share with you the
combination that unlocks the books of Daniel and Revelation. The
four rules are:
1. Each apocalyptic prophecy has a beginning and
ending point in time and the events within each
prophecy must occur in the order they are given.
2. A fulfilment of apocalyptic prophecy occurs when
all of the specifications within that prophecy are
met. This includes the order of events outlined in
the prophecy.
3. Apocalyptic language can be literal, symbolic or
analogous. To reach the intended meaning of a
prophecy, the student must consider: (a) the
context, (b) the use of parallel language in the
Bible, and (c) relevant statements in the Bible that
define that symbol if an element is thought to be
symbolic.
4. God reckons apocalyptic time in two ways: (a) a
day for a year, and (b) as literal time. The presence
or absence of the Jubilee calendar determines how
God reckons time.
30 Chapter 1 – Daniel 2

By the time you finish this book, I hope you will find my conclusions
to be consistent with these four rules. Test the rules to see if they
are valid and test my conclusions to see if they align with the rules.
Do not forget – God sealed up the book of Daniel until the time of
the end because the message in Daniel and Revelation uniquely
belongs to the last generation. Ours is the generation that will
experience the Great Tribulation, and when it begins, the whole
world will be caught up in a drama of unimaginable consequences.
Because God’s forthcoming behavior will be shocking and
outrageous during the Great Tribulation, God has unsealed the book
of Daniel so that the last generation might understand His ways and
some of His purposes before the Great Tribulation begins. “The
knowledge of the secrets of the kingdom of God has been
given to you, but to others I speak in parables, so that,
‘though seeing, they may not see; though hearing, they may
not understand.’ ” (Luke 8:10)
 Chapter 2
Daniel 3 – A FFaith
aith Mor
Moree Precious Than Gold
Precious
“You say, ‘I am rich; I have acquired wealth and do not need
a thing.’ But you do not realize that you are wretched, pitiful,
poor, blind and naked. I counsel you to buy from me gold
refined in the fire, so you can become rich; and white clothes
to wear, so you can cover your shameful nakedness; and
salve to put on your eyes, so you can see. Those whom I love
I rebuke and discipline. So be earnest, and repent. Here I am!
I stand at the door and knock . . . .”
- Revelation 3:17-20

God’s Agent of Wrath

King Nebuchadnezzar set siege to Jerusalem three times. He finally
destroyed the city in 586 B.C. because Israel refused to submit to his
“higher” authority. Even though the secular mind would say that
Jerusalem was destroyed because of rebellion against Nebuchad-
nezzar, the Bible indicates that Jerusalem was destroyed because
Israel refused to submit to God’s “highest” authority. (See Jeremiah
25 and Ezekiel 14.) The destruction of Israel by Nebuchadnezzar
teaches a profound truth: God’s longsuffering with Israel and His
wrath against Israel are mirrors reflecting how God deals with all
nations. (Leviticus 18:28; Jeremiah 25:12; Acts 10:34) God preserved
a record of His actions in the Bible so future generations could
understand why “He sets up governments and takes them down.”
In this particular setting, God selected Nebuchadnezzar to be His
servant, His agent of wrath against Israel. (Jeremiah 25:9; 27:6;
43:10) God empowered and enabled the king of the north,
Nebuchadnezzar, to destroy His city and His people because of their
rebellion and decadence. (Daniel 9) The role of Nebuchadnezzar as
the king of the north and the office of Nebuchadnezzar as the king of
Babylon parallels the coming of the Antichrist. During the Great
Tribulation, Lucifer will appear on Earth masquerading as God.
The devil will be the “stern-faced king” from the North (Daniel 8:23;
32 Chapter 2 – Daniel 3

11:36), and the devil will be the king of modern Babylon! We will
examine these profound parallels in our study on Daniel 8.
Three Sins
God’s patience with Israel ended because of three persistent sins:
a) Israel violated God’s Sabbaths, b) Israel engaged in sexual
immorality, and c) Israel chose to worship idols instead of their
Savior. (Do you see an end-time parallel?) Thoughtfully consider
God’s words as He lamented the apostasy of Israel: “Her priests do
violence to my law and profane my holy things; they do not
distinguish between the holy and the common; they teach
that there is no difference between the unclean and the
clean; and they shut their eyes to the keeping of my
Sabbaths, so that I am profaned among them.” (Ezekiel 22:26)
Also consider God’s comments about the clergy of Israel: “ ‘And
among the prophets of Jerusalem I have seen something
horrible: They commit adultery and live a lie. They
strengthen the hands of evildoers, so that no one turns from
his wickedness. They are all like Sodom to me; the people of
Jerusalem are like Gomorrah . . . For they have done
outrageous things in Israel; they have committed adultery
with their neighbors’ wives and in my name have spoken
lies, which I did not tell them to do. I know it and am a
witness to it,’ declares the Lord.” (Jeremiah 23:14; 29:23)
Therefore this is what the Sovereign Lord says: ‘I myself am
against you, Jerusalem, and I will inflict punishment on you
in the sight of the nations. Because of all your detestable
idols, I will do to you what I have never done before and will
never do again. Therefore in your midst fathers will eat their
children, and children will eat their fathers. I will inflict
punishment on you and will scatter all your survivors to the
winds.’ ” (Ezekiel 5:8-10)
We learn from Isaiah, Jeremiah and Ezekiel why God’s anger with
Israel reached a boiling point. His holy name had been profaned
among the nations of Earth by Israel’s decadence. As represen-
tatives of the Most High God and trustees of the everlasting gospel,
Israel degenerated to such a decadent condition that God could no
longer use Israel as His representative. Destruction was the only
Chapter 2 – Daniel 3 33

solution. Therefore, God Himself raised up a “servant-destroyer,” the

king of Babylon, to destroy His city and His people.
The Vanished Vision
Daniel and his three friends, Shadrach, Meshach and Abednego,
were taken from Jerusalem as prisoners of war during the first siege
of Nebuchadnezzar in 605 B.C. Shortly after they arrived in
Babylon, God exalted Daniel and his friends before King Nebuchad-
nezzar through a curious turn of events. One night, God gave
Nebuchadnezzar a vision that outlined the remaining course of
human history. (Daniel 2) Essentially, the vision consisted of a great
statue of a man that was made out of various materials. At the end
of the vision, a great rock that came out of the sky smashed the
statue to pieces. When the king awoke, he became agitated for two
reasons. First, Nebuchadnezzar knew that he had received an
important vision but he could not remember what it was. He
thought it was from Marduk, the god of the Babylonians. Second, as
the king fretted over his loss of memory, he realized that he had no
other option than to ask the clergy of Babylon for help. The king did
not have total confidence in the “wise men” of Babylon and he
anticipated a skirmish with them. To stop this before it started,
Nebuchadnezzar made it clear that he would not tolerate any delay
or double talk on their part.
Behind the scenes, the God of Heaven was unfolding a plan to exalt
His holy name throughout the world. Nebuchadnezzar’s vision was
from the God of Heaven, not Marduk, and it was the God of Heaven
who gave the king amnesia. By doing this, God made fools of
Babylon’s clergy and at the same time revealed the impotence of
Marduk. Even though the vanished vision agitated the king, the
agitation caused by that vanished vision became the very means
through which young Daniel became exalted to a position close to
the king.
God Is So Clever
After rising from bed, and I am sure, pacing the floor, Nebuchad-
nezzar called an emergency meeting for all the wise men of the
palace. Suspecting lame excuses and weasel words, Nebuchad-
nezzar confronted his wise men with these words: “So the king
summoned the magicians, enchanters, sorcerers and
34 Chapter 2 – Daniel 3

astrologers to tell him what he had dreamed. When they

came in and stood before the king, he said to them, ‘I have
had a dream that troubles me and I want to know what it
means.’ Then the astrologers answered the king in Aramaic,
‘O king, live forever! Tell your servants the dream, and we
will interpret it.’ The king replied to the astrologers, ‘This is
what I have firmly decided: If you do not tell me what my
dream was and interpret it, I will have you cut into pieces
and your houses turned into piles of rubble. But if you tell
me the dream and explain it, you will receive from me gifts
and rewards and great honor. So tell me the dream and
interpret it for me.’ Once more they replied, ‘Let the king tell
his servants the dream, and we will interpret it.’ Then the
king answered, ‘I am certain that you are trying to gain time
[so that you can create another one of your incoherent riddles],
because you realize that this is what I have firmly decided: If
you do not [immediately] tell me the dream, there is just one
penalty for you. [If you do not tell me the dream, I will know that]
You have conspired to tell me misleading and wicked things
[during times past], hoping the situation will [favorably] change
[in each instance to fit your predictions]. So then [since you claim to
have contact with the god of Babylon], tell me the dream, and I
will know [beyond doubt] that you can interpret it for me.’ ”
(Daniel 2:2-9, insertions mine)
Nebuchadnezzar was no dummy. Consider his speech to the wise
men. If the wise men proved to be a bunch of clever liars, he would
destroy them. If they really did have a supernatural connection with
Marduk, as they had claimed, they would be rewarded. The
astrologers, magicians, sorcerers and enchanters represented
Babylon’s diverse religion and they claimed, from time to time, to
have received visions from Marduk on behalf of the king. Their
claims of contact with Marduk almost led to their demise.
False Prophets
In ancient times kings often sought out the services of clergymen as
counselors and advisors. For example, Jezebel employed 450
prophets of Baal. (1 Kings 18:19) Even as late as the fourth century
A.D., Constantine depended heavily upon the advice and flattery of
the theologian, Eusebius. Clergymen were important because
Chapter 2 – Daniel 3 35

ancient rulers believed their prosperity and power depended on

staying within the favor of “the gods.” To earn their “salt,”
clergymen had to walk a fine line. They had to say things that
flattered the ego of their employer and they had to utter prophecies
that could not prove to be embarrassing. For this reason, “wise
men” were notoriously hard to “pin down.” By using carefully
crafted “weasel words,” they always had an “out” hidden somewhere
in their riddles and prophecies.
In ancient times, the highest rank among the clergymen was that of
a prophet. (Remember Balaam? See Numbers 22.) Any person who
had direct connection with “the gods” was highly honored, respected
and paid well. It is ironic that God’s prophets in Israel received the
opposite fate. God’s prophets were often stoned or executed because
Israel’s kings did not want to hear the truth! (Matthew 23:37)
Babylon’s prophets were well educated and they presented their
messages to Nebuchadnezzar with such slippery words that their
prophecies always seemed to come true no matter how the situation
unfolded. When Daniel stood before the king and repeated the
forgotten vision and declared its interpretation, the king
immediately recognized the veracity of Daniel’s words. Daniel was a
“true” prophet speaking clearly and decisively. He did not use
weasel words! To keep Daniel close, Nebuchadnezzar promoted
Daniel above all the prophets in Babylon.
Keep this thought in mind: A false prophet is a person who claims
to speak for God when God has not spoken to that person. Every
time Israel drifted away from God, she became full of false prophets
and this made God angry. Men were saying “God showed this to
me,” or “God said this to me,” when in fact God had said nothing or
shown nothing. False prophets make God angry because the
predictions of false prophets do not come to pass. Therefore, it is
only a matter of time until God’s Word is defamed and considered
worthless when falsehoods are uttered in His name. God promises
to destroy anyone who uses His name for the sake of credibility.
(See Ezekiel 13.) Lucifer is given the title, “false prophet,” in
Revelation 19:20 for this very reason. The devil will speak out of his
own evil imagination while masquerading as God!
So, in an effort to stay within the king’s favor (and earn their keep),
Babylon’s prophets made up fables and riddles to please and flatter
36 Chapter 2 – Daniel 3

the king. But Nebuchadnezzar was smart enough to know that a

dream cannot be validated or studied by other people, and although
a false prophet can say that he has received a vision, no one can
prove otherwise if the message is not clearly stated. (See also 1 Kings
18:22 and 2 Kings 3.) So, when Nebuchadnezzar demanded the wise
men to reveal the vanished vision, he turned the tables on them.
There was no room for deception. The king reasoned that if his wise
men really had contact with the gods, if they received visions as he
had, and if they had the ability to interpret visions from Marduk,
then they should be able to describe and interpret the vision which
Marduk had given the king.
So, the king called his wise men to his throne and he confronted
them with a request that left no wiggle room. When the wise men
heard the demand of the king, they knew they were in serious
trouble. They would not be able to weasel their way out of this
confrontation. Consider their defense: “The astrologers answered
the king, ‘There is not a man on earth who can do what the
king asks! No king, however great and mighty, has ever
asked such a thing of any magician or enchanter or
astrologer. What the king asks is too difficult. No one can
reveal it to the king except the gods, and they do not live
among men.’ This made the king so angry and furious that he
ordered the execution of all the wise men of Babylon.” (Daniel
2:10-12) Can you imagine being summoned to the palace for an
emergency meeting only to discover that your execution is minutes
away? In the presence of Nebuchadnezzar, all of the wise men of
Babylon were forced to admit their deceitful ways and failure. How
clever of the God of Heaven to have the wise men confess with their
own mouths the impotence of the Babylonian religion. When the
moment of truth came, the clergy of Babylon were disgraced and the
king was justifiably furious with them.
Marduk Is Not a God
Before God exalted His holy name throughout the empire, He chose
to demonstrate that Marduk was “not a god.” It is amazing how a
forgotten dream turned the world of Babylon’s clergy upside down.
Minutes before the vision took place, the prophets of Babylon were
highly paid and widely respected as “wise men.” After meeting with
the king for a few minutes, the clergymen of Babylon were forced to
Chapter 2 – Daniel 3 37

confess their impotence and a death sentence was hung over their
heads. I am reminded of Paul’s words, “But God chose the
foolish things of the world to shame the wise; God chose the
weak things of the world to shame the strong.” (1 Corinthians
1:27) Do you see an end-time parallel here? (Hint: Few, if any, of
the 144,000 will be theologians; yet they will embarrass the clergy of
the world.)
Remember, the point of this story is that God wanted to vindicate
His holy name before the nations of Earth. He wanted the whole
world to know that He was a God of love and salvation, a God of
mercy and justice, a God of fairness and truth, a God of compassion
and majesty. Unfortunately, the opposite had occurred. The Jews
had made enemies of almost everyone on Earth. They had slandered
and profaned the exalted name of God, trampled upon His law, and
rejected every prophet He sent to them. So, God implemented a plan
to restore His good name and He chose to use the mouth of a
heathen king to do it! A sovereign God can make a servant out of
anyone or anything.
The Death Decree
News of a sudden and unexpected death decree for all the wise men
of Babylon flew from the palace of Nebuchadnezzar as fast as a
horse could go. The “news media” was on this story in a heartbeat.
The threat of death for all the wise men of Babylon did something
that Nebuchadnezzar would later regret. The king unwittingly
informed the whole world of the impotence of Babylon’s wise men by
putting a death decree on their heads. Even worse, the entire
kingdom became eager to know the contents of a vision that had
vanished from the king’s memory.
Daniel Exalted
Through a series of providential events, Daniel eventually stood
before the king. He not only revealed the vanished vision, but he
also interpreted the vision for the king. This pleased the king more
than words can express. When the king heard Daniel’s testimony, he
was thrilled. Notice what the king did: “Then King Nebuchad-
nezzar fell prostrate before Daniel and paid him honor and
ordered that an offering and incense be presented to him.
The king said to Daniel, ‘Surely your God is the God of gods
38 Chapter 2 – Daniel 3

and the Lord of kings and a revealer of mysteries, for you

were able to reveal this mystery.’ Then the king placed
Daniel in a high position and lavished many gifts on him. He
made him ruler over the entire province of Babylon and
placed him in charge of all its wise men.” (Daniel 2:46-48)
A few hours later, the king had a change of heart. He must have
grimaced as he faced three sobering truths: First, Daniel had
informed the king that Marduk did not give him the vision.
Nebuchadnezzar’s vision came from the Most High God of the Jews,
those despicable captives from Jerusalem. How could these captives
have a God greater than the god of the Babylonians? Second, Daniel
told the king that the God of the Jews was sovereign over all the
kingdoms of the world, even Babylon. Nebuchadnezzar was told
that God sets up kings and He takes them down, according to His
sovereign authority. Nebuchadnezzar may have been somewhat
flattered to learn that it was the Most High God of Heaven who had
given him a throne. However, the reality of Daniel’s words did not
sink in. Nevertheless, God wanted Nebuchadnezzar to know that he
had not gained the throne of Babylon by human prowess, but this
lesson would not be learned until after the king spent seven years
living among animals. (See Daniel 4:16; 5:21.) The third truth that
dawned on Nebuchadnezzar was the most chilling of all. Daniel told
the king that his kingdom would be destroyed in days to come and
another kingdom would rise to take its place. As the king churned
over the vanished vision and the train of events that it produced, he
must have concluded his vision was more of a nightmare than a
revelation from God.
The King Distressed
Nebuchadnezzar’s impatience with the wise men had created a
political nightmare. The king had publically humiliated and
discredited the wise men of Babylon. He had tested the god of the
Babylonians and proved that Marduk was inferior to the God of the
Jews. Worst of all, he had fueled the curiosity of his subjects by
putting a death decree on the heads of Babylon’s wise men.
Everyone wanted to know the contents of the forgotten vision! The
seriousness of a death decree for the exalted clergy of Babylon
indicated the forgotten vision was no trivial matter. Furthermore,
when the Jewish teenager, Daniel, was promoted above all the wise
Chapter 2 – Daniel 3 39

men of Babylon, it became obvious to everyone that Daniel had

successfully recalled and interpreted the vision for the king. So,
now that the vision had been recalled and interpreted, what did it
say?
We know the vision predicted the fall of Babylon and other world
empires, but Nebuchadnezzar did not want his subjects to know that
the God of the Hebrews had predestined the fall and destruction of
his empire. The king knew that if this information leaked out, his
government would collapse. A government cannot survive without
the submission and loyalty of its subjects. If the news spread
throughout his kingdom that the Most High God had decreed the
fall of Babylon, Nebuchadnezzar knew he would become a king
without a throne. How could anyone maintain confidence in a king
that was predestined to destruction by the Most High God?
Nebuchadnezzar knew that tenure on the throne was possible for as
long as people were loyal to him and his regime. If his subjects
heard that the God of Heaven had numbered his days, they would
rise up in rebellion and he would perish. (Note: In ancient times,
loyalty to a fallen king was usually punished by death when the
next king gained dominion, so people were wary about their
loyalties. The fact that Daniel remained alive and was appointed to
serve in the government of Darius after Belshazzar was killed was a
miracle. Daniel 5.)
Kings may conquer nations and kings may kill thousands to secure
their authority, but no king can thwart the God of Heaven. The
rumor began to spread that the God of the Jews had predestined the
fall of Babylon. Based on Nebuchadnezzar’s subsequent actions, I
believe it is safe to conclude that administrators from the far
reaches of the empire must have sent requests for clarification so
they could deal with the rumors about the vision. As the situation
worsened, Nebuchadnezzar consulted with his embarrassed wise
men and they decided to dissolve the rumor by mixing error with
truth. Nebuchadnezzar chose to distort the truth that was given to
him in the vision for a number of practical and political purposes.
The wise men owed their lives to the king (actually to Daniel and his
three friends), because the king relented on the death decree.
Consequently, they were very eager to help the king solve this
political problem. Nebuchadnezzar and the wise men conspired to
tell the world that Marduk had given the king a great vision of “a
40 Chapter 2 – Daniel 3

golden man.” The people would be told that the golden man
represented the kingdom of Babylon, which would last forever.
Based on the course of events recorded in the Bible, Nebuchad-
nezzar evidently alleged to his subjects that he “was commanded” in
the vision to empty the golden coffers of Babylon to erect a great
golden replica of the vision. Because the rumor had circulated that
Babylon was predestined to fall, the king decided to use the golden
image as a way to renew loyalty to his government. He required all
of his administrators and governors to travel to the province of
Babylon so that they could be present when the vision of “the golden
image” would be proclaimed by the king and the image dedicated.
The construction of a 90-foot tall golden image of a man began in
earnest. (It is believed that a cubit in ancient Babylon equaled 18-20
inches, so 60 cubits in height would equal about 90 feet. For
comparison’s sake, the Statue of Liberty is 111 feet tall, but Lady
Liberty stands on a pedestal that is 194 feet high, which makes her
total height 305 feet.) Due to the swiftness of rumors and the
irreparable damage they can cause, there was no time for delay.
Riders on horses were dispatched to the ends of Earth calling the
administrators and governors to be present on the Plain of Dura at
an appointed time. Because Nebuchadnezzar anticipated some
resistence to his plans, he sent orders to those in charge of the giant
smelting furnaces that were used to cast the metal man. They were
to make sure the furnaces were burning during the dedication
service. The loyalty test would be very simple. If anyone refused to
bow down and worship the golden image at the appointed time, he
would be thrown into one of the furnaces. The king calculated his
loyalty test would force everyone back into “the fold” if any loyalties
had been compromised by the rumor that Babylon was destined for
destruction. The immediate death of rebels always reduces
potential problems. The king was satisfied that this course of action
would protect his throne.
I Did It My Way
The Bible indicates that Nebuchadnezzar had become pompous and
indulgent. He erroneously believed that he had gained the throne
through personal savvy and superior intellect. (Daniel 4:30; Daniel
7:4) He had heard Daniel’s declaration, but he did not comprehend
the fact that the God of Heaven gave him his kingdom. In short, the
Chapter 2 – Daniel 3 41

king was arrogant and to protect his throne, he thought a golden

image and a loyalty test would bring an end to the rumor that
Babylon was predestined to fall. It is possible that this is the most
expensive lie ever told by a man. Consider the amount of gold and
work that was required to cast a statue 90 feet tall. Consider also,
the amount of travel and logistics necessary to bring thousands of
administrators from the far-flung corners of the earth to the Plain of
Dura. This story highlights an interesting point about the carnal
heart: Power can be of greater value than money. Men will go to
extremes to gain or hold on to power. (We regularly see politicians
spend millions to win a government office that pays very little
money.) To keep his lie covered up, Nebuchadnezzar prevented
Daniel from attending the service. He had highly honored Daniel
for telling the truth, but now that he was implementing a great lie,
he did not want Daniel to be at the service to observe his
foolishness.
A Time of Testing
When Daniel was promoted above the wise men of Babylon, Daniel
asked that his friends be recognized for their contribution toward
solving the mystery of the vanished vision. (Daniel 2:18,49) Their
promotion almost proved to be the cause of their death. The king
wanted everyone who was someone in his government to be present
at the dedication of the golden image. In the political arena, the
question of loyalty is paramount to everything else. One man can
exercise power over others only if the others are willing to submit.
Daniel’s friends, Meshach, Shadrach and Abednego, knew the test of
loyalty was coming. What should they do? They could not run and
hide because the king had given them high positions in the
government of Babylon. Furthermore, the impotent wise men of
Babylon were jealously eager to have Daniel and these “three Jews”
removed from their high offices. Therefore, if they were to avoid the
dedication of the golden image, they would show reluctance in
honoring the king. Hesitation on this point could be regarded as
treason. As the date approached, I am sure Daniel and his friends
met together to ask the Lord for divine intervention. On the basis of
their testimony during the dedication service, it is safe to say that
Shadrach, Meshach and Abednego obediently went to the service
expecting to be thrown into the fiery furnace. What courage! But,
42 Chapter 2 – Daniel 3

this is exactly what God wanted! God needed three young men who
were willing to go to their death so that He could exalt His holy
name. Remember, this story began because God wanted to defend
His name before the nations of the world. The Jews had profaned
His holy name by their degenerate behavior, and God wanted to set
the record straight. In order to accomplish this, God needed an
expensive golden image, a pagan king who knew the truth, a large
crowd of world leaders who were confused by rumors, a very hot
fiery furnace and three young men who would be faithful to their
death.
The Moment of Truth
“So the satraps, prefects, governors, advisers, treasurers,
judges, magistrates and all the other provincial officials
assembled for the dedication of the image that King Nebu-
chadnezzar had set up, and they stood before it. Then the
herald loudly proclaimed, ‘This is what you are commanded
to do, O peoples, nations and men of every language: As soon
as you hear the sound of the horn, flute, zither, lyre, harp,
pipes and all kinds of music, you must fall down and worship
the image of gold that King Nebuchadnezzar has set up.
Whoever does not fall down and worship will immediately be
thrown into a blazing furnace.’ Therefore, as soon as they
heard the sound of the horn, flute, zither, lyre, harp and all
kinds of music, all the peoples, nations and men of every
language fell down and worshiped the image of gold that
King Nebuchadnezzar had set up. At this time some
astrologers came forward and denounced the Jews.” (Daniel
3:3-8)
All of a sudden, the dedication service stopped. As far as the eye
could see, all but three Jews had bowed down before the golden
man. The wise men wasted no time reporting this anomaly to the
king. The three Hebrews were arrested and presented to the king.
The golden image was forgotten. The music stopped. Everyone
stood up and turned around to see what was about to happen. Every
eye focused on three young Jews who dared to rebel against the
monarch of Babylon! As they approached the throne, the king must
have uttered some bad Babylonian words under his breath as he
said, “How did they get here?” The king was embarrassed and
Chapter 2 – Daniel 3 43

frustrated. The whole dedication service could unravel and the

result could be worse than the truth he was trying to hide!
Did you notice the astrologers came forward to report the insolence
of the three Hebrews? This is amazing. The wise men owed their
very lives to these three young men and yet, the wise men were the
first to report their disobedience to the king. (There is an end-time
parallel here. The clergy will be the first to condemn God’s
servants!) “They said to King Nebuchadnezzar, ‘O king, live
forever! You have issued a decree, O king, that everyone who
hears the sound of the horn, flute, zither, lyre, harp, pipes
and all kinds of music must fall down and worship the image
of gold, and that whoever does not fall down and worship
will be thrown into a blazing furnace. But there are some
Jews whom you have set over the affairs of the province of
Babylon – Shadrach, Meshach and Abednego – who pay no
attention to you, O king. They neither serve your gods nor
worship the image of gold you have set up.’ Furious with
[embarrassment and] rage, Nebuchadnezzar summoned
Shadrach, Meshach and Abednego. So these men were
brought before the king, and Nebuchadnezzar said to them,
‘Is it true, Shadrach, Meshach and Abednego, that you do not
serve my gods or worship the image of gold I have set up?’ ”
(Daniel 3:9-14, insertion mine)
The king personally knew Shadrach, Meshach and Abednego. He
knew their integrity and loyalty. He knew they were close friends of
Daniel, but somehow they had been overlooked in this scheme.
They should not have been present. Now, he had no other option but
to destroy them if he wanted to protect his throne. The king was “up
the creek in a chicken wire canoe.” Nebuchadnezzar, the king of
Earth, had created a huge lie, but the God of Heaven had gathered
everyone together to hear and see a truth that was greater than a
golden lie. (The truth of God is most clearly seen when openly
confronted with falsehood.) The king responded to the rebellion of
Meshach, Shadrach and Abednego with feigned generosity, hoping
they would humor him on this matter. The king had a big political
problem on his hands (which he had created by threatening the wise
men), and he did not want a showdown with the Most High God of
these three men. So the king tried to appear generous: “Now
when you hear the sound of the horn, flute, zither, lyre, harp,
44 Chapter 2 – Daniel 3

pipes and all kinds of music, if you are ready to fall down
and worship the image I made, very good. But if you do not
worship it, you will be thrown immediately into a blazing
furnace. Then what god will be able to rescue you from my
hand?” (Daniel 3:15)
The words of Nebuchadnezzar are interesting. The king honestly
knew these three lads were not rebellious toward him; after all, they
had joined with Daniel in seeking an answer to his vanished vision.
But the king was haughty enough to taunt the lads with the remark,
“Then what god will be able to rescue you from my hand?”
The king uttered these words because he knew of their loyalty to
their God. He may have even known about the second
commandment of their God. The action of the king reveals another
interesting fact about the carnal heart: The performance of a miracle
does not always change the carnal heart. (Centuries later, Jesus
raised Lazarus from the dead in the presence of many unbelievers
and some of them still refused to accept Christ as the Messiah! See
John 11.) In Nebuchadnezzar’s case, he personally experienced the
vanished vision and witnessed the miracle when Daniel told him
what he had dreamed. But neither event changed the king’s heart.
When confronted with the loyalty of the three Jews to the King of
kings, the king of Earth thought he had the high ground, but as it
turns out, he was on holy ground! To protect his lies, the king had to
kill those who stood for the truth. He knew that they knew the
truth about the vanished vision because he had promoted them for
participating with Daniel in praying for the truth! He also knew
that he could never recover from public disgrace if he showed any
sign of weakness or timidity in the presence of thousands of his
administrators. So, the king did what every carnal heart would do,
and the young men did what every born-again believer would do.
The metal in each heart was revealed.
“Shadrach, Meshach and Abednego replied to the king, ‘O
Nebuchadnezzar, we do not need to defend ourselves before
you in this matter [because you know the truth and we know the
truth about the vanished vision]. If we are thrown into the
blazing furnace, the God we serve is able to save us from it,
and he will rescue us from your hand, O king. But even if he
does not, we want you to know, O king, that we will not serve
Chapter 2 – Daniel 3 45

your gods or worship the image of gold you have set up.’ ”
(Daniel 3:16-18, insertion mine)
Shadrach, Meshach and Abednego had prepared for this moment.
Through prayer and fasting, they had strengthened their resolve to
stand firm for God. This event was a showdown between the gold of
Babylon and the pure gold of faith in God. When the king saw that
these young men were not going to acquiesce and “go along” with his
plan, he became very angry. They had publically rejected his
authority, and this was the very thing he was trying to protect with
the creation and dedication of the golden image!
“Then was Nebuchadnezzar full of fury, and the form of his
visage was changed against Shadrach, Meshach, and
Abednego: therefore he spake, and commanded that they
should heat the furnace one seven times more than it was
wont to be [normally] heated. And he commanded the most
mighty men that were in his army to bind Shadrach,
Meshach, and Abednego, and to cast them into the burning
fiery furnace. Then these men were bound in their coats,
their hosen [trousers], and their hats, and their other
garments, and were cast into the midst of the burning fiery
furnace.” (Daniel 3:19-21, KJV, insertions mine)
I like the way the KJV states these verses because I like the power
of its language. The Bible says “the form of his visage was changed.”
I understand this to mean that Nebuchadnezzar’s face turned fiery
red (maybe his blood pressure hit 220/160). He was hotter than a
firecracker on the fourth of July because his kingly ego had been
hammered. Here is a mystery: Even though the carnal heart is full
of rebellion, it hates insubordination more than anything else. When
the carnal heart cannot get its way, its fury knows no limits. The
king’s authority was publically rejected, and no king can tolerate
open rebellion. Rejection, or the fear of rejection, is the underlying
basis for peer pressure and much social torment. To successfully
deal with rejection, a person must receive daily injections of
spiritual courage and stamina. Meshach, Shadrach and Abednego
were at peace with their fate on that day because they had walked
and talked with God. They had practiced obedience in small things
– this was not their first test. Loyalty that can withstand the
46 Chapter 2 – Daniel 3

prospect of a fiery death does not come overnight. Instead, it comes

in little steps.
The God of Heaven Intervenes
“The king’s command was so urgent and the furnace so hot
that the flames of the fire killed the soldiers who took up
Shadrach, Meshach and Abednego, and these three men,
firmly tied, fell into the blazing furnace. Then King
Nebuchadnezzar leaped to his feet in amazement and asked
his advisers, ‘Weren’t there three men that we tied up and
threw into the fire?’ They replied, ‘Certainly, O king.’ He
said, ‘Look! I see four men walking around in the fire,
unbound and unharmed, and the fourth looks like a son of
the gods.’ Nebuchadnezzar then approached the opening of
the blazing furnace and shouted, ‘Shadrach, Meshach and
Abednego, servants of the Most High God, come out! Come
here!’ So Shadrach, Meshach and Abednego came out of the
fire, and the satraps, prefects, governors and royal advisers
crowded around them. They saw that the fire had not
harmed their bodies, nor was a hair of their heads singed;
their robes were not scorched, and there was no smell of fire
on them.” (Daniel 3:22-27)
The death of Nebuchadnezzar’s soldiers proved to the vast audience
that the heat of the furnace was extreme. The soldiers who threw
the three Jews into the furnace went to their death because they
were loyal and obedient to their earthly king. The three Hebrews
that were supposed to go to their death were obedient and loyal to
their Heavenly King. (Exodus 20:4-6) In both cases, loyalty was
present, but the greater question is: “Which king deserves highest
loyalty?” While the three Hebrews were being bound and thrown
into the furnace, the king’s mind was in turmoil. He had to recover
from the showdown caused by these three Jews. He watched with
interest as the young men were bound and thrown into the furnace.
As he observed their fate and the deaths of his own soldiers, the
king was shocked! Instead of seeing their bodies consumed by fire,
he saw four men walking around in the furnace. The king jumped to
his feet and asked, “Weren’t there three men that we tied up
and threw into the fire?” His attendants assured him this was
the case. Then the king exclaimed, “Look! I see four men
Chapter 2 – Daniel 3 47

walking around in the fire . . .” Nebuchadnezzar immediately

recognized the fiery presence of God standing in the furnace with
the three Hebrews.
Nebuchadnezzar knew the golden image service was a charade.
Nebuchadnezzar knew he was in the wrong when he sent Shadrach,
Meshach and Abednego to the fiery furnace. In spite of knowing
these things, the king moved to protect his material interests. He
did this because his highest loyalties centered on himself. In this
sense, Nebuchadnezzar demonstrated the carnal heart that plagues
all of mankind. Nothing on Earth is more selfish and self-seeking
than the carnal heart. The root of the world’s problems today is
selfishness and self-seeking.
“Then Nebuchadnezzar said, ‘Praise be to the God of
Shadrach, Meshach and Abednego, who has sent his angel
and rescued his servants! They trusted in him and defied the
king’s command and were willing to give up their lives
rather than serve or worship any god except their own God.
Therefore I decree that the people of any nation or language
who say anything against the God of Shadrach, Meshach and
Abednego be cut into pieces and their houses be turned into
piles of rubble, for no other god can save in this way.’ Then
the king promoted Shadrach, Meshach and Abednego in the
province of Babylon.” (Daniel 3:28-30)
What does a humiliated king say to an enormous gathering of world
governors when his death decree upon three Jews was made null
and void by a miracle? The king did not admit defeat, nor did the
king offer an apology to the God of the Heaven. Instead, he turned
to his impotent wise men and confused administrators and said, “If
any of you speak evil about the God of Shadrach, Meshach and
Abednego, you will be cut in pieces!” Wow! The king deflects his
responsibility once again. The carnal heart of the king rejected
another chance to be transformed. Later, the God of Heaven finally
got the king’s attention by exiling him to the field as an animal for
seven years – but that is another story.
The End of This Story
When the administrators and governors returned to their distant
homes, they had a story to tell! In a few words their story went like
48 Chapter 2 – Daniel 3

this, “Yes, we saw the golden image, but that was nothing! Let me
tell you about the God of the Jews. He delivered three Jews out of a
roaring fiery furnace. We saw it with our own eyes. The fire was so
hot it killed the king’s soldiers, but the flames did not hurt the Jews!
That is some God the Jews have.” This story, repeated by a
thousand pagans all over the world, exalted the God of Heaven. As
a nation, the Jews had profaned the wonderful name of God, but
God found three Jews who had a faith of pure gold and He was able
to exalt His holy name through their obedience and loyalty.
There are numerous important end-time parallels in this story.
During the end-time, there will be “an image to the beast,” and all
people will be required to worship it or be killed. (Revelation 13)
You and I will be players in the drama that is forthcoming. It is
possible that we may have to stand before the dreaded king of
Babylon (Lucifer). Will we have a faith of pure gold? “To the angel
of the church in Laodicea write: These are the words of the
Amen, the faithful and true witness, the ruler of God’s
creation. I know your deeds, that you are neither cold nor
hot. I wish you were either one or the other! So, because you
are lukewarm – neither hot nor cold – I am about to spit you
out of my mouth. You say, ‘I am rich; I have acquired wealth
and do not need a thing.’ But you do not realize that you are
wretched, pitiful, poor, blind and naked. I counsel you to buy
from me gold refined in the fire, so you can become rich; and
white clothes to wear, so you can cover your shameful
nakedness; and salve to put on your eyes, so you can see.
Those whom I love I rebuke and discipline. So be earnest,
and repent. Here I am! I stand at the door and knock. If
anyone hears my voice and opens the door, I will come in
and eat with him, and he with me. To him who overcomes, I
will give the right to sit with me on my throne, just as I
overcame and sat down with my Father on his throne. He
who has an ear, let him hear what the Spirit says to the
churches.” (Revelation 3:14-22)
 Chapter 3
Daniel 7 – God Is Sover
Sovereign
ereign

“. . . Who foretold this long ago, who declared it from

the distant past? Was it not I, the Lord? And there is no
God apart from me, a righteous God and a Savior; there
is none but me.”
- Isaiah 45:21

Prophecy Reveals the Process of Salvation

Those who study Bible prophecy study the deeper things of God.
The beauty of prophecy is that we have an opportunity to under-
stand God’s grand purposes and timeless ways, even before history
records His actions. Unfortunately, many Christians dismiss the
importance of prophecy without understanding anything about the
subject. I often hear, “Prophecy has nothing to do with salvation, so
why bother with it?” While it may be true that prophecy does not
bring salvation, the fulfillment of prophecy has everything to do
with faith in God’s Word. Isn’t this one of the object lessons from
Noah’s flood? If the study of salvation reveals the justice and mercy
of God, then the study of prophecy reveals the process through
which God fulfills His Word.
God Amplifies the Matrix
About fifty years after God gave King Nebuchadnezzar and Daniel
the vision of the metal man, Daniel received a second vision. This
second vision is important for several reasons. First, Daniel 7 is a
repetition and expansion of Daniel 2. The vision in Daniel 2 is
amplified in Daniel 7 so that we might better understand the ways
and plans of God. Second, Daniel 7 is an important vision because
God adds certain details to the prophetic matrix which later visions
will build upon. Daniel 7 identifies the timing of two events upon
which other prophecies depend. If the timing of these two events
are overlooked or inaccurately identified, the other prophecies that
depend upon this timing will not harmonize. Bible prophecy is
50 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

something like a house of cards. Every new layer depends upon the
strength of the layer beneath it.
The vision in Daniel 2 can be compared to “sub-flooring,” that is, the
first layer in our prophetic understanding. Daniel 2 describes a
chronological sequence of seven kingdoms that spans more than
2,600 years (605 B.C. to the Second Coming). If the vision in Daniel
2 is sub-flooring, then the vision in Daniel 7 is the flooring. Daniel 7
lies on top of Daniel 2. (See Chart 3.1.) When bonded together, these
two visions strengthen each other. Both visions are identical in
length because they cover the same time period. The “nails” that
hold these two visions together are the elements within them. The
first four kingdoms described in Daniel 2 perfectly align with the
four beasts described in Daniel 7. Thus, the four beasts in Daniel 7
are a repetition and enlargement of the first four kingdoms
presented in Daniel 2. Carefully notice how repetition and
enlargement is used in Chart 3.1. By amplifying the elements of
each vision with information from other visions, God demonstrates
the all important operation of a matrix, and this matrix makes our
prophetic foundation more secure.

Timing 605 B.C. 538 B.C. 331 B.C. 168 B.C.

Daniel 7 Lion
Bear Leopard Monster
with
with with with
Eagle's
(Flooring) Three Ribs Four Wings 10 Horns
Wings

Daniel 2
Head of Chest of Thighs of Legs of
Gold Silver Bronze Iron
(Subflooring)

Kingdoms: Babylon Medo-Persia Grecia Rome

Chart 3.1
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 51

For at least two reasons, God implemented this architecture in

Daniel so that history would produce this matrix. First, if the same
kingdom is identified in different visions with unique specifications,
the chance of misinterpretation is greatly reduced, and different
views of the same kingdom expand our understanding of that
kingdom and its duration. For example, the thighs of bronze in
Daniel 2 represent the same kingdom as the leopard with four wings
in Daniel 7. (Notice the kingdom of Grecia in Chart 3.1.) Second,
God established the matrix in Daniel because He foreknew that He
could build on it 700 years later when He gave John the visions
recorded in Revelation. In other words, the matrix established in
Daniel is integral to the book of Revelation.
Daniel 8 Briefly Introduced
Since we are observing the use of repetition and enlargement, allow
me to jump ahead for a moment and add a few more elements to
Chart 3.1 from the visions in Daniel 8 and 11. The added data may
help you quickly see how the architecture in Daniel produces a
historical matrix. As this matrix grows larger, it becomes more
comprehensive. Eventually, every prophetic item in Daniel and
Revelation will harmoniously fit within this matrix.
Two years after receiving the vision recorded in Daniel 7, God gave
Daniel yet another vision. Even though Babylon had not fallen at
the time of this vision, Daniel knew that another kingdom would
displace Babylon. During the vision of Daniel 8, Daniel saw a great
conflict between a ram with two horns and a goat that had a large
horn protruding out of its head (maybe something like a unicorn
horn). The angel told Daniel that the ram represented the rising
kingdom of the Medes and the Persians, and the two horns of the
ram represented its two kings. Also, the goat represented the future
kingdom of Grecia, which would eventually destroy the kingdom of
the Medes and Persians. The angel told Daniel that the great horn
of the goat represented the first prominent king of the Grecian
empire which proved to be Alexander the Great. (Daniel 8:20,21)
With this information in mind, let us consider the first thousand
years (605 B.C. - A.D. 476) of the prophetic matrix that develops in
the book of Daniel.
52 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

Daniel 2, 7 and 8

168 B.C. -
Timing: 605 - 538 B.C. 538 - 331 B.C. 331 - 168 B.C.
A.D. 476

Daniel 8 Ram with Goat with One

Two Horns Great Horn
Daniel 7 Lion with Bear with Leopard with Monster with
Eagle's Wings Three Ribs Four Wings 10 Horns
Daniel 2 Head of Chest of Thighs of Legs of
Gold Silver Bronze Iron

Kingdoms: Babylon Medo-Persia Grecia Rome

Chart 3.2
Daniel 11 Briefly Introduced
Notice how the layers are adding up. The matrix is becoming more
inclusive. The ram in Daniel 8, the bear in Daniel 7, and the chest
of silver in Daniel 2 represent the same entity, Medo-Persia! This
matrix provides a solid footing for all of the prophecies in Daniel and
Revelation. God’s use of repetition and enlargement puts our
prophetic faith on solid ground. While we are discussing the
expansion and development of this matrix, let us jump forward to
Daniel’s last vision, look at Chart 3.3, and add portions of Daniel 11
to the matrix.
Look at the top two rows on Chart 3.3. Now, review the words
spoken to Daniel during the reign of Darius the Mede: “Now then, I
tell you the truth: Three more kings will appear in Persia,
and then a fourth, who will be far richer than all the others.
When he has gained power by his wealth, he will stir up
everyone against the kingdom of Greece. Then a mighty king
will appear, who will rule with great power and do as he
pleases.” (Daniel 11:2,3) History confirms the rise of these four
kings in Persia, and history confirms the overall progression of
kingdoms presented in this matrix. God knows the future before it
comes to pass and His Word cannot fail. The matrix in Chart 3.3
spans more than 1,000 years – from the rise of Babylon under
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 53

Nebuchadnezzar to the fall of civil Rome in A.D. 476. Even though

the book of Daniel offers more detail than this matrix presently
shows, a thousand years of history and prophecy should be sufficient
to demonstrate that God’s matrix conforms to a specific architecture!
Remember Rule One?
Daniel 2, 7, 8 and 11

168 B.C. -
Timing: 605 - 538 B.C. 538 - 331 B.C. 331 - 168 B.C.
A.D. 476

Daniel 11:2-4 Four Kings: Mighty King:

Cambyses, Alexander the
False Smerdis, Great
Darius I,
Xerxes
Daniel 8 Goat with
Ram with
One Great
Two Horns
Horn
Daniel 7 Lion with Bear with Leopard with Monster with
Eagle's Wings Three Ribs Four Wings 10 Horns
Daniel 2 Head of Chest of Thighs of Legs of
Gold Silver Bronze Iron

Kingdoms: Babylon Medo-Persia Grecia Rome

Chart 3.3
Repetition and enlargement are indispensable to the study of
prophecy. No prophecy in Daniel or Revelation tells a whole story
within itself. In fact, neither book, Daniel nor Revelation, tells the
whole story! The visions in both books interconnect and depend
upon each other. Many Bible teachers today offer erroneous
prophetic conclusions because they lift prophetic segments out of
their context and this violates the rules found in the book of Daniel.
Unless the Bible student has valid rules of interpretation, truth
cannot be determined. The visions of Daniel and Revelation can be
manipulated in an infinite number of wrong ways. Remember this:
All of the prophecies in Daniel and Revelation link to each other,
and together they form one harmonious matrix.
54 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

The matrix teaches us two things: First, each prophetic element in

Daniel can be tied to a specific time and location. Second, the
intended meaning of the prophecies in Daniel and Revelation is
found after we align all of the elements within the prophecies. A
puzzle is not solved until all of its pieces are in their right places.
The events described in each prophecy are the nails that hold all of
the layers together. When the prophetic matrix of Daniel and
Revelation is aligned correctly, a marvelous prophetic picture
unfolds. Understanding the big picture is important. The prophecies
of Daniel and Revelation are not limited to one nation or one church.
Instead, the prophecies of Daniel and Revelation encompass all
nations, kindred, tongues and people. God has a predetermined
blueprint that affects everyone on Earth. All prophetic pieces fit
together in an interlocking way so that every element in every
prophecy is supported by the elements around it! This is similar to
the arch over a castle’s doorway. Shaped stones support the span of
the arch because the architectural design of the doorway keeps the
arch intact. In a similar way, all of the prophecies in Daniel support
each other through the architectural design embedded in Daniel.
God designed this feature so that at the end of time, His people
could have an accurate and comprehensive understanding of His
plans. Of course, people who dismiss the importance of prophecy
will not have a clue as to what is going on when the next prophetic
event occurs.
Daniel Saw a Lion, Bear, Leopard and Terrible Beast
Now that we have examined the concept of a prophetic matrix in the
book of Daniel, we need to investigate the details in Daniel 7 and
notice how they fit within the big picture. This vision, as with all
the visions in Daniel, contains few words, but is full of detail. This
vision is highly important because it establishes a historical footing
for several other visions. If this particular vision is misinterpreted,
the intended meaning of Daniel or Revelation will be derailed.
As the vision begins, Daniel is looking over a great body of water.
From his vantage point, he sees four strange beasts rising up out of
the sea. These beasts are unusual in appearance because they have
strange features added to their bodies. These strange features
highlight specific characteristics that help to identify the empires
they represent.
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 55

1. A lion with eagle wings

2. A bear with three ribs in its mouth
3. A leopard with four wings and four heads
4. A monster or terrible beast having ten horns
To simplify this vision and its explanation, I have divided the vision
and my commentary into twelve parts. I hope you will read and
reread each of these parts until all of the elements are easy to
identify and understand.
Part One:
“In the first year of Belshazzar king of Babylon Daniel had a
dream and visions of his head upon his bed: then he wrote
the dream, and told the sum of the matters. Daniel spake and
said, I saw in my vision by night, and, behold, the four winds
of the heaven strove upon the great sea. And four great
beasts came up from the sea, diverse one from another. The
first was like a lion, and had eagle’s wings: I beheld till the
wings thereof were plucked, and it was lifted up from the
earth, and made stand upon the feet as a man, and a man’s
heart was given to it.” (Daniel 7:1-4, KJV)
Comments on Part One: Babylon
Historians say the first year of Belshazzar was about 552 B.C. If so,
this vision occurs about fifty years after the vision recorded in
Daniel 2. Daniel saw four great beasts rise up from the sea and he
was told these beasts represented four empires that would rise at
their appointed time. (Daniel 7:15-16) The first beast to rise up was
a lion, and it represents the empire of Babylon. Just as gold is the
king of metals, so the lion is the king of beasts. The eagle’s wings
indicate a military prowess that none can escape. The ancients
regarded the eagle’s keen vision and its ability to swoop down on its
prey as a fitting symbol of military power. (Deuteronomy 28:49)
These characteristics, no doubt, prompted the founding fathers of
the United States to use the Bald Eagle as a symbol of military
power. As Daniel watched, the lion lost its power and ability to
subdue nations. In this vision, the lion received a man’s heart, a
heart that is subject to vanity, arrogance, and pride. This transition
uniquely describes the arrogance of the kings of Babylon. God had to
56 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

humiliate King Nebuchadnezzar by taking him from the throne and

giving him the mind of an animal for seven years because of pride
and arrogance. (Daniel 4) Unfortunately, subsequent kings of
Babylon did not learn from Nebuchadnezzar’s humiliation and Babylon
ultimately fell because of arrogance and vanity. (Daniel 5:22)
Consider the words of Daniel to King Belshazzar on the last night of
Babylon’s insolence: “O king, the Most High God gave your
father Nebuchadnezzar sovereignty and greatness and glory
and splendor. Because of the high position he gave him, all
the peoples and nations and men of every language dreaded
and feared him. Those the king wanted to put to death, he
put to death; those he wanted to spare, he spared; those he
wanted to promote, he promoted; and those he wanted to
humble, he humbled. But when his heart became arrogant
and hardened with pride, he was deposed from his royal
throne and stripped of his glory. But you his son, O
Belshazzar, have not humbled yourself, though you knew all
this. Instead, you have set yourself up against the Lord of
heaven. You had the goblets from his temple brought to you,
and you and your nobles, your wives and your concubines
drank wine from them. You praised the gods of silver and
gold, of bronze, iron, wood and stone, which cannot see or
hear or understand. But you did not honor the God who
holds in his hand your life and all your ways. Therefore he
sent the hand that wrote the inscription. ‘This is the inscrip-
tion that was written: MENE, MENE, TEKEL, PARSIN This is
what these words mean: Mene: God has numbered the days
of your reign and brought it to an end. Tekel : You have been
weighed on the scales and found wanting. Peres : Your
kingdom is divided and given to the Medes and Persians.’ ”
(Daniel 5:18-28, NIV) The Bible leaves no wiggle room on the
identity of the lion. Daniel 2:38 says the head of gold is Babylon,
and Daniel 8 tells us the next kingdom after Babylon is that of the
Medes and Persians. Therefore, the lion with a man’s heart is a
perfect representation of Babylon, and history agrees.
Part Two: Medo-Persia
And behold another beast, a second, like to a bear, and it
raised up itself on one side, and it had three ribs in the
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 57

mouth of it between the teeth of it: and they said thus unto
it, Arise, devour much flesh. (Daniel 7:5, KJV)
Comments on Part Two
Two features stand out about this ferocious bear. First, Daniel
observed that one shoulder rose higher than the other. This feature
corresponds with the fact that the Persians became the dominant
side of the Medo-Persian empire. (An interesting parallel can be
found in the metal man from Daniel 2. The chest of silver had two
arms, suggesting this kingdom could have two armies.) Second, the
three ribs represented the carcasses of Lydia, Egypt and Babylon.
After the Medes and Persians subdued these three governments,
they controlled the world. Isaiah foretold the rise of the Persians
more than a hundred years before Cyrus was born. Notice this
prophecy: “This is what the Lord says to his anointed, to
Cyrus, whose right hand I take hold of to subdue nations
before him and to strip kings of their armor, to open doors
before him so that gates will not be shut: I will go before you
and will level the mountains; I will break down gates of
bronze and cut through bars of iron. I will give you the
treasures of darkness, riches stored in secret places, so that
you may know that I am the Lord, the God of Israel, who
summons you by name. For the sake of Jacob my servant, of
Israel my chosen, I summon you by name and bestow on you
a title of honor, though you do not acknowledge me.” (Isaiah
45:1-4)
Part Three: Grecia
After this I beheld, and lo another, like a leopard, which had
upon the back of it four wings of a fowl; the beast had also
four heads; and dominion was given to it. (Daniel 7:6, KJV)
Comments on Part Three
The third beast, the leopard, is a swift and cunning hunter that
easily kills prey larger than itself. The leopard in this vision had
four wings indicating its conquest would be incredibly swift. The
leopard represented the kingdom of Grecia, the empire that
swallowed up Medo-Persia. Historians marvel at the swiftness of
Grecia’s first king, Alexander the Great. He conquered the Medo-
Persian empire in a mere ten years! When considering the
58 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

geographical scope of his conquests and the fact that he did this on
horseback, there is no doubt that God empowered Alexander to
accomplish this military feat. At the peak of his conquests and
military prowess, Alexander died of “swamp fever” (probably
malaria) at the age of 33. Interestingly, his offspring did not inherit
his kingdom. It was eventually divided between his four leading
generals: Ptolemy, Cassander, Lysimachus and Seleucus. The four
heads of the leopard represent these four kings.
Part Four: The Monster Beast
After this I saw in the night visions, and behold a fourth
beast, dreadful and terrible, and strong exceedingly; and it
had great iron teeth: it devoured and brake in pieces, and
stamped the residue with the feet of it: and it was diverse
from all the beasts that were before it; and it had ten horns.
I considered the horns, and, behold, there came up among
them another little horn, before whom there were three of
the first horns plucked up by the roots: and, behold, in this
horn were eyes like the eyes of man, and a mouth speaking
great things. (Daniel 7:7,8, KJV)
Comments on Part Four
Historians generally agree that the Grecian empire ended with the
battle of Pydna in 168 B.C. With this victory, the Romans finally
gained control of the world. The Roman military was known for its
use of iron and its scorched-earth policy. Did you notice the fourth
beast has teeth of iron? This metallic feature parallels the “legs of
iron” mentioned in Daniel 2. Unlike King Nebuchadnezzar who took
captives to Babylon and trained them for government service, the
Romans took few prisoners. (True to form, when the Romans
burned Jerusalem to the ground in A.D. 70, they took everything of
value, but few prisoners.) The term, “the iron age,” accurately
describes Rome’s extensive use of this metal. The Romans were
skillful manufacturers of iron weapons. Their iron-clad warriors
and chariots of iron were legendary. As a world empire, Rome
endured for almost 650 years (168 B.C. to A.D. 476), but like its
predecessors, Rome fell. After a series of civil wars within its
borders, the empire crumbled during the last half of the fifth
century A.D. As the Roman empire fractured, ten ethnic nations
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 59

within the former empire rose to power. The ten horns of the fourth
beast represent these ten nations. Daniel was told, “The ten horns
are ten kings who will come from [within] this kingdom.”
(Daniel 7:24, insertion mine) These tribal-nations have been
generally identified as the Ostrogoths, Heruli, Franks, Vandals,
Lombards, Visigoths, Suevi, Burgundians, Alamanni, and the Anglo-
Saxons.
Conflicting Interpretation
Many prophetic commentators claim the ten horns on the fourth
beast represent ten nations that will belong to a future European
Union. (Currently, fourteen nations belong to the EU.) This
interpretation is faulty because it does not satisfy all of the
prophetic specifications given in Daniel and Revelation about the
ten horns. The ten horns cannot be ten nations of a future European
Union for several reasons. These reasons will be explored in Part
Nine of this chapter.
Even though Daniel observed four beasts in this vision, he was
particularly distressed and awed by the fourth beast, because it was
different than the other three beasts. As Daniel watched this
monster beast, he noticed a little horn that began to grow out of its
forehead. As it grew, the little horn became great and it uprooted
three of the original ten horns by their roots. This little horn had
eyes and a mouth that spoke very boastful things! Even though
Daniel did not comprehend the vision, he became very alarmed as he
watched the ferociousness of the little horn. He could see that it was
grossly evil and it wielded absolute power for a period of time, but
he did not know what it represented.
Part Five:
I beheld till the thrones were cast down [arranged or set in
place], and the Ancient of days did sit, whose garment was
white as snow, and the hair of his head like the pure wool:
his throne was like the fiery flame, and his wheels as
burning fire. A fiery stream issued and came forth from
before him: thousand thousands ministered unto him, and
ten thousand times ten thousand stood before him: the
judgment was set, and the books were opened. (Daniel 7:9,10,
KJV, insertion mine)
60 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

Comments on Part Five

Suddenly, while Daniel was watching the antics of the little horn on
Earth, his attention was directed to a glorious scene taking place in
Heaven. Daniel saw several thrones (notice that the word is plural)
arranged for a great convocation. The Aramaic word remah means
“to place or arrange” or “to set up.” It can also mean “to throw,” as in
throwing a ball. The KJV translators may have chosen to translate
the words “thrones were cast down” because they were thinking that
the thrones of the beasts were “thrown down” when the Ancient of
Days took His seat. The Septuagint, or the LXX, as it is sometimes
called, is a Greek version of the Old Testament translated by
seventy-two Jewish scholars about 280 years before Jesus was born.
The translators of the LXX converted the Aramaic word remah to
the Greek word tithemi which means “to set up” or “to arrange or
erect.” This Hebrew to Greek transition, translated two and a half
centuries after Daniel’s death, is very helpful. The context of this
passage also gives us some additional help. Therefore, it is not
surprising that many Bible translations today reflect the Greek
translation of the word remah. The result is that Daniel saw
thrones arranged or put in place. According to Revelation 4 and 5
(which also describes this scene in Daniel 7), there are a total of
twenty-five thrones. Twenty-four thrones encircle the throne of the
Father. As Daniel watched this scene, he saw the Father come into
the previously arranged courtroom and take His seat. (The title;
“The Ancient of Days,” only occurs in Daniel 7 and it indicates the
Father existed before time began.) A numberless multitude of angels
rose to their feet as the Father entered the courtroom, and the Bible
says, “The court was seated, and the books were opened.”
What is this court scene all about? When does it occur? What books
were opened? What does the court scene have to do with the terror
caused by the little horn on Earth?
The Pre-Advent Judgment of Mankind
Reread Daniel 7:9,10 at the beginning of Part Five. God lifted
Daniel’s eyes from Earth, while he was watching the little horn, to
see something that would take place in Heaven’s courtroom. God
showed Daniel the pre-Second Coming judgment of mankind. The
seriousness and importance of this great convocation can be
measured by the billions of angels in attendance. According to
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 61

Revelation 4 and 5, the Father, the Son, the four living creatures,
the twenty-four elders and billions of angels are all present. This
convocation began in 1798, and one of the items on the agenda was
the judgment of human beings. Before Jesus returns to Earth, He
will judge the people of Earth and determine who will participate in
His eternal kingdom. For reasons that will be presented later, this
judgment began in 1844. Presently, this great convocation has been
under way for more than 150 years! Can you imagine a meeting
that has been in session for 150 years? Sure you can! Sessons of the
United States Congress has been meeting for more than two
hundred years, and Congress will continue to meet for as long as the
United States exists!
Warning! Prerequisites needed: The pre-advent judgment scene
described in Daniel 7:9,10 is a topic that requires a basic
understanding of two Bible truths. First, you have to understand
what the Bible says about the state of man in death. Therefore, I
hope you have studied Chapter 13 in my companion volume, Jesus,
The Alpha and The Omega. Second, the concept of a pre-advent
judgment requires a basic understanding of the doctrine of parallel
temples. This topic is covered in Chapters 11 and 12 of my
companion volume. If you understand these two doctrines as I do,
my comments about Daniel 7:9,10 will make a lot more sense.
The All Important Linkage
At first glance, the courtroom scene in Heaven seems out of context
in a vision that concentrates on four beasts and the little horn power
on Earth. God associated these disconnected elements in this vision
to draw attention to their timing. In other words, the timing of
certain events on Earth are associated with the timing of certain
events in Heaven. As we will see, the timing of the wounding of the
little horn power on Earth and Christ’s pre-advent judgment are
inseparably linked together. Since we cannot see events occurring in
Heaven, God associated the great convocation scene in Heaven with
the wounding of the little horn power on Earth. This linkage enables
students of prophecy to determine the timing of the Heavenly event.
God is so clever! The rise and fall of empires are historically
documented and the timing of the little horn’s wound is well
documented. Therefore, we can date the convocation and judgment
bar scene in Heaven, even though we cannot see into Heaven! God
62 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

has linked prophetic events on Earth with prophetic events in

Heaven. I like to call this linkage, “The Heaven-Earth-Linkage-
Law.”
The Judgment Bar of Christ
Perhaps the easiest way to explain the pre-advent judgment process
is with a short illustration. When Cain was born, an angel was
given the responsibility to accurately record everything Cain knew,
everything Cain said, everything Cain thought, and everything Cain
did. (Perhaps the angel used a “heavenly camcorder.”) Because
Heaven’s technology far exceeds paper and ink, the record of Cain’s
life is all inclusive. In fact, Heaven’s record of every life is a true
reflection of that life. (See Ecclesiastes 12:14, Malachi 3:16; 2
Corinthians 5:10; Psalm 34:15 and 2 Chronicles 16:9.)
Even before sin began, God ordained there would be a judgment bar
imposed upon mankind to determine who will receive eternal life
and who will receive eternal death. (Acts 17:31; 24:25; Ephesians
1:4,5; 2 Corinthians 5:10) Since Jesus is the Judge of mankind (John
5:22), He alone decides the fate of each person. Even though Jesus
passes judgment upon each person, the process of judgment is
closely studied by Heaven’s assembled host. The first man to die
was Abel. So, let us assume for a moment that when the books of
record were opened in 1844, Jesus began to investigate the
recording of the first man to die. Because Abel’s eternal destiny will
be determined from his life’s record, we can be sure the record of his
life is perfect and complete. (Ecclesiastes 12:14) Before Jesus makes
a determination on Abel, the attending host reviews Abel’s life on
the equivalent of a big TV screen. Everyone hears Abel speak, and
they see Abel’s motives and actions just as they happened. After the
movie of Abel’s life ends, Jesus defends Abel’s faith in God before the
assembly by highlighting Abel’s actions. (James 2:26) Given the
evidence of Abel’s faith, and the stipulation that salvation comes
through faith, Jesus declares Abel will be granted eternal life at the
first resurrection, which occurs at the Second Coming, and the gavel
comes down. (John 6:39-54; 1 Thessalonians 4:15-17) Eventually,
the life of Cain comes up in the judgment process and it is given the
same treatment. After reviewing the record of Cain on the big
screen, let us assume that Jesus has no option but to condemn Cain
for his faithless life, and Jesus justifiably sentences Cain to eternal
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 63

death. (Revelation 22:15) This is a brief scenario explaining how the

judgment of the dead is accomplished. (The judgment of the living
occurs during the Great Tribulation. The living will be tested to see
who will obey God and trust in Him. People who pass the test will
be sealed with a nature free from sin. See Chapter 6 in my book,
Jesus, The Alpha and The Omega.)
After Jesus has judged everyone on Earth, the Second Coming
occurs. Jesus will appear in clouds of glory and will resurrect Abel
and all those determined to be righteous. He will take them to
Heaven at that time along with the righteous living who are
translated without seeing death. (John 14:1-3; 1 Thessalonians
4:16,17) Cain, however, will not be disturbed from his sleep at the
Second Coming. In fact, billions of wicked people will sleep through
the Second Coming. The wicked who are alive at the Second Coming
will be destroyed by a command that comes out of Jesus’ mouth and
they will sleep for the next thousand years. After the 1,000 years of
Revelation 20 passes, Jesus will return to Earth with all the
redeemed and He will resurrect Cain and all of the wicked so that
they can face their Judge and receive their sentence for the wages of
sin. The wicked will be put to death by execution. (Revelation
20:5,9) After the wicked are annihilated by fire, sin and sinners will
be no more.
Following the Rules
Because this study on Daniel 7 conforms to the four rules discussed
at the end of Chapter 1, a few words about the timing of verses 9
and 10 are necessary. First, the position of verses 9 and 10 within
Daniel 7 is important. Even though the timing of the convocation
scene described in verse 9 is not explicitly stated in Daniel, Rule
One provides an important clue. The courtroom scene in Heaven
(verse 9) has to occur after the little horn has uprooted three horns
in verse 8, because verse 9 occurs chronologically after verse 8.
Remember, events have to occur in the order they are given.
Furthermore, the courtroom scene in verse 9 has to occur before the
monster beast is burned in the fire in verse 11 (Second Coming)
because verse 9 occurs chronologically before verse 11. In other
words, if the little horn uproots the three horns by A.D. 532, the
judgment scene has to occur after A.D. 532, but before the Second
Coming, because the sequence of events within the vision requires it.
64 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

Remember, Rule One states, “Each apocalyptic prophecy has a

beginning and ending point in time and the events within the
prophecy must occur in the order in which they are given.” This rule
is demonstrated in Chart 3.4.
Part Six:
I beheld then because of the voice of the great words which
the horn spake: I beheld even till the beast was slain, and his
body destroyed, and given to the burning flame. As
concerning the rest of the beasts, they had their dominion
taken away: yet their lives were prolonged for a season and
time.” (Daniel 7:11,12, KJV)
Comments on Part Six
While watching the courtroom scene unfold in Heaven’s temple,
Daniel’s view is redirected back to Earth because he hears great
words (blasphemous words) coming from the little horn. The little
horn in Daniel 7 is one of the seven heads in Revelation 13:1.
Because verse 11 occurs after verse 10 (1844) the great words
spoken by the little horn in verse 11 have to occur after 1844! Rule
One says the events occur in the order in which they are given. So,
the little horn power will be restored to a position of authority after
its fall in 1798 and Revelation 13:1 confirms this! The healing of the
deadly wound will be covered in more detail later. As Daniel
watched the little horn on Earth, he saw the little horn and the
monster beast destroyed in a lake of fire. (Daniel 7:11) This fiery
destruction represents the fact that at the Second Coming, God will
destroy the little horn as well as all of the beasts in Daniel 7. (See
Daniel 2 and Revelation 19:20,21.)
The Sequence Ends
Daniel 7:12 marks the end of this apocalyptic sequence, but it is not
the end of the vision. We know this apocalyptic sequence is ended
because the chronological order of events ends. According to Rule
One, an apocalyptic sequence has a beginning point in time and an
ending point in time and the events occur in the order in which they
are given. This apocalyptic sequence began with the lion (Babylon –
605 B.C.) and ends with the beasts being destroyed in a lake of fire
at the Second Coming. (See also Revelation 19:20,21.) Even though
we have come to the end of the apocalyptic sequence in Daniel 7, the
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 65

vision given to Daniel has not ended. The vision continues with
commentary and details that amplify our understanding of the
apocalyptic sequence. Carefully study the sequence of events in
Chart 3.4:
The Apocalyptic Sequence

Verses
Verses 9
Verse 4 Verse 5 Verse 6 Verse 7 Verse 7 Verse 8 Verse 11 11 and
and 10
12

Great
605 B.C. 538 B.C. 331 B.C. 168 B.C. A.D. 476 A.D. 538 1798 Tribu- ?
lation

Judgment Second
Scene Coming

Little Beasts
Little
Lion Bear Leopard Monster 10 Horns Horn Burned
Horn
Boasting Up

Chart 3.4

Two observations should be made about Chart 3.4. First, look at the
chronological order of the verses in the top row. For now, let us
assume the courtroom scene described in verses 9 and 10 began in
1798. If we apply Rule One to this sequence of events, the boasting
of the little horn in verse 11 has to occur after 1798 because verse 11
comes after verse 10. Indeed, according to Revelation 13:1-3, the
boasting of the little horn in verse 11 will occur during the Great
Tribulation. Second, verse 12 tells us that even though the other
beasts lose their authority and dominion, they are not destroyed
until the Second Coming. In other words, even though powerful
kingdoms come and go, the descendants of these kingdoms remain
on Earth until Jesus comes. Earth will not self-destruct before
Jesus comes. Remember how the gold, silver, bronze, iron and clay
were ground to powder at the same time. “Then the iron, the clay,
the bronze, the silver and the gold were broken to pieces at
the same time and became like chaff on a threshing floor in
the summer. The wind swept them away without leaving a
trace. . . .” (Daniel 2:35, italics mine) When Jesus returns to Earth,
all of the wicked people of Earth will be annihilated by the sword (a
verbal command) that comes out of His mouth, and the Antichrist
and his government will be thrown into a lake of fire. (Revelation
19:15-21) This lake of fire is not to be confused with the fire that
66 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

falls from Heaven at the end of the thousand years and purifies
Earth. (Revelation 20:14,15)
Commentary by the Angel on the Vision
The commentary given to Daniel about verses 4 through 12 is
crucial to our understanding of this vision. Before we examine the
angel’s explanations, we need to consider how the third rule of
interpretation applies to this vision. Rule Three states, “Apocalyptic
language can be literal, symbolic or analogous. To reach the
intended meaning of a prophecy, the student must consider: (a) the
context; (b) the use of parallel language in the Bible and (c) relevant
statements in the Bible that define that symbol if an element is
thought to be symbolic.” We know the four beasts are symbols
because Daniel was told the four beasts represent four kings (or
kingdoms) that will appear on Earth. (Daniel 7:17) The Bible clearly
defines the monster beast saying, “. . . The fourth beast is a
fourth kingdom that will appear on Earth. . . .” (Daniel 7:23)
When God uses a symbol, He tells us the meaning of the symbol
within its context. Since Rule Three addresses three types of
language in apocalyptic prophecy, we have to test various
possibilities until all the pieces “harmoniously come together” into
their rightful places.
Part Seven:
“I saw in the night visions, and, behold, one like the Son of
man came with the clouds of heaven, and came to the
Ancient of days, and they brought him near before him. And
there was given him dominion, and glory, and a kingdom,
that all people, nations, and languages, should serve him: his
dominion is an everlasting dominion, which shall not pass
away, and his kingdom that which shall not be destroyed.”
(Daniel 7:13-14, KJV)
Comments on Part Seven
Many people think these two verses occur after the Second Coming;
however, this is not the case. Christ receives the kingdom of Earth
from the Father before the Second Coming! This fact is confirmed in
Revelation 11 and 19. Therefore, verses 11 and 12 break the
chronological order of the sequence that began in verse 1 by
reverting to an earlier date. Technically, because of this break in
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 67

chronology, a new apocalyptic prophecy begins with verse 13, and it

consists of two verses. Because this passage is so short, I prefer to
say these two verses amplify the content of verses 9 and 10, because
either way, the result is the same. Verse 13 tell us that Jesus
approached the Father after the Ancient of Days took His seat in
1798.
The question, “Why did Jesus approach the Father?” cannot be
answered from the details given in Daniel 7:13 and 14. No vision is
complete within itself. However, the vision in Revelation 4-6
parallels this scene and John tells us more of the story. The first
item of business at this great convocation is to find some worthy
person who is qualified to bring the drama of sin to a successful
conclusion. In John’s vision, an investigation is conducted
throughout the whole universe to see who is worthy to do the job.
Jesus alone is found worthy because Jesus meets the necessary
criteria. He lived a life of perfect obedience to God’s law, a life free
of sin. (1 Peter 2:22) He paid the penalty for sin with His own blood
(Hebrews 9:15), and He demonstrated the depths of God’s love for
mankind as no one else could do. (John 13:16; 10:30) No one else in
all the universe meets these qualifications, and after being found
worthy by the numberless host of angels, Jesus approached the
Father to be coronated as King of kings and Lord of lords.
A fiery retinue of angels (Daniel says, “the clouds of Heaven”)
escorted Jesus to the Father. The Father must have beamed as He
bestowed upon His Son the authority and recognition necessary for
the task at hand. This glorious scene is not the Second Coming.
The Bible says that Jesus went before the Ancient of Days, but there
is no indication that He came to Earth because this courtroom scene
is conducted in Heaven’s temple! After He was found worthy by
Heaven’s host, the Father gave every power and prerogative of God
to Jesus and the Father stepped aside so that Jesus might resolve
the greatest problem ever known to God: Sin. At this point in time
(1798) the Father physically gave Jesus all that He had promised.
The Earth became His inheritance. (See Hebrews 1:2.)
Jesus Exalted Again!
Some people have asked, “What do you mean when you say that
Jesus went before the Father to receive all of the attributes of God.”
“Hasn’t Jesus always had the attributes of God?” Yes, Jesus is co-
68 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

eternal with the Father, and as God, He had all the attributes of
God until sin began. A brief explanation of the humiliation and
exaltation of Jesus is necessary.
When Adam and Eve sinned, Jesus generously offered to bear the
penalty for sin on behalf of humanity. To receive man’s punishment,
Jesus had to suffer the Second Death and die in our place, and even
more, He had to give up His divine prerogatives and become subject
to the Father and the requirements of the plan of salvation. The
humiliation of Jesus should parallel the humiliation of sinners.
When a person becomes a child of God through rebirth, he joyfully
submits to the authority of God. While living in our shoes, Jesus
had to live a life of perfect faith and dependance upon the Father in
order to be a perfect sinless substitute for man. (Hebrews 5:7,8) On
the day that Jesus surrendered Himself to the Father, Jesus became
known as, “The Son of God.” The word “son” means “subjected one”
or “one in submission.” In other words, Jesus – who is fully God, co-
eternal with God and equal with the Father in every way (Philip-
pians 2:6) – willingly became subject to the Father and the plan to
save sinners. (Psalm 2:7-12) To save man, Jesus had to give up His
divinity in order to die. When Jesus lived on Earth, He explained
His subjection to the Father on numerous occasions by saying that
He came to do His Father’s will – not His own. (John 6:38)
Concerning His life, death and resurrection, Jesus said, “No one
takes it [my life] from me, but I lay it down of my own accord.
I have authority to lay it down and authority to take it up
again. This command I received from my Father.” (John
10:18, insertion mine)
From the day that Adam and Eve sinned until the day that Jesus
was coronated (in 1798), Jesus was subject to the Father (as His
Son) and to the terms and conditions set forth in the plan of
salvation. When the time came to begin judging the inhabitants of
Earth and exonerating the government of God against the lies of
Lucifer, an investigation was conducted to see who was worthy to do
such a work. Only Jesus was found worthy for the job, and the
Father granted sovereign power to Jesus to conclude the drama of
sin in whatever way Jesus deems best. Thus, the Father stepped
aside after the coronation of the Son, and the Son took command of
the universe. (Ephesians 1:9-23) Since 1798, Jesus has ruled over
Heaven and Earth as King of kings and Lord of lords. At the end of
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 69

sin’s drama, after Jesus has destroyed death itself, Jesus does
something that boggles my mind. Notice Paul’s words: “Then the
end will come, when he [Jesus] hands over the kingdom to
God the Father after he has destroyed all dominion,
authority and power [on Earth]. For he [Jesus] must reign
until he has put all his enemies under his feet. The last
enemy to be destroyed is death. For he [the Father] has put
everything under his feet. Now when it says that
‘everything’ has been put under him, it is clear that this does
not include God himself, who put everything under Christ.
When he [Jesus] has done this [e.g., resolved the sin problem],
then the Son himself will be made subject to him who put
everything under him, so that God may be all in all.”
(1 Corinthians 15:24-28) With these expansive issues in mind,
notice how the coronation of Jesus fits into the apocalyptic sequence
in Chart 3.5:
The Apocalyptic Sequence

Verses 9
Verse 4 Verse 5 Verse 6 Verse 7 Verse 7 Verse 8 Verse 11 Verse 11
and 13

Great
605 B.C. 538 B.C. 331 B.C. 168 B.C. A.D. 476 A.D. 538 1798 Tribu- ?
lation

Judgment Second
Scene Coming

Jesus Little Beast

Little
Lion Bear Leopard Monster 10 Horns Given the Horn Burned
Horn
Kingdom Boasting Up

Chart 3.5
Everything that Jesus “set aside” to redeem man was restored to
Him at this convocation. The exaltation of Jesus in 1798 was based
on His infinite love for man and His superior achievements on
behalf of the Father and the plan of salvation. Therefore, Jesus was
given everything the Father could give. Additionally, the Father
gave Earth to Jesus as His personal inheritance in 1798. (Psalm
2:7-12; Hebrews 1:1,2)
Even though Daniel did not understand the promotion of Jesus, this
awesome scene was embedded in this particular prophecy because of
70 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

its timing. No one living on Earth in 1798 saw the exaltation of

Jesus, but we can see into Heaven through the eye of prophetic
faith. Few people understand the coronation of Jesus in 1798, not to
mention the humiliation Jesus experienced to save the human race.
Even though Jesus was coronated as King of kings at the beginning
of the convocation in 1798, Jesus does not take possession of Earth
until two additional events occur. First, Jesus has to determine who
will live in His kingdom. This is the reason the judgment was set
and books were opened. Second, Jesus will not inherit an Earth
that groans under the curse of sin. Only after Jesus annihilates the
wicked and purifies the Earth with fire, will He create a new
Heaven and a new Earth. Earth will then become the headquarters
of His kingdom. After being found worthy to receive the authority of
the Father, Jesus began several processes in Heaven’s courtroom.
He began breaking the seven seals, and after the third seal was
broken, Jesus began to pass judgment upon humanity. (The seven
seals will be presented in our study on Revelation 4-6.)
All Authority?
Notice Daniel 7:14 again: “And there was given him dominion,
and glory, and a kingdom, that all people, nations, and
languages, should serve him: his dominion is an everlasting
dominion, which shall not pass away, and his kingdom that
which shall not be destroyed.” (KJV) This verse confuses a lot of
people. How can Jesus be given complete dominion (or sovereign
power, NIV) more than once? According to Webster, the word
“sovereign” means “having all authority.” At face value this verse in
Daniel 7 seems to contradict the words of Jesus in Matthew 28.
Notice the following text: “Then Jesus came to them [His
disciples] and said, ‘All authority in heaven and on Earth has
been given to me. Therefore go and make disciples of all
nations, baptizing them in the name of the Father and of the
Son and of the Holy Spirit, and teaching them to obey
everything I have commanded you. And surely I am with you
always, to the very end of the age.’ ” (Matthew 28:18-20,
insertion mine) How can Jesus say in Matthew 28 that He has all
authority in Heaven and on Earth when Daniel 7 indicates that
Jesus is given dominion (and sovereign authority) after the Ancient
of Days takes His seat? The answer to this apparent conflict is
found in the scope of authority.
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 71

On Resurrection Sunday, Jesus returned to Heaven, and with the

help of His angels, drove Lucifer, the prince of this world, out of
Heaven. (Revelation 12:7-9; John 12:31) Lucifer lost his seat as
Earth’s governor at the table of God’s government. On the basis of
His shed blood and the power of an indestructible life (Hebrews
7:16), Jesus physically removed Lucifer from Heaven and cast him
to Earth. (Revelation 12:13) The kingdom that was stolen from
Jesus by Lucifer (the deceitful prince of this world, John 12:31) was
returned to Jesus by right of redemption. (John 16:33; Revelation
12:10) As the Crown Prince of Earth, Jesus has been Earth’s
representative at the table of God’s government ever since
Resurrection Sunday. After Jesus ascended to Heaven on that
Sunday morning and cast Lucifer out, He was given authority over
all matters in Heaven pertaining to Earth. Forty days later, at the
time of His ascension, He declared this authority to His disciples in
His parting words recorded in Matthew 28:18-20.
Daniel saw an even higher exaltation of Jesus than the exaltation
given on Resurrection Sunday. In 1798, Jesus was ceremoniously
exalted to a position equal to that of the Father. Jesus was found
worthy to receive power over all of God’s creation. The Father
transferred His authority to Jesus so that Jesus could righteously
conclude the sin problem. The Ancient of Days convened this
convocation so that the actions of Jesus could be observed by all the
angels. The Father wanted all the angels to know that Jesus was
equal to the Father in every way. (John 5:23) Of course, the Son is
not greater than the Father, but neither is the Father greater than
the Son! Jesus was exalted before the angels and the elders because
He did something that no one else in the universe could do. He paid
the penalty of sin for man. After He was found worthy to take over
the universe, He took the scroll sealed with seven seals. In His new
role as Commander-In-Chief of the Universe, Jesus began the
process of deciding who will participate in His kingdom. He also
began a process that will fully vindicate the government of God
against the false claims of Lucifer. At the end of the 1,000 years,
everyone will behold that God is love, that God’s laws are righteous
and His government is based on the principle of love. We have
already examined 1 Corinthians 15:24-28, where Paul says that at
the end of sin’s drama, an exalted Jesus will return all that the
Father has given Him. Jesus will return the authority and throne to
72 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

the Father because He wants to be free to live among this creation

as one of us! What Gods of grace and love!
Part Eight:
“I Daniel was grieved in my spirit in the midst of my body,
and the visions of my head troubled me. I came near unto
one of them that stood by, and asked him the truth of all this.
So he told me, and made me know the interpretation of the
things. These great beasts, which are four, are four kings,
which shall arise out of the earth. But the saints of the most
High shall take the kingdom, and possess the kingdom for
ever, even for ever and ever.” (Daniel 7:15-18, KJV)
Comments on Part Eight
Daniel wanted to know the meaning of everything he had seen, so he
asked for an explanation. A nearby angel informed Daniel that
these great beasts are four kingdoms. Some translations like the
LXX say “four kingdoms” while others say “four kings.” But, verse
23 removes any doubt about the intended meaning because it says,
“the fourth beast is the fourth kingdom that will appear on
Earth.” Then, in the same breath, the angel asserts, “But, the
saints of the Most High shall take the kingdom, and possess
the kingdom for ever, even for ever and ever.” The angel chose
deliberate language to make this statement. The angel is
emphasizing a profound point to those who suffer for their faith.
This world was created for the children of God. Temporarily, the
devil has gained control of Earth, BUT at an appointed time, there
will be an end to sin and the devil. The saints will inherit the
Earth. God has decreed it! (Matthew 5:5)
Part Nine:
“Then I would know the truth of the fourth beast, which was
diverse from all the others, exceeding dreadful, whose teeth
were of iron, and his nails of brass; which devoured, brake in
pieces, and stamped the residue with his feet; And of the ten
horns that were in his head, and of the other which came up,
and before whom three fell; even of that horn that had eyes,
and a mouth that spake very great things, whose look was
more stout than his fellows.” (Daniel 7:19,20, KJV)
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 73

Daniel wanted to know the truth about the fourth beast, the ten
horns, and the little horn. If we are going to determine the truth
about the fourth beast and the little horn, we must consider all of
the specifications given to Daniel because the Bible is about to
identify a world power that is corrupt and offensive in God’s sight.
This is a good time to apply Rule Two which states, “A fulfilment of
apocalyptic prophecy occurs when all of the specifications within that
prophecy are met. This includes the order of events outlined in the
prophecy.”
The truth that will unfold from this prophecy is neither pleasant nor
politically correct. In fact, people have denied the truth about the
fourth beast, the ten horns, and the little horn for centuries, because
the truth is offensive. The actions of the little horn have been
offensive to God for centuries! God is the author of prophecy, and
people who love truth, regardless of what the truth says or where it
leads, are the kind of people whom God loves. (John 4:23) Daniel
provides a dozen specifications about the fourth beast, the ten horns,
and the little horn that grew out of the fourth beast. Look at these
specifications:

1. The monster beast is the fourth world empire.

2. The monster beast has unusual strength and it
stomps its enemies.
3. The monster beast is different; it has crushing
teeth of iron.
4. Out of the monster beast, ten horns (or kings/
kingdoms) arise.
5. After the ten horns appear, a little horn rises. As
it rises to power, it uproots three of the original
ten kings leaving a total of eight.
6. As the little horn grows and becomes great, it
exhibits the same fierce qualities of its parent, the
monster beast.
74 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

7. Eventually, the little horn dominates the other

seven horns.
8. The little horn blasphemes God by usurping His
authority.
9. The little horn wars against the saints of the Most
High for a specified period of time.
10. The little horn “thinks” it can change God’s times
and laws.
11. The little horn endures until the end of the world;
in fact, it speaks boastfully during the time of the
end.
12. The monster beast and the little horn are burned
in the fire at the Second Coming.
History allows no wiggle room regarding the identity of the monster
beast. The fourth beast represents the empire of Rome, which
followed the fall of Grecia in 168 B.C. History allows no wiggle room
on the identity of the ten horns or the little horn power that came
out of Rome. The ten horns represent the ten ethnic nations that
caused the breakup of the Roman empire. The little horn represents
the powerful entity that grew out of the empire of Rome, namely,
the Roman Catholic Church.
History has faithfully documented the course of the Catholic Church
through the centuries. The following is a brief summary of what
happened to Christians as they moved farther and farther away
from following God’s Word. The history of the Christian church is a
parallel to that of ancient Israel. Both religious systems displaced
God’s Word with manmade traditions and doctrines and ended up in
apostasy. Many wonderful people can be found within Judaism and
Catholicism. Both groups love God and their religion, and they
faithfully adhere to their respective beliefs. Many Jews and
Catholics have not had an opportunity or sufficient reason to
consider the Protestant view of Church history. Even further, many
Catholics have little or no knowledge concerning the origins of
Church doctrines or teachings. Upon close examination, many
Catholics are shocked to learn that many of their doctrines have no
biblical basis or authority whatsoever.
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 75

The Monster Beast Is the Roman Empire

Protestants have identified the Roman Catholic Church as the little
horn of Daniel 7 for more than 700 years. This conclusion was
reached by comparing Scripture with history. History says Rome is
the fourth kingdom from Babylon to appear on Earth. The prophetic
matrix and abundant historical records indicate the lineage of
kingdoms is Babylon, Medo-Persia, Grecia and Rome. History
confirms that the fall of Rome is not like the fall of the other nations
before it. For example, in Daniel 2 the head of gold is displaced by a
different metal, the chest of silver. However, the legs of iron of the
fourth kingdom are displaced by feet of iron and clay. Look at this
transition from Daniel 7’s perspective. The lion is displaced by the
leopard, but the monster beast is not displaced by another beast.
Rome does not disappear like Babylon disappeared. Instead, the ten
kings that brought down civil Rome in A.D. 476 grew out of the
Roman empire. History says the ten horns pulled the Roman empire
apart from within. Rome disintegrated into ten kingdoms, some of
which were strong (like iron) and others which were breakable or
weak (like clay).
Two Sets of Ten Horns
Many commentators teach that the ten horns of Daniel 7 are a
future union of ten kings who are yet to rise out of a revived Roman
empire (thought to be the European Union). This conclusion is
contrary to several statements given in Scripture and the prophetic
matrix. The prophetic matrix reveals the ten horns in Daniel 7 have
come and gone, and history confirms the ten horns of Daniel 7 have
come and gone! History also confirms the little horn ruled over the
nations of Europe for 1,260 years before it was wounded in 1798.
Some people make the mistake of thinking the ten horns of Daniel 7
are the same ten horns found in Revelation 13 and 17! The ten
horns in Daniel 7 appeared around A.D. 476 at the fall of the Roman
empire, and three of the original ten horns were uprooted within 60
years of A.D. 476 by the Church of Rome over a religious dispute on
the eternal co-existence of Jesus with the Father.
The ten horns in Revelation 13 and 17 have not yet appeared. They
will appear during the very last days of Earth’s history and will be
empowered for a very short time just before the Second Coming.
76 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

(Revelation 17:12) There are two sets of ten horns in Bible prophecy,
because there is an important parallel between them. The ten horns
in Daniel 7 were reduced to seven horns after three were uprooted.
Then, the little horn of Daniel 7 dominated the remaining seven
horns as the eighth king. In Revelation13, there is a beast that rises
out of the sea having seven heads and ten horns. This beast is not
the Roman empire of Daniel 7, as some suppose. This beast will be
a diverse world empire made up of seven heads (seven religious
systems) and ten horns (ten political powers) during the Great
Tribulation. When the devil appears on Earth masquerading as
God, he will rule over the seven heads as an eighth king!
(Revelation 17:11) The parallel here is obvious. The devil will rule
with absolute power over the seven religious systems of the world
just like the papacy (the little horn) ruled over the seven kings (the
seven horns) it dominated. The devil will divide the Earth into ten
sectors and he will appoint ten kings to rule as “puppet kings” of his
kingdom. Daniel 2:44 says during the time of these kings, that is, the
ten kings, the God of Heaven will set up His kingdom! Study Chart
3.6 and observe two things: First, notice that both kingdoms – the
kingdom of the feet and the kingdom of the toes – have ten horns.
Second, notice that the ten horns in the kingdom of the feet become
seven horns, with the little horn ruling over them. Then notice the
kingdom of the toes. During the kingdom of the [ten] toes, the
Second Coming occurs while ten kings are ruling over Earth! (Daniel
2:44, Revelation 17:14)
Reviewing the Ten Horns
History identifies the ten horns that caused the disintegration of
Rome as the kings of the Ostrogoths, Heruli, Franks, Vandals,
Lombards, Visigoths, Suevi, Burgundians, Alamanni and the Anglo-
Saxons. The infrastructure of the Roman empire finally fell in A.D.
476, because powerful warlords brought the emperor, Romulus, the
Roman senate and the empire to an end. The city of Rome was
sacked and burned. These warlords included Alaric the Goth, Attila
the Hun, Genseric the Vandal, Theodoric the Ostrogoth, Odoacer,
and others who contributed to the collapse of Rome. These kings
originated within the ethnic nations that constituted the bulk of the
Roman empire. Geographically, they came from northern Africa,
Asia Minor, the Middle East and Europe. These warlords broke the
iron fist of Caesar. A new order for world government came into
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 77

The Ten Horns in Daniel 7 Are Not the Same As the

Ten Horns in Revelation 13 and 17
Verses
Verses 9
D a niel 7 Ve rse 7 Verse 7 Verse 8 Verse 11 11 a nd
a nd 13
12

G re a t
Tim e 168 B .C . A.D . 476 A.D . 538 1798 Trib u- ?
la tio n

Sea
Beast: 7
R ev ela tio n 17 H eads
an d 10
H orn s

Sea
Beast: 7
R ev ela tio n 1 3 H eads
an d 10
H orn s

Little Ju dgmen t Secon d

H orn Scen e Comin g

Th e Fou r
3 H orn s
Jesu s Little Beasts
M on ster U prooted
D a niel 7 10 H orn s G iven th e H orn Are
Beast Leavin g 7
K in gd om Boastin g Bu rn ed
H orn s
Up

Legs of
D a niel 2 Feet Toes Rock
Iron

Chart 3.6

existence after A.D. 476. During the centuries of Babylon, Medo-

Persia, Grecia and Rome, there had been one universal empire.
After A.D. 476, the world was broken into diverse ethnic nations.
When civil Rome fell, the distinction between the nations of the East
and the nations of the West became separate and prominent.
Perhaps the two legs and the two feet in Daniel 2 reflect the East-
West division of Earth. Regardless, one simple fact from Daniel 2
has held true for the past 1,600 years: No man has been able to
merge the world back into a single empire since A.D. 476. Would-be
conquerors have tried and failed. Nations have come and gone. Some
nations have become strong and others have become weak. The
continual presence of weak nations is a sociological mystery because
the law of the jungle mandates that only the strong survive.
78 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

Who Is the Little Horn?

According to Daniel 7, the little horn appears on the world stage
after the ten horns rise to power, because the little horn power
uproots three of the ten horns when it appears. Christianity, of
course, began in Jerusalem at the time of Christ and was dispersed
throughout the world by the Romans in A.D. 70 when they destroyed
Jerusalem. The Christian Church in Rome started during the time
of the apostle Paul, but grew to become a substantial political force
by the beginning of the fourth century A.D. It was then that
Constantine determined to make Christianity the defacto religion of
the Roman empire. Constantine was not timid about giving his
religious views the force of law. According to Daniel 7, the little horn
power would start small, but would grow and become stronger than
any of the kingdoms represented by the remaining horns! The
timing in this vision is important: After Rome was broken up by the
ten horns, the Church of Rome rose to power and, in so doing, it had
to uproot three nations to consolidate its dominion over a new Holy
Roman Empire.
The church was instrumental in uprooting the Ostrogoths, Vandals
and Heruli, three of the original ten nations, for religious and
political reasons. These kingdoms were destroyed because of a long-
standing theological dispute over the deity of Christ. This dispute is
well documented in history and is called the Arian Controversy.
Arius, a theologian from Alexandria, Egypt, taught that Jesus was
not co-eternal and not equal with the Father. The church at Rome
countered Arius’ teachings by saying they were heresy and
blasphemy, and a power struggle began. This particular
controversy raged for about 200 years between Christians in Rome
and Christians in Alexandria. Constantine called a general council
at Nicaea in A.D. 325 to settle the conflict, but the dispute could not
be resolved. Looking at the controversy from our vantage point
today, the real issue was theological control. The real issue was not
the deity of Christ, but who would define Christian doctrine – the
Church in Rome or the Church in Alexandria. By A.D. 508, the
Church in Rome had gained enough political support to silence the
opposition in Alexandria. For political and religious reasons, Clovis,
King of the Salian Franks, destroyed the Ostrogoths, Vandals and
Heruli. When the Arian influence was eliminated, the Church in
Rome established herself as the guardian and defender of the
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 79

universal (or catholic) Christian faith. About 25 years after the

victories of Clovis, Emperor Justinian consolidated supreme
authority in the pope in matters of faith and religion. Justinian
bequeathed the title, “Corrector of Heretics,” upon the pope in A.D.
533 even though the pope was not in a position to wield complete
authority over the nations. However, just five years later in A.D.
538, after Belisarius (Justinian’s general) subdued Italy, the pope
had the posture and dominion he sought. He ruled over the
Christian church and Christian states with absolute power.
Little Horn Wages War on the Saints
According to Daniel 7, the little horn power had the same fierce
qualities as its parent, the monster beast. It was predicted the little
horn would become “stouter” than the other seven horns. It would
have a “mouth” that spoke great words against the Most High and it
would have “eyes” like a man. The mouth on the little horn indicates
that the church would “speak;” that is, it would dictate orders (laws
and rules) which people must obey if they wanted to receive eternal
life. The church blackmailed the laity into obedience with the threat
of excommunication. The eyes on the little horn indicated the church
would have insight into matters which would allow it to “see” things
that political rulers would not understand. In short, the little horn
would be religious and it would use the power of religion to control
the ways and thoughts of rulers. The power of religion uniquely
made the little horn of Daniel 7 much stronger than all of the other
horns put together.
In ancient times, religion attracted the best minds, much like
science does today. Priests were considered God’s representatives
on Earth, and whatever they said was “the Word of God.” When
Justinian surrendered the state to the higher power of the church,
the church became lord over the nations of Europe. The church
approved, appointed and coronated the kings and queens of Europe.
The church controlled political issues, as well as religious matters.
The church manipulated its members out of fear of hell and eternal
death. The church claimed that its priests had the authority to
determine eternal life or eternal death, and since few Bibles were
available, king and peasant alike believed whatever the priests said.
There was no “approved” source of knowledge about God except
through the church. In effect, the clergy of the church became God
80 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

for 1,260 long years (A.D. 538-1798). History rightly calls this
period, “The Dark Ages.”
The church became as determined and cruel in conquering her foes
as she had been treated in her early years by Romans and Jews. To
gain power and dominion, popes bribed people with forgiveness for
all sins – past, present and future – if they were willing to fight for
the expansion of the Holy Roman Empire. Millions of people
perished in the crusades, which, ironically, were fought in the name
of God. Popes ruled over Christianity with an iron fist for 1,260
years. The light of truth was extinguished, and religious freedom
and the right to worship God according to the dictates of conscience
were non-existent. For centuries, the church prohibited ownership of
the Bible. The authority of the church knew no bounds. Kings,
fearful of losing eternal life, could not overthrow the authority of the
pope and his prelates, but as powerful as the church was, God
predetermined a limit to the reign of terror. The church would
receive an almost fatal wound in 1798.
Little Horn Persecutes Saints 1,260 Years
The angel said to Daniel, “And he [the little horn] shall speak
great words against the most High, and shall wear out the
saints of the most High, and think to change times and laws:
and they [the saints] shall be given into his hand until a time
and times and the dividing of time.” (Daniel 7:25, KJV,
insertions mine) This verse says so much. To appreciate the depths
of apostasy to which the Christian church fell, the reader is
encouraged to review the writings of reformers like Martin Luther
and John Knox.
It should not surprise you to learn that the conflict between popes
and protestors (the beginning of Protestantism) centered on the
question of religious authority. The Roman Catholic Church claims
that it alone possesses all authority from God in matters pertaining
to salvation. This authority, the church claims, has been passed
down to each pope from the apostle Peter. (Matthew 16:18,19)
Historians on this time period say millions of protestors perished at
the stake for disagreeing with the church over this point. (See also
Foxe’s Book of Martyrs, written by John Foxe, 1516-1587) Protestors
claimed that everyone had the right to own a Bible and to determine
what was truth. Protestants believed that obeying God according to
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 81

the dictates of one’s conscience was a matter of personal choice. The

following statements may help you to see the great chasm between
Catholics and Protestants on matters pertaining to religious
authority:
Statement #1
“That a person with no other equipment than a knowledge of the
English language and a seventeenth century English translation of
the Bible in his hands is qualified to decide all matters of eternal
consequence for himself and the rest of mankind, is the ridiculous
conclusion to which the principle of private judgment can finally be
brought. In such a process, the countless generations of devout
people who have lived and died according to other beliefs simply
count for nothing. The centuries of thought and prayer that have
gone into the interpretation of the Bible for all these generations
likewise count for nothing.” [Some Bible Beliefs Have to Be Wrong!,
Booklet #68, page 5, (1963), Imprimatur: Most Reverend John F.
Whealon, Archbishop of Hartford, Knights of Columbus.]
Statement #2
“Since the Catholic Church holds that the Bible is not sufficient in
itself, it naturally teaches that the Bible needs an interpreter. The
reason the Catholic Church so teaches is twofold: first, because
Christ established a living church to teach with His authority. He
did not simply give His disciples a Bible, whole and entire, and tell
them to go out and make copies of it for mass distribution and allow
people to come to whatever interpretation they may. Second, the
Bible itself states that it needs an interpreter. . . . The Holy Spirit
was given to the Church by Jesus Christ, and it is exactly this same
Spirit who protects the Church’s visible head, the Pope, and the
teaching authority of the Church by never permitting him or it to
lapse into error.” [Scripture Alone? 21 Reasons to Reject Sola
Scriptura, pages 21, 26, (1999), Joel Peters, Tan Books and
Publishers, Inc., Rockford, Il.]
Statement #3
“We teach and define it to be a dogma divinely revealed that the
Roman Pontiff, when he speaks ex cathedra, that is, when acting in
his office as pastor and teacher of all Christians, by his supreme
Apostolic authority, he defines a doctrine concerning faith or morals
82 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

to be held by the whole Church through the divine assistance

promised him in Blessed Peter, he enjoys that infallibility with
which the divine Redeemer willed His Church to be endowed in
defining doctrine concerning faith and morals; and therefore such
definitions of the said Roman Pontiff are irreformable of themselves,
and not from the consent of the Church.” [The Papacy, Expression of
God’s Love, page 29, (undated), Imprimatur: Most Reverend John J.
Carberry, Archbishop of St. Louis, Knights of Columbus.]
These three statements summarize the bedrock of Catholic doctrine
and they reflect the nonnegotiable themes that have divided
Protestants from Catholics for more than 700 years.
Three and a Half Times
Daniel 7:25 also says the little horn would “wear out the saints of
God (through persecution).” In fact, the Bible says “they [the
saints] shall be given into his hand [e.g., the hand of the little
horn] for a time, times and half a time!” (insertions mine) This
single verse should cause every believer in a pre-tribulation rapture
to think about his position, because this verse indicates that God
Himself handed His saints over to the little horn to be persecuted
for a prescribed length of time! If God subjected His saints to
persecution in times past, why should the last generation expect to
escape from the coming tribulation? Instead of delivering the saints
from persecution, God did the opposite by handing His people over
to the little horn for 1,260 years! Why would an all wise God do
this? I can offer two possible reasons:
First, persecution keeps the saints on their knees and their focus on
the Word of God. When life is easy, faith in God evaporates. Moses
warned Israel: “Be careful that you do not forget the Lord
your God, failing to observe his commands, his laws and his
decrees that I am giving you this day. Otherwise, when you
eat and are satisfied, when you build fine houses and settle
down, and when your herds and flocks grow large and your
silver and gold increase and all you have is multiplied, then
your heart will become proud and you will forget the Lord
your God, who brought you out of Egypt, out of the land of
slavery.” (Deuteronomy 8:11-14) When we contrast the Church at
Rome (the little horn) with the Church in the Wilderness (the
persecuted saints), we clearly see what prosperity and persecution
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 83

produces. Prosperity produces decadence. Persecution, on the other

hand, pushes people into a life of dynamic faith, clinging to Jesus as
their hope and salvation. Persecution made God’s Word extremely
precious to the Church in the Wilderness. Many Bibles, or portions
of the Bible, were laboriously copied by hand so that people could
have the Word of God to study. Meanwhile, back in prosperous
Rome, the Bible was not important. The Bible was chained to the
walls of monasteries and libraries because the authority of the
church rested in its clergy, not the Word of God! The Church in the
Wilderness hungered for every word that proceeded out of the
mouth of God, while the Church in Rome preferred the authority of
the popes and priests who spoke boastful things. For the saints, a
plain “thus saith the Lord” was more important than any papal bull.
The saints loved and honored the Word of God and held it in much
higher esteem than life itself. In summary, the persecution of God’s
people kept the Word of God alive.
The second reason God handed His saints over to the little horn is
this: Persecution keeps faith in Christ alive. This is ironic. The
very circumstances that cause faith to grow are the very
circumstances that human nature hates the most! The selfish
desires of the carnal nature include pleasure, prosperity, power,
unchallenged authority, limitless amounts of money, fame and
respect. Faith during times of persecution means trusting God for
survival of life itself. Furthermore, as the Holy Spirit led the saints
into a greater understanding of truth, the Church in the Wilderness
proceeded to follow God’s Word without regard for social and
financial consequences. This is the essence of faith – obeying God at
any cost. When the Church in Rome rose to power, the word, “faith,”
was changed. Faith came to mean a religious view, not a religious
experience. Even today, people typically ask, “What faith do you
belong to?” So, the second reason God wisely gave the saints over to
persecution was to keep faith in Jesus alive!
What Is a Time?
We do not need to review the atrocities of the Roman Catholic
Church or those of her enemies during centuries past. (Historians
have devoted thousands of pages to this topic and these works can
be found in public libraries.) However, we do need to consider a
specification about the Roman Catholic Church that is profound.
84 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

Daniel 7:25 says the saints would be given over to the little horn for
a time, times and half a time. According to Rule Four, this time-
period amounts to 1,260 years in length. It began in A.D. 538 and
ended in 1798.
You may recall that, until the sixteenth century A.D., men believed
the Earth stood still and the Sun orbited our planet. For purposes of
computing time, the ancients used 360 degrees of arc to represent a
completed circle or cycle of the Sun. The Jews did not count a year
as 365 days because the number of days in their year is either 354 or
384. God gave Israel a solar/lunar calendar to measure time and the
cycles of the Sun and Moon determine the number of days in a year.
(Exodus 12) Since the Sun moves about one degree of arc per day in
a year, the use of 360 degrees of arc (the number of degrees in a
circle) to represent the length of a year was a practical method for
measuring “a time.” This type of averaging was also done for the
length of a month. Even though a month is actually 29.53 days, the
ancients counted a month (or a moon) as 30 days for purposes of
calculation.
The Aramaic word, ‘hiddan, translated “a time” in Daniel 7:25 (and
used elsewhere in Daniel), refers to “a set time” or “a turning.” The
word, ‘hiddan, indicates the beginning or turning of a year at its
appointed time. Revelation 12:14 also contains the phrase “a time,
times and a half a time,” and according to Revelation 12:6, this
phrase represents 1,260 days. Some people question if the word
“times” means two times or more than two times. First, Revelation
12 reveals that 1,260 days are “a time, times and half a time.”
(Revelation 12:6,14) Second, at a minimum, the plural of “a time” is
two times. If there are more than two times, the time period cannot
be measured because no one knows how many times to count. Last,
historical evidence confirms that God had 1,260 years in mind when
He defined this time-period. The number of days in “a time, times
and half a time” is determined by the following formula:
1. One time of the Sun equals one circle of 360 degrees of
arc.
2. Two times of the Sun equals two circles of 360 degrees of
arc or 720 degrees.
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 85

3. Half a time equals half a circle or 180 degrees of arc.

4. Total: 1,260 degrees of arc
(360 + 720 + 180 = 1,260 degrees)
It is widely known that God gave the Jews a calendar in which a day
of the week represents a year, e.g., a week of seven days equals
seven years. (See Leviticus 25; Numbers 14:34; Ezekiel 4:5,6.)
Many Bible students understand the 70 weeks mentioned in Daniel
to be 490 years (that is, 70 weeks times seven days equals 490 days,
and each day represents a year). Therefore, if God used the Jubilee
Calendar to measure the 70 weeks in Daniel 9, then it is possible
that He used the Jubilee Calendar to define the 1,260 days in Daniel
7 as 1,260 years. This is a good place to repeat Rule Four which
states: “God reckons apocalyptic time in two ways: (a) a day for a
year, and (b) as literal time. The presence or absence of the Jubilee
calender determines how God reckons time.” Even though it is
essential to understand the Jubilee Calendar when applying this
rule, for now just consider this fact: History confirms the duration
of the little horn’s power was 1,260 years – to the very month! The
Roman Catholic Church persecuted the saints for 1,260 years.
Even though Protestants in centuries past did not properly under-
stand the operation of the Jubilee Calendar, they did conclude that
history and prophecy are in perfect harmony, and many Protestants
predicted a “wounding” of papal power prior to 1798. In short,
Daniel was told the Roman Catholic Church would persecute God’s
saints for 1,260 years – and history confirms this to be the case.
Part Ten:
I beheld, and the same horn made war with the saints, and
prevailed against them; Until the Ancient of days came, and
[a favorable] judgment was given to the saints of the most
High; and the time came that the saints possessed the king-
dom. Thus he said, The fourth beast shall be the fourth
kingdom upon earth, which shall be diverse from all king-
doms, and shall devour the whole earth, and shall tread it
down, and break it in pieces. (Daniel 7:21-23, KJV, insertion mine)
Comments on Part Ten
History leaves no wiggle room about the identity of the fourth beast
or the little horn. The fourth beast is Rome and the little horn is the
86 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

religious entity that grew out of Rome, the Roman Catholic Church.
Daniel 7:25 does not explicitly say when the 1,260 years of perse-
cution would begin or end. However, we can determine these dates
with a brief review of history. The Bible says the little horn would
prevail against the saints until the Ancient of Days took His seat in
Heaven’s courtroom and pronounced judgment in favor of the saints!
Remember the Heaven-Earth-Linkage-Law? Here’s how it works:
When the Roman Catholic Church was removed from power so that
it could no longer persecute the saints on Earth, we know the
Ancient of Days had taken His seat in Heaven and pronounced
judgment in their favor. In other words, God put a temporary
restraining order on the Church of Rome! Daniel 7:20 aligns these
two events for us, “the same horn made war with the saints,
and prevailed against them; until the Ancient of days came
[to the convocation and took His seat]. . . .” (insertion mine) So, the
Bible indicates the 1,260 years ended shortly after the Ancient of
Days took His seat in verse 9. Historical records show that the
power of the church was broken in February 1798.
Several prominent Protestants predicted the 1,260 years of papal
dominion would end during the eighteenth century. Writers such as
Thomas Parker, 1646; Increase Mather, President of Harvard
University, 1723; William Burnet, 1724; Richard Clark, 1759, and
others anticipated the Roman church would collapse before year
1800 arrived. Sure enough, French Generals Berthier and Waller
fulfilled this specification of prophecy during the French Revolution.
They captured the pope and put him in exile in February 1798. By
counting backwards from 1798, we arrive at year A.D. 538 which is
the date that papal dominion began. (Remember Justinian’s decree
in A.D. 533 and the victory of Belisarious over the Italians in A.D.
538?) This timing is not coincidence. Clearly, God measures a time,
a times and half a time in Daniel 7 as 1,260 days using the day-for-
a-year principle, and God emphasizes this time-period again in
Revelation 12! The wounding of the papacy occurred at the end of
1,260 years when judgment was pronounced in favor of the Church
in the Wilderness. With God, timing is everything.
There Is More to the Story
This is not the end of the story for the little horn of Daniel 7. The
Bible predicts the little horn will return to power in the future.
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 87

Revelation 13 indicates that one of the seven heads, the head that
received a deadly wound, will be healed. Also, do not forget, Daniel
heard boastful words coming from the little horn after viewing the
courtroom scene in Heaven. Daniel 7 predicts the Catholic Church
will return to a position of great power. This will climax when the
Great Tribulation begins. Watch for it. The Roman church will lead
a coalition of the world’s religions in persecuting the saints of God!
Notice how these verses predict a return to power: “I beheld, and
the same horn made war with the saints, and prevailed
against them; until [A] the Ancient of days came, and
judgment was given to the saints of the most High; and [B]
the time came that the saints possessed the kingdom.” (Daniel
7:21,22, KJV, insertions mine) I have inserted “A” and “B” in these
verses because Daniel indicates there are two persecutions of the
saints. The first persecution, “A,” lasted 1,260 years (a time, times
and half a time) and it ended in 1798. The second persecution, “B,”
lasts for 42 months and it ends with the 1,305th day of the Great
Tribulation. (See Revelation 13:1-8) No wonder the angel reminded
Daniel that the saints are going to possess the kingdom! The course
of human history indicates that the saints are always under attack.
So, keep this promise in your mind and do not forget it, no matter
how discouraging circumstances may appear in days ahead: The
saints will inherit the Earth. (Matthew 5:5)
Part Eleven:
“And the ten horns out of this kingdom are ten kings that
shall arise: and another shall rise after them; and he shall be
diverse from the first, and he shall subdue three kings. And
he shall speak great words against the most High, and shall
wear out the saints of the most High, and think to change
times and laws: and they shall be given into his hand until a
time and times and the dividing of time.” (Daniel 7:24,25, KJV)
Comments on Part Eleven
To make sense of this prophecy, we have already discussed the
specifications given in these verses. However, one specification has
not been covered. Daniel was told the little horn power would
“think” to change times and laws. This language describes how the
little horn would blaspheme God. The little horn would presume (or
think it has authority) to displace the laws of God with its own laws!
88 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

In A.D. 787, at the Second Nicean Council, Catholic leaders removed

the second commandment from the Ten Commandments, and the
tenth commandment was divided into two separate commandments
so that ten would remain. The reason for this change was to reduce
questions about the use of images or icons in worship. In addition to
this, church leaders reduced the fourth commandment to just a few
words so the laity would not raise questions about which day of the
week was God’s holy day. Compare the Ten Commandments
(Exodus 20:3-17) as written in a Catholic Bible with the Catholic
Catechism and notice these blatant deviations.
The “Anti” Christ
For almost 700 years, Protestants have claimed the Roman Catholic
Church was the little horn power of Daniel 7. Even though there is
growing debate within Protestantism today as to who the little horn
power is, if we use valid rules of interpretation, the chronological
and historical harmony of Daniel 7 leaves no room for doubt. The
tragic point in this prophecy is that Satan succeeded. He was able to
corrupt the Christian church so that it eventually became “anti”
Christ. In fact, the war cry of Protestantism through centuries past
is that the Roman Catholic Church is the beast, the Antichrist, the
great whore, etc. These claims are false. The Bible says all
religions are “anti” Christ. The Moslem is no less anti-Christ than
the Jew, Hindu or Catholic! Revelation teaches that all of the
religious systems of the world are corrupt because the devil has
infiltrated them. The devil is the original antichrist, and
Revelation’s story climaxes with a powerful contest between a
physical Jesus and a physical Lucifer. The devil is very clever and
he transformed the institution that Jesus established to save souls
into a machine for torturing the people of God! Some researchers
have estimated that the Catholic Church killed some fifty million
people during its millennial reign for refusing to receive its
doctrines. During those dark centuries, the devil was overjoyed – he
loves to see people suffering in the name of God. The devil hates God
and does everything possible to ruin the work of God on Earth.
Part Twelve:
“But the judgment shall sit, and they shall take away his
dominion, to consume and to destroy it unto the end. And
Chapter 3 – Daniel 7 89

the kingdom and dominion, and the greatness of the king-

dom under the whole heaven, shall be given to the people of
the saints of the most High, whose kingdom is an everlasting
kingdom, and all dominions shall serve and obey him.
Hitherto is the end of the matter. As for me Daniel, my
cogitations much troubled me, and my countenance changed
in me: but I kept the matter in my heart.” (Daniel 7:26-28, KJV)
Comments on Part Twelve
This vision brought Daniel indescribable agony. The Lord revealed
to Daniel that the saints would inherit the Earth, but he became ill
when he saw the travail of the ages that must first occur. The angel
closed this vision, reminding Daniel that the judgment would sit,
and Jesus will ultimately remove the dominion of the little horn,
destroying it with fire. Then, God will give the kingdom to the saints
forever and ever!
This chapter has been lengthy because there are many important
details in Daniel 7. Remember, if Daniel 7 is not interpreted
correctly, the remainder of Daniel’s prophecies, as well as
Revelation’s prophecies, will not make much sense, nor will they
align properly within the matrix that history confirms. God tells us
many important things in Daniel 7 and if we fail to organize these
pieces correctly, our prophetic conclusions in other areas of Daniel
and Revelation will miss the mark. In conclusion, we can
summarize Daniel 7 with the following seven thoughts:
1. Daniel 7 harmoniously builds upon the progression of
nations described in Daniel 2.
2. The sequential order of apocalyptic events forms a
historical matrix.
3. Daniel 7 and history leave no wiggle room on the identity
of the fourth beast or the little horn.
4. The wounding of the little horn is directly connected to
the timing of the courtroom scene in Heaven.
5. The little horn will eventually return to power and speak
boastful words against God.
90 Chapter 3 – Daniel 7

6. At the appointed time, Jesus was exalted and given

sovereign authority over the universe and He has been
judging the dead to determine who will participate in His
coming kingdom.
7. God is sovereign over the kings of Earth. He sets up
kings and takes them down.
 Chapter 4
Daniel 8 – The Antichrist

“Dear children, this is the last hour; and as you

have heard that the Antichrist is coming, even
now many antichrists have come. This is how we
know it is the last hour.”
– 1 John 2:18

Section I - The Symbols

As we proceed through the book of Daniel, the prophetic matrix will

continue to unfold, and our understanding of God’s Word will
become clearer. Daniel 8 adds several important elements to the
prophetic matrix. God can say so much with very few words! To
make this chapter easier to digest, I have sub-divided it into seven
segments. If you make sure that you understand the issues in each
segment as you proceed, you should end up with a deeper
appreciation for God’s Word at the end of this study. Before we
examine Daniel 8, there are four points from the previous chapter
that need to be restated:
1. History confirms the identity of the fourth beast in Daniel
7 to be the empire of Rome.
2. History confirms the identity of the little horn that
uprooted three of the ten horns to be the Roman Catholic
Church.
3. The timing of the convocation in Heaven (Daniel 7:9) is
linked to the wounding of the little horn power on Earth.
(Daniel 7:21,22) The time, times and half a time (the
1,260 years of persecution) mentioned in Daniel 7:25
came to an end in February 1798, when French soldiers
captured the pope and put him in exile. The downfall of
92 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

the papacy occurred because the allotted time of 1,260

years ended, and the Ancient of Days pronounced a
restraining order in favor of the saints. As a result, the
persecution of God’s people ended. The linkage between
the wounding of the papacy in 1798 (on Earth) and the
issuance of the restraining order (in Heaven) is a key
point. Because the event on Earth is linked to an event in
Heaven, we can determine when the convocation in
Heaven began.
4. Daniel 7:11 (and Revelation 13:3) indicates the Roman
Catholic Church will return to a position of world
preeminence after 1798. Daniel heard boastful words from
the little horn after he observed the courtroom scene in
Heaven. (Compare Daniel 7:11 with Revelation 13:3.)
Now that these four points have been reviewed, consider the
following points that will rise from this study on Daniel 8:
1. Babylon will fall and the Medo-Persian empire will
rise to power.
2. The Medo-Persian empire will fall and the Grecian
empire will rise to power.
3. The cleansing of Heaven’s temple begins after
2,300 years.
4. During the Great Tribulation, Lucifer, the
Antichrist, will physically appear and masquerade
as God. He will gain control over Earth for a short
period of time and kill a large number of people.
Look over the matrix in Chart 4.1, and notice that it contains some
repetition and enlargement of the matrix presented in Chapter 3.
Especially notice the placement and order of the items located in the
rows for Daniel 7 and Daniel 8.
Remember from Chapter 1 that “no prophecy is complete within
itself,” and Daniel 8 is no exception. As we will see, Daniel 8 cannot
be accurately interpreted without using the developing matrix which
the four rules produce. Even with a valid set of rules, we have to be
careful that we put each element in its intended place. All of the
prophetic pieces have to fit together in a harmonious matrix, for God
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 93

Prophetic Matrix Including Daniel 2, 7, 8, and 11

605 168 A.D. A.D. 1798

Timing: 538 B.C. 331 B.C. Great Tribulation
B.C. B.C. 476 538 1844

Daniel Four Mighty

11:2-4 Kings King
Cambyses,
Alex the
False
Great
Smerdis,
then Four
Darius 1,
Generals
Xerxes
Horn
Goat with
Power:
Ram with a Great Judgment Judgment
Daniel The
Two Horn of the of the
8 Stern
Horns then Four Dead Living
Faced
Horns
King

Lion Little
Bear with Leopard Little Little
Daniel with 10 Horn
Three with Four Monster Horn Horn
7 Eagle's Horns Heard
Ribs Heads Rises Wounded
Wings Boasting

Feet 10 Toes
Daniel Head of Chest of Thighs of Legs of
2 Gold Silver Bronze Iron Iron/
Iron and Clay
Clay
Medo- 10
Babylon Grecia Rome Many Kings
Persia Kings

Chart 4.1

is the Author and Designer of prophecy. Remember, each prophetic

element is like a piece of a puzzle that has several sides. The puzzle
is solved when all the pieces are positioned in such a way that they
harmoniously align with the surrounding pieces.
The Apocalyptic Sequence
God gave the vision in Daniel 8 to Daniel about 550 B.C. Daniel 8
follows the same order found in Daniel 2 and 7. In other words, this
vision contains an orderly sequence of events which is followed by
94 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

commentary that explains the sequence. Carefully study the

apocalyptic sequence:
“In the third year of the reign of king Belshazzar a vision
appeared unto me, even unto me Daniel, after that which
appeared unto me at the first. And I saw in a vision; and it
came to pass, when I saw, that I was at Shushan in the
palace, which is in the province of Elam; and I saw in a
vision, and I was by the river of Ulai. Then I lifted up mine
eyes, and saw, and, behold, there stood before the river a
ram which had two horns: and the two horns were high; but
one was higher than the other, and the higher came up last. I
saw the ram pushing westward, and northward, and
southward; so that no beasts might stand before him, neither
was there any that could deliver out of his hand; but he did
according to his will, and became great.
“And as I was considering, behold, an he goat came from the
west on the face of the whole Earth, and touched not the
ground: and the goat had a notable horn between his eyes.
And he came to the ram that had two horns, which I had seen
standing before the river, and ran unto him in the fury of his
power. And I saw him come close unto the ram, and he was
moved with choler against him, and smote the ram, and
brake his two horns: and there was no power in the ram to
stand before him, but he cast him down to the ground, and
stamped upon him: and there was none that could deliver
the ram out of his hand. Therefore the he goat waxed very
great: and when he was strong, the great horn was broken;
and for it came up four notable ones toward the four winds
of heaven.
“And out of one of them came forth a little horn, which
waxed exceeding great, toward the south, and toward the
east, and toward the pleasant land. And it waxed great, even
to the host of heaven; and it cast down some of the host and
of the stars to the ground, and stamped upon them. Yea, he
magnified himself even to the prince of the host, and by him
the daily sacrifice was taken away, and the place of his
sanctuary was cast down. And an host was given him against
the daily sacrifice by reason of transgression, and it cast
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 95

down the truth to the ground; and it practiced, and

prospered.” (Daniel 8:1-12, KJV)
Comments
These twelve verses focus on three symbols: a ram, a goat and a
horn power. Because the Bible is its own interpreter, it provides the
meaning of these symbols. The ram represents the kingdom of
Medo-Persia. (Daniel 5:28; 8:20). The two horns of the ram
represent the co-regent reign of two kings, the king of the Medes
and the king of the Persians. The higher horn (the greater king)
represents the Persian side of this kingdom. The higher horn of the
ram in Daniel 8:3 also aligns with the “higher shoulder” of the bear
in Daniel 7:5. (See Chart 4.1.)
The second symbol, the goat, represents the kingdom of Grecia.
(Daniel 8:21) The great horn represents the first prominent king of
the Grecian empire. History reveals this king was Alexander the
Great, who died in the prime of his life. The four horns that replaced
the great horn represent four generals that eventually gained
control of Alexander’s empire. Historians identify these generals as
Cassander, Lysimachus, Ptolemy and Seleucus.
We know the identity of the ram and goat, but what does the third
symbol, the horn power, represent? Until the twentieth century, a
majority of Protestants claimed the little horn in Daniel 7 and the
horn power in Daniel 8 represented the papacy. True, both horns
have important similarities, but they are not the same entity. We
will see that the horn power in Daniel 8 is many times more
powerful than the Roman Catholic Church.
Beasts Are Kingdoms – Horns Are Kings
In Daniel 8, the two beasts represent empires, but the horns of the
ram and of the goat represent kings. This distinction is important,
because the horn power in this vision is not attached to a beast (a
world empire). Further, the Bible says this horn power is a king.
(Daniel 8:23) Daniel was told this king will exalt himself to be as
great as the Prince of the host, Jesus Christ! (Daniel 8:11) The horn
power in Daniel 8 is a stern-faced king that will rule over Earth
during the Great Tribulation. (Daniel 11:36) This coming king is the
Antichrist, Lucifer, who will dazzle the world with his power,
authority and ability to perform incredible miracles. He will gain
96 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

control of Earth and do more evil than Hitler, Stalin and Pol Pot
combined. In short, the dreaded Antichrist will not be a mere man.
The coming Antichrist will be Lucifer, appearing in the flesh,
masquerading as an angel of light, and claiming to be Almighty God.
(2 Corinthians 11:14; Daniel 11:36; Revelation 9; Revelation 13:11-18)
Timing Is Everything
The vision in Daniel 8 almost covers the same 2,600 years described
in Daniel 2 and 7. The only difference is that the Daniel 8 vision
starts with the Medo-Persian empire (538 B.C.) instead of the
Babylonian empire (605 B.C.). The sequence in this vision ends
when Jesus destroys “the stern-faced king” at the Second Coming.
Daniel 8:25 indicates the horn power will be destroyed by God:
“. . . he will be destroyed, but not by human power.” (See
Daniel 2:44, Daniel 7:11 and Revelation 19:11-21.) This is an
important specification. Men will not be able to destroy the
Antichrist. Lucifer will do whatever he wants and no one will be
able to stop him. Jesus does not lay hands on His enemies at the
Second Coming; He simply commands the wicked to die. The sharp
sword that comes out of His mouth represents His ability to speak
the command and people drop dead. (See Revelation 19:15-21.) It is
interesting to note that the voice that calls the righteous dead to life
(1 Thessalonians 4:16) is the same voice that commands the wicked
to die. (Revelation 19:21)
Because God is the Creator of apocalyptic prophecy, we know Daniel
8 will harmonize with the matrix established in Daniel 2 and Daniel
7. Pay close attention to the words of Gabriel, as he speaks to
Daniel about the sequence of events: “And I heard a man’s voice
from the Ulai calling, ‘Gabriel, tell this man the meaning of
the vision.’ As he came near the place where I was standing, I
was terrified and fell prostrate. ‘Son of man,’ he said to me,
‘understand that the vision concerns the time of the end.’
While he was speaking to me, I was in a deep sleep, with my
face to the ground. Then he touched me and raised me to my
feet. He said: ‘I am going to tell you what will happen later in
the time of wrath, because the vision concerns the appointed
time of the end.’ ” (Daniel 8:16-19, italics mine)
Look at the words which have been italicized. Gabriel twice
emphasized the point that this vision concerns “the time of the end”
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 97

or “the appointed time of the end.” The word “appointed” means the
time of the end was set or predetermined long ago. This is why
Gabriel calls it “the appointed time of the end.” God has set a date
for the Great Tribulation to begin. The Father has also set a date
for the Second Coming. (Matthew 24:36) So, ready or not, believe it
or not, God’s great clock is counting the days to the appointed time
of the end. (Read Revelation 9:15 and notice how the date for the
sixth trumpet has been predetermined down to the very hour.)
The Time of Wrath
Gabriel said the appointed time of the end will be a time of wrath. A
time of wrath means that everyone will suffer wrath during the
appointed time of the end. The wicked will receive God’s wrath for
their rebellion and insolence (Colossians 3:5,6; Revelation 16), and
the saints will receive the wrath of their governments when they
refuse to obey the dictates of Babylon and the Antichrist!
(Revelation 13:7-10) Everyone will suffer wrath.
How does the horn power in Daniel 8 connect to the appointed time
of the end? The connection is quite simple because the ram and the
goat are not end-time players. History says these world empires
disappeared more than two thousand years ago. However, the horn
power, or “the stern-faced king,” has not yet appeared. He is the
only item left in this vision that relates to the appointed time of the
end. As we will see, the horn power in Daniel 8 is the coming
Antichrist. He will appear “out of nowhere” during the Great
Tribulation. He does not rise out of a nation or a kingdom like the
little horn of Daniel 7. Lucifer will suddenly appear in clouds of
light with his angels, and through counterfeit miracles, signs,
wonders, deceit and lies, he will deceive the whole world. He will
gain control of Earth during the appointed time of the end.
First Question
After hearing that the horn power is the only part of this vision that
applies to the time of the end, one of the first questions people ask is
this: “Why did God put two ancient kingdoms in this vision if they
have nothing to do with the end-time?” There are at least three
reasons for placing these ancient kingdoms in a prophecy that points
to the appointed time of the end:
98 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

1. God placed the ram and goat in the vision of Daniel 8 so

that we could identify by name the two empires that
followed Babylon. The Bible says the ram and the goat
represent the kingdoms of the Medes and Persians and
the Grecians, respectively. (Daniel 8:20,21) By stating
their names, God eliminated any wiggle room about the
identity of the first three empires in Daniel’s historical
matrix, namely, Babylon, Medo-Persia and Grecia.
Furthermore, the identity of these three kingdoms leaves
no question about the identity of the fourth beast in
Daniel 7 (Rome) nor the identity of the little horn power
in Daniel 7 that rose out of Rome (the Roman Catholic
Church).
2. The second reason God put two ancient kingdoms in this
end-time vision is linkage. The ram is connected by the
2,300 days to an event that occurs in Heaven. Because we
cannot see into Heaven with the naked eye, God has
linked events in Heaven with well known events on
Earth. The result is simple. Students of apocalyptic
prophecy can determine the timing of several heavenly
events which no one can see.
3. Last, God put two ancient kingdoms in this end-time
vision because God wants everyone to know the horn
power in Daniel 8 does not rise out of an ancient empire
like the little horn of Daniel 7. The horn power in Daniel
8 is not an extension of the Roman empire nor any world
empire. The point here is separation. The horn power in
Daniel 8 is separate and isolated from earthly kingdoms.
This was not the case in Daniel 7. We know the little
horn in Daniel 7 rose out of the fourth beast and it
derived its name from its powerful host. For seventeen
centuries, the little horn of Daniel 7 has been called the
Roman Catholic Church. To keep us from misidentifying
the horn power of Daniel 8, God inserted more than 2,000
years between the ancient kingdoms and the appearing of
the horn power. God wants the world to understand that
the horn power in Daniel 8 does not have an earthly
origin. Instead, he will have a supernatural one.
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 99

Revelation 9 indicates that Lucifer will come down out of

the sky attended by millions of angels.
Antichrist Will Not be Human
The books of Isaiah, Ezekiel, 2 Thessalonians, 2 Corinthians, Daniel
and Revelation harmonize because they are the Word of God. They
present a rather startling picture of the coming Antichrist by adding
valuable pieces to the puzzle. The following comments are a brief
synthesis of what these books say about the Antichrist:
The coming Antichrist will not be a mere mortal. The coming
Antichrist will not be born to a woman. The coming Antichrist
cannot be killed by men. The coming Antichrist will have
supernatural powers that far exceed anything men can do. The
coming Antichrist will be evil and destructive beyond compre-
hension. The coming Antichrist will be dazzling and commanding in
appearance, but deadly in his manipulation. The coming Antichrist
will be a stern-faced king, that is, he will not show mercy unless
temporal mercy facilitates his evil schemes. Billions of powerful
demons serve him. The coming Antichrist is the ancient foe of
Christ. In fact, Lucifer is the most powerful and greatest angel that
God ever created. He was the first being to become anti-Christ. The
Bible predicts that God will allow Lucifer and his angels to appear
in physical form visible to the human race. Just as Jesus became a
man to save the world, Lucifer will be granted authority to
masquerade as God so that he can quickly lead the wicked to their
destruction. Lucifer will mimic Christ’s return and appear with
clouds of angels. You can be sure the appearing of the devil will be
the most spectacular event ever viewed by human eyes (Revelation
17:8) – only to be eclipsed by the brighter and more glorious
appearing of Jesus. (Revelation 1:7, 19:11-21)
Horn Power Not Antiochus Epiphanes IV Nor the Papacy
Most Christians believe the horn power in Daniel 8 is either
Antiochus Epiphanes IV, an ancient king who ruled with Rome’s
permission over a tiny Syrian state (175-164 B.C.), or they say this
horn power is the Roman Catholic Church. Of course, the only way
we can determine the true identity of this horn power is by
satisfying all of the specifications given to Daniel. We will find in
this presentation that both interpretations share the same
100 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

deficiency. Neither conclusion satisfies all of the specifications given

in Daniel 8.
Even though Bible students and scholars have studied the book of
Daniel for centuries, it was impossible for them to know the truth
about Daniel 8 because the knowledge of the architecture of Daniel
was sealed up until the time of the end. (Daniel 12:4,9) Because the
end of the age is here and the Great Tribulation is about to begin,
the book of Daniel has been unsealed and God’s Word now speaks
with a clarity and precision that it did not have before. When
Daniel 8 is integrated into the historical matrix which the four rules
of interpretation produce, the horn power in Daniel 8 cannot be
Antiochus IV or the papacy! The horn power in Daniel 8 is
something far more powerful and far more sinister. The horn power
in Daniel 8 is the great enemy of God and man. He is the coming
Antichrist.

Section II - Antichrist as King of the North

All Specifications Have to Be Fulfilled

Rule Two says, “A fulfilment of apocalyptic prophecy occurs when all
of the specifications within that prophecy are met. This includes the
order of events outlined in the prophecy.” With this rule in mind, we
will carefully examine all of the specifications of the horn power in
Daniel 8. We will begin with the origin of the Horn Power. “The
goat [Grecia] became very great, but at the height of his
power his large horn [Alexander the Great] was broken off, and
in its place four prominent horns grew up toward the four
winds of heaven [North, East, West, South]. Out of one of them
[the four winds] came another horn, which started small but
grew in power to the south and to the east and toward [the
west] the Beautiful Land.” (Daniel 8:8,9, insertions mine) The
Bible says the large or prominent horn of the goat was broken off at
the height of its power. This seems odd. A person would not expect
a powerful horn to “break off” at the peak of its strength, but
remember, this horn represents a king, not an empire. Alexander
the Great died at the peak of his military power. His kingdom was
divided between his four generals which are represented by the four
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 101

horns. Gabriel told Daniel, “The four horns that replaced the
one that was broken off represent four [kings or] kingdoms
that will emerge from his nation but will not have the same
power.” (Daniel 8:22, insertion mine) It is interesting to observe
that prophecy is history written in advance. History confirms
Gabriel’s words. None of Alexander’s generals were strong enough to
reunite the Grecian kingdom.
God used beasts in Daniel 7 and Daniel 8 to represent empires, but
He consistently used horns to represent kings. The Hebrew word for
horn, malkuwth, can mean king, ruler or kingdom. Most translators
treat malkuwth in Daniel 8:22 as “four kingdoms,” however, in this
context malkuwth is better translated “four kings.” Because horns
represent kings in Daniel 8, this consistency forces the horn power
in Daniel 8 to also be a king. In fact, the Bible emphasizes this point
by indicating the horn power in Daniel 8 will be a stern-faced “king”
who appears during the appointed time of the end! (See Daniel
8:19,23.)
The Horn Power Comes out of the North
“And out of one of them [the four winds] came forth a little
horn, which waxed exceeding great, toward the south, and
toward the east, and toward the [west] pleasant land.” (Daniel
8:9, KJV, insertions mine) From the evidence that follows, we will
discover that the horn power (the stern-faced king) does not
originate within an earthly kingdom. Actually, the Antichrist just
appears out of nowhere. The Bible reveals he comes from the north,
out of one of the four winds. There is more to this direction than one
might think at first. As we proceed, notice how the horn power in
Daniel 8 does not have its roots in ancient kingdoms such as Medo-
Persia, Grecia or Rome!
Daniel 8:9 says, “And out of one of them came another horn. . . .”
To understand this phrase we have to examine the grammar. To
what noun does the pronoun “them” refer? The Hebrew pronoun
“them” (hem) is masculine, and the Hebrew word for “winds”
(ruwach) can be masculine or feminine, but the Hebrew word for
“horns” (qeren) is feminine. Therefore, a gender agreement
(masculine “them” and masculine “winds”) is possible if we say, “Out
of one of the four winds. . . .” But if we say, “Out of one of the four
horns. . .,” the gender in the grammar does not agree. Even though
102 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

grammar suggests the horn power comes out of one of the four
winds, grammar alone does not make this conclusion air-tight. So,
let us see if there is stronger evidence.
Daniel was standing on the banks of the Ulai River when he
received this vision. From his point of reference, the horn power
started out small, but became “exceeding great” as it grew toward
the south, east and “toward the beautiful land.” Daniel refers to his
homeland as “the beautiful land” without explicitly saying “west.”
(See Jeremiah 3:19.) Maps of this region show Jerusalem to be due
west of the province of Elam where Daniel was located. So, after
analyzing verse 9, we discover the horn power comes out of the
north and grows toward the south, east and west.
The direction of north is very significant. The ancients thought the
world was flat, and north was “up” and south was “down.” Two
thousand six hundred years later, while we know the world is not
flat, we still follow this tradition. Most people think the North Pole
is on the top of the world and the South Pole is at the bottom. The
ancients believed that God’s throne was above the world, so they
concluded that divine judgments came down from the north.
Carefully study the following seven texts and notice how the
direction of north is associated with divine destruction (italics and
insertions mine):
1. “This is what the Lord says [to Israel]: ‘Look, an
army is coming from the land of the north [to destroy
you]; a great nation is being stirred up from the
ends of the Earth. They are armed with bow and
spear; they are cruel and show no mercy. They
sound like the roaring sea as they ride on their
horses; they come like men in battle formation to
attack you, O Daughter of Zion.’ ” (Jeremiah 6:22,23)
2. “ ‘I will summon all the peoples of the north and my
servant Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylon,’ declares
the Lord, ‘and I will bring them against this land
and its inhabitants and against all the surrounding
nations. I will completely destroy them [the
inhabitants of Judah] and make them an object of
horror and scorn, and an everlasting ruin.’ ”
(Jeremiah 25:9)
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 103

3. “This is the message the Lord spoke to Jeremiah

the prophet about the coming of Nebuchadnezzar
king of Babylon to attack Egypt. . . Egypt is a
beautiful heifer, but a gadfly is coming against her
from the north. The mercenaries in her ranks are
like fattened calves. They too will turn and flee
together, they will not stand their ground, for the
day of disaster is coming upon them, the time for
them to be punished.” (Jeremiah 46:13,20,21)
4. “Announce and proclaim among the nations, lift up
a banner and proclaim it; keep nothing back, but
say, ‘Babylon will be captured; Bel will be put to
shame, Marduk filled with terror. Her images will
be put to shame and her idols filled with terror.’ A
nation from the North [the Medes] will attack her
and lay waste her land. No one will live in it; both
men and animals will flee away.” (Jeremiah 50:2,3)
5. “Therefore, son of man, prophesy and say to Gog
[Lucifer]: ‘This is what the Sovereign Lord says: In
that day, when my people Israel are living in safety,
will you not take notice of it? You will come from
your place in the far north, you and many nations
with you, all of them riding on horses, a great
horde, a mighty army. You will advance against my
people Israel like a cloud that covers the land. In
days to come, O Gog [Lucifer], I will bring you
against my land, so that the nations may know me
when I show myself holy through you before their
eyes.’ ” (Ezekiel 38:14-16)
6. The horn power in Daniel 8 descends from the north
because north is a meaningful direction. God deliberately
embedded this seemingly insignificant detail in Daniel 8
because He can say profound things with very few words
through figurative speech. (Remember, no copy machines
or printing presses existed in those days. Hand copied
books were scarce and extremely expensive, so books with
fewer words were easier to preserve.) The direction of
“north” became a significant direction when Lucifer began
104 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

campaigning against Christ in Heaven. Speaking about

Lucifer’s blasphemy, the Lord said, “For thou hast said
in thine heart, I will ascend into Heaven, I will
exalt my throne above the stars of God: I will sit
also upon the mount of the congregation, in the
sides of the north: I will ascend above the heights of
the clouds; I will be like the most High.” (Isaiah
14:13,14, KJV) The phrase, “the sides of the north,” refers
to the location of God’s throne. God’s throne was located
on the “higher side” or the north side of Heaven’s temple!
(The Table of Showbread, which represented God’s
throne, was placed on the north side of the earthly
temple.) This knowledge and God’s consistent use of the
direction of “north” in the Old Testament indicate that
divine authority or judgment originates on “the sides of
the north.”
7. One more text highlighting the importance of the
direction north which the reader should consider. In the
book of Job, Elihu speaks for God. He addresses a
number of false arguments which Job’s friends had made
against God. (I am convinced that Elihu was Jesus, who
physically appeared before Job and his friends, much like
the Lord appeared before Abraham. Genesis 18:22) Elihu
said, “Be assured that my words are not false; one
perfect in knowledge is with you. . . . Out of the
north he comes in golden splendor; God comes in
awesome majesty.” (Job 36:4; 37:22, italics mine) In the
context of Job 36 and 37, the sovereign authority and
awesome wisdom of God comes out of the north. This
makes perfect sense because God’s throne is located “on
the sides of the north” in Heaven’s temple. (See Exodus
26:35 and Exodus 40:22 for the location of the Table of
Showbread which represented God’s throne.)
Intermediate Review
1. The horn power comes out of one of the four winds.
2. The horn power comes out of the north and grows toward
the south, east and west.
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 105

3. Divine authority and divine destruction come out of the

north.
4. God’s throne is located on the north side of Heaven’s
temple.
The King of the North in Daniel 11
Even though Daniel 8 indicates the horn power comes out of the
north, Daniel 11 offers more details about the king who comes out of
the north. Let us jump ahead for a moment to Daniel 11:36 and
notice a few verses. These verses may help you see more clearly
how the architecture of Daniel influences my conclusion that the
horn power in Daniel 8 is the Antichrist. First, consider these
verses: “Some of the wise will stumble, so that they may be
refined, purified and made spotless until the time of the end,
for it will still come at the appointed time. [However, at the
appointed time of the end] The [stern-faced] king will do as he
pleases. He will exalt and magnify himself above every god
and will say unheard-of things against the God of gods. He
will be successful until the time of wrath [the Great
Tribulation] is completed, for what has been determined must
take place.” (Daniel 11:35,36, italics and insertions mine) These
two verses speak about the time of the end. Now we will jump
forward to verses 40 and 41. “At the time of the end the king of
the south will [rebel and] engage him in battle, and the king of
the north [the Antichrist] will storm out against him with
chariots and cavalry and a great fleet of ships. He will invade
many countries and sweep through them like a flood. He will
also invade the Beautiful Land. . . .” (Daniel 11:40,41, insertions
mine)
After Lucifer appears on Earth, Revelation 13:8 indicates most
wicked people will receive him as God, but many of them will reject
him and rebel against his claims of authority. Daniel 11 reveals the
wicked king of the south will rise up and oppose the arrogant and
pompous claims of Lucifer, the king of the north. Lucifer will wage
war against the king of the south, and will destroy him and his
followers. In fact, this destruction amounts to one-third of the
wicked! The remaining two-thirds of the wicked will gladly submit
to the devil as though he were Almighty God. As horrendous as this
battle is, the sixth-trumpet war is not the battle of Armageddon.
106 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

The battle of Armageddon occurs as Jesus appears. (Revelation

16:12-21)
The war described in Daniel 11:40,41 is also described in Revelation
9:13-21. Daniel and Revelation perfectly harmonize on this matter.
The point is that the horn power of Daniel 8 is the king from the
north. Study over Chart 4.2 and notice how the king from the north
in Daniel 11:36 and the horn power of Daniel 8 appear at the
appointed time of the end. The architecture of apocalyptic prophecy
is amazing! (Note: To keep the size of this growing matrix within
the physical constraints of the pages within this book, the column
for Babylon has been removed.)
Summarizing His Origin
The horn power in Daniel 8 does not arise from a nation on Earth.
This king will come out of the north during the appointed time of the
end. God uses the point of origin to make a profound statement.
The Antichrist will arrive on a divine mission of destruction! God
will send the stern-faced king to rule over the wicked. God will send
him because the wicked rejected His truth and rebelled against His
generous offer of salvation. Paul talked about this, “. . . They [the
wicked] perish because they refused to love the truth and so be
saved. For this reason God sends them a powerful delusion
so that they will believe the lie and so that all will be
condemned who have not believed the truth but have
delighted in wickedness.” (2 Thessalonians 2:10-12, italics mine)
Consider God’s consistent ways. He sent armies to destroy the
Caananites, the Israelites, the Egyptians, the Babylonians, the
Medes and Persians, the Grecians, and the Romans. When nations
go beyond the point of redemption, God raises up a destroyer king.
The reason God places the Antichrist in the end time story is
because He sets up kings and He takes them down with other kings.
During the Great Tribulation, God will send the stern-faced king of
Daniel 8 (the Antichrist) to destroy much of the world. The devil
will kill one-third of mankind, leaving two groups of survivors.
When Jesus appears, one group will obey the commandments of the
Lamb (Revelation 12:17) and the other group will obey the lamb-like
beast (the Antichrist).
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 107

Prophecy Matrix With the King of the North

A.D. A.D.
Timing: 538 B.C. 331 B.C. 168 B.C. 1798 1844 Great Tribulation
476 538

King of
Daniel the
11:36 North
Appears
God's
Kingdoms to the
Four Mighty People
North and South
Kings King Caught
of Israel at War.
Cambyses, Alex the Between
Daniel Israel Caught in
False Great Kings of
11:2-35 the Middle.
Smerdis, Plus the
Jerusalem
Darius I, Four North
Destroyed A.D.
Artexerxes Generals and the
70.
South

|---457 B.C. ------------ 2,300 Day/Years ------------- 1844---| The Time of the End

Goat Horn
Daniel with One Power
8 Great Judgment Judgment from the
Ram with
Horn -- of the of the North:
Two Horns
Then Dead Living Stern
Four Faced
Horns King

1,260 Day/Years
A.D. 538 to 1798 Beasts
Are
Leopard Little Little
10 Court Books of Burned
Daniel Bear with with Horn Horn
Monster Horns Seated Record Up in
7 Three Ribs Four Heard
at First Rises Little Opened the Fire
Heads Uproot- Boasting
Horn at the
s3 End
Falls
Horns

Thighs 10 Toes
Chest of Legs of Feet
of 10 Kings
Daniel
Silver Bronze Iron Iron and Clay Iron/Clay
2
Medo
Grecia Rome Many Kings 10 Kings
Persia

Chart 4.2
108 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

I know this explanation of the horn power goes beyond the evidence
presented thus far in Daniel 8, but my purpose is to help you behold
a very large picture that will continue to unfold if the apocalyptic
rules are followed!

Section III - Antichrist Will Oppose All Religions

The Horn Power Grows Until. . . .

“It grew until it reached the host of the heavens, and it
threw some of the starry host down to the earth and
trampled on them.” (Daniel 8:10) The horn power from the north
starts small, but it grows until it reaches the starry host of the
heavens, then it throws them down and tramples them. This
language indicates the stern-faced king will grow in recognition and
authority among the inhabitants of Earth until he is exalted above
all gods! The book of Revelation reveals more about this process
than Daniel. Revelation indicates the devil will begin his physical
work on Earth with local appearances. The devil, along with his
enormous host of angels, will come down out of the sky in blinding
clouds of light at specific locations on Earth. He will imitate
Christ’s Second Coming with two obvious differences. First, God will
not permit the devil to be visible to the whole world at one time. So,
the people of Earth will not be introduced to the Antichrist at one
event. He will grow in popularity as he appears in the skies over
the populated cities of Earth. Great cities of the world such as
Mexico City, Jerusalem, Washington D.C., Moscow, Sydney, Beijing,
Calcutta, Houston and others, will see magnificent displays of power
and glory. Lucifer will appear in various places and he will exercise
miracle-working powers to convince people that he is God.
(Revelation 13:14,15) Even though his display of power will be
amazing, the saints will not be deceived. They know who lives
behind the mask. (Revelation 14:9,10)
To understand the meaning of “the starry hosts” in Daniel 8, we
have to examine the language and ways of people who lived in
ancient times. Polytheism was popular. The ancients worshiped
various gods who lived among the stars of the heavens. (Daniel
2:11,28) They used the stars, like dots on a drawing pad, to draw
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 109

pictures of their gods. These mythical gods belonged to a collection

called “the starry hosts.” Idols of gold, silver, wood and stone were
representations of these various gods. These five texts help us
understand who the starry hosts were (italics mine):
1. “They [Israel] forsook all the commands of the
Lord their God and made for themselves two
idols cast in the shape of calves, and an
Asherah pole. They bowed down to all the
starry hosts, and they worshiped Baal.”
(2 Kings 17:16, insertion mine)
2. “He [King Manasseh] rebuilt the high places
his father Hezekiah had destroyed; he also
erected altars to Baal and made an Asherah
pole, as Ahab king of Israel had done. He
bowed down to all the starry hosts and
worshiped them. He built altars in the temple
of the Lord, of which the Lord had said, ‘In
Jerusalem I will put my Name.’ In both
courts of the temple of the Lord, he built
altars to all the starry hosts. . . .” (2 Kings 21:3-5,
insertion mine)
3. “He [King Josiah] did away with the pagan
priests appointed by the kings of Judah to
burn incense on the high places of the towns
of Judah and on those around Jerusalem –
those who burned incense to Baal, to the sun
and moon, to the constellations and to all the
starry hosts.” (2 Kings 23:5, insertion mine)
4. “You alone are the Lord. You made the
heavens, even the highest heavens, and all
their starry host, the earth and all that is on
it, the seas and all that is in them. You give
life to everything, and the multitudes of
heaven worship you.” (Nehemiah 9:6)
5. “And when you look up to the sky and see the
sun, the moon and the stars – all the heavenly
array – do not be enticed into bowing down
110 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

to them and worshiping things the Lord your

God has apportioned to all the nations under
heaven.” (Deuteronomy 4:19)
If we allow the Bible to be its own interpreter, the term “starry
hosts” represents pagan deities. The ancients gave them names such
as Baal, Mercury, Zeus, Hermes, Venus, Ra, Sol and others. (Acts
14:12) With this setting in mind, Daniel 8:10 indicates the
Antichrist will grow in authority and recognition until he is honored
above all gods worshiped by men. The stern-faced king will prove
himself greater than the gods of all religions because he can perform
great signs and miracles at will. No other false god will be able to
match his glory or prowess. Even King Nebuchadnezzar admitted
that Daniel’s God was greater than his own god when Daniel
interpreted the king’s vision! So, when the time comes, the
Antichrist will call fire down out of Heaven to destroy rebellious
groups of people, and his actions will convince onlookers that they
are in the presence of Almighty God. (Revelation 13:13,14; 2 Thes-
salonians 2:9) In this way, the devil will trample down (show
inferior) all of the gods of this world and the religions of men. Now
that you have an idea of what the horn power from the north will do
to the nations and religions of the world, notice these two texts:
1. “The [stern-faced] king [of the North] will do as he
pleases. He will exalt and magnify himself above
every god and will say unheard-of things against
the God of gods. He will be successful until the time
of wrath is completed, for what has been deter-
mined must take place. He will show no regard for
the gods of his fathers [the traditional gods of religions]
or for the one desired by women [Jesus Christ*], nor
will he regard any god, but will exalt himself above
them all.” (Daniel 11:36,37, italics and insertion mine.
2. “Let no man deceive you by any means: for that day
[the Second Coming] shall not come, except there
come a falling away [from the truth] first, and that

* Most virgins in Israel hoped they would be the one through whom the
Deliverer would be born. See how Mary’s good fortune is described in
Luke 1:34,35.
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 111

man of sin be revealed, the son of perdition

[destruction]; Who opposeth and exalteth himself
above all that is called God, or that is worshipped;
so that he as God sitteth in the temple of God,
showing himself that he is God.”
(2 Thessalonians 2:3,4, KJV, insertions mine)
Do not forget each of these specifications. The details regarding the
horn power of Daniel 8 are creating a tall order – in fact, no ordinary
person can meet these specifications.

Section IV - Horn Power Cannot Be Antiochus

Epiphanes IV

Daily Services in Heaven

It is regrettable that millions of Christians believe that Antiochus
Epiphanes IV (175-164 B.C.) is the horn power of Daniel 8. We will
investigate this claim by comparing the specifications given in the
Bible with historical facts about Antiochus IV. Beginning with
Daniel 8:11, the angel said, “It [the horn power] set itself up to be
as great as the Prince of the host [The Lord Jesus]; it [the horn
power] took away the daily sacrifice from him, and the place
of his sanctuary was brought low.” (Daniel 8:11, insertions and
italics mine) Verse 11 will make a lot more sense if you understand
God’s use of parallel temples. (See * below.) Daniel 8:11 is not
describing the cessation of daily sacrifices in Jerusalem’s temple in
167 B.C. Instead, we will see that this verse describes the cessation
of daily services in Heaven’s temple which during “the appointed
time of the end.”
The word “sacrifice” in verse 11 has been added by translators and is
not found in the original manuscripts. This fact is important
because Gabriel is not talking about the cessation of animal
sacrifices on Earth. He is talking about the cessation of the daily

* If you have not investigated the doctrine of parallel sanctuaries,

please review Chapters 11 and 12 in my companion volume,
Jesus, The Alpha and The Omega.
112 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

services in Heaven’s temple. The word “daily” comes from a

perpetual round of services that occurred evening and morning in
the earthly temple. The daily services on Earth shadow similar
services in Heaven’s temple. (Hebrews 8:1-5) During the appointed
time of the end, the Antichrist will cause the daily services in
Heaven’s temple to end and the Antichrist will cause the place of
Christ’s sanctuary to be brought low (treated with disdain and
contempt).
History reveals that Antiochus IV ended the daily services in
Jerusalem’s temple for a three year period. However, the cessation
of the daily in 167 B.C. is not a fulfillment of Daniel 8, nor does this
make Antiochus IV the horn power of Daniel 8. Antiochus IV was
not the only king that terminated the daily services at the temple in
Jerusalem. For example, Nebuchadnezzar destroyed the temple in
586 B.C. and ended the daily services for more than seventy years.
The Roman general, Titus, destroyed the temple in A.D. 70, and the
daily services of the temple have not resumed to this day because
there is no temple in Jerusalem. However, the primary question
begging for an answer is whether Antiochus IV was powerful enough
to take the daily away from the Prince of the host, Jesus! Review
verse 11 again: “It [the horn power] set itself up to be as great as
the Prince of the host [the Lord Jesus]; it took away the daily
sacrifice from him, and the place of his sanctuary was
brought low.”
The History of Antiochus IV
A brief history of Antiochus Epiphanes IV may be helpful because
millions of people believe Antiochus IV is a fulfillment of the horn
power in Daniel 8. Let us closely examine the logic that produces
this conclusion.
1. The Bible says the goat in Daniel 8 represents Grecia.
2. The Bible says the great horn represents the first king of
Grecia, Alexander the Great.
3. The Bible says the four horns represent the four generals
that gained control of Alexander’s empire.
4. One of the four generals was Seleucus. He was the first in
a long line of succeeding kings.
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 113

5. Just before the Grecian empire fell to Rome, Antiochus IV

came to power as the king of Syria (175-164 B.C.). After
his father, Antiochus the Great, died, the Romans, who
controlled the Middle East at this time, allowed
Antiochus IV to become the eighth king in a line of kings
whose lineage dates back to Seleucus. Antiochus IV
exalted himself by adding “Epiphany” to his name. An
epiphany is “a great manifestation of God.” The Romans
mocked the pompous little king by calling him Antiochus
Epimanes IV. Epimanes sounds similar to Epiphany, but
it means “mad man.”
6. About 168 B.C., Antiochus sent his army to Egypt to steal
some wealth. He desperately needed to replenish his
empty treasury. Antiochus had squandered the assets of
his kingdom on foolish endeavors and Syria was near the
point of bankruptcy. He defeated the cowardly Ptolemee,
king of Egypt, but Rome sent an envoy to inform
Antiochus IV that he could not rule over Egypt.
Antiochus knew that any sign of rebellion against Rome
was fatal. Thwarted and humiliated, but happy with the
loot he had stolen, he returned home.
7. Meanwhile, in Jerusalem, the high priest, Jason, had
initiated a rebellion against the rigid control of
conservative Jews. He wanted to adopt some of the more
liberal Hellenistic ways of the Greeks and build a Greek
gymnasium where nude body-building and sensual
exercises could be conducted. While this conflict was
unfolding, Menelaus, a wealthy Jew, offered Antiochus IV
a large bribe if he would send soldiers to overthrow
Jerusalem’s leadership and appoint Menelaus as high
priest. This bribe gave Antiochus a “golden” opportunity
to quell Jason’s rebellion and plunder the Jewish temple
of its gold and silver. Gold and silver from the Jewish
temple would help replenish his ever-empty treasury.
8. Antiochus loved the decadent and sensual ways of the
Greeks. When the king arrived in Jerusalem, he showed
contempt for the conservative Jews by erecting a statue of
the Greek god, Zeus, on the Altar of Burnt Offering on
114 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

Chislev 15, 167 B.C. Ten days later, on Chislev 25,

Antiochus ended daily services (including the daily
sacrifices) at the temple when he offered a pig (or some
unclean animal) on the Altar of Burnt Offering. This
abominable act led to a series of wars between Antiochus’
forces and conservative Jews. This series of wars became
known as the Maccabean revolt because a conservative
priest, Judas Maccabeus, led the Jews against the forces
of Antiochus IV.
9. A year or so later, Antiochus ran out of money again.
This time he decided to raid portions of Persia to finance
his excessive spending habits. So he turned the
management of his kingdom over to his friend, Lysais,
instructing him to destroy the Jews and Jerusalem as
quickly as possible. However, Judas Maccabeus and the
Jews eventually defeated Lysais and his generals. The
victory over Lysais did not end the wars between the
Jews and their enemies. Three years after offering a pig
on the altar, to the very day, on Chislev 25, 164 B.C., a
new altar was installed and dedicated in the temple at
Jerusalem and daily services resumed. The Jews have
celebrated the restoration of temple services on this day
ever since. (See John 10:22,23.) It is called Hannukkah,
which means “the dedication.”
10. Meanwhile, in Persia, Antiochus IV experienced a
number of sound defeats, and when he learned that the
Jews had defeated Lysais and robbed him of his
armament, Antiochus IV became heartsick. After a
period of suffering from illness (perhaps from too much
drinking), Antiochus uttered these words, “I perish
through great grief in a strange land.” (1 Maccabees 6:13)
After giving his close friend, Philip, his crown, robe, and
signet, he gave instructions that he was to raise his son,
Antiochus V, to take his throne. Then, Antiochus IV died.
What Is Wrong with the Antiochus Interpretation?
Because there are valid rules of interpretation, no prophecy stands
alone. Daniel 8 is not isolated from the historical matrix that
unfolds in the book of Daniel. Because there are so many variables
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 115

in the study of prophecy, we have to follow a set of valid rules if we

want to know the intended meaning of prophecy. If we do not follow
a valid set of rules, the outcome will be a private interpretation.
Even though a private interpretation may be exciting and very
reasonable, and even though millions of people may accept it as
truth, a private interpretation never produces God’s intended
meaning in apocalyptic prophecy. (2 Peter 1:20)
Because God sealed the book of Daniel until the time of the end, the
intended meaning of Daniel’s visions could not be known until the
time of the end arrives. (Daniel 12:4,9) When it comes to apocalyptic
prophecy, there is one fulfillment of prophecy. There is one meaning
and there is one time-line. Apocalyptic events do not occur more
than once. Rule One prohibits multiple fulfillments because there is
a beginning point in time and an ending point in time for each
prophecy and the events within the prophecy occur in the order in
which are they given. God’s foreknowledge is perfect. A fulfillment
is the full-filling of all that God has said would come to pass. If all
of the specifications of a prophecy are not met in an interpretation,
the student has two options: (a) ignore the specifications and accept
an interpretation that merely sounds good, or (b) reject the
interpretation because it does not satisfy all of the specifications.
Given these two choices, let us compare some of the supporting
arguments for Antiochus IV with Scripture:
1. Gabriel said, “It [the horn power] set itself up to be as
great as the Prince of the host [Jesus Christ]; it took
away the daily sacrifice from him [Jesus Christ], and
the place of his sanctuary was brought low.” (Daniel
8:11, insertions mine) History indicates that whatever
Antiochus lacked in intelligence, he compensated with
insolence and arrogance. No doubt, his ego was so
delirious that he believed he was greater than the Prince
of the host, Jesus Christ. Remember, Antiochus IV
claimed to be an epiphany, but history reveals he was
anything but an epiphany. Antiochus IV caused the daily
services at the temple in Jerusalem to stop for a period of
three years when he desecrated the Altar of Burnt
Offering, but Antiochus was neither the first nor the last
to defile the temple. Nebuchadnezzar (586 B.C.) and
Titus (A.D. 70) did the same thing. Consider the
116 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

specifications in the text. Verse 11 requires Antiochus IV

to take the daily services away from Jesus Christ, the
Prince of the host. Did Antiochus take the daily away
from the Jews or from the Prince of the host? The answer
to this question is obvious. Antiochus took the daily away
from “the Jews.” The daily ceased in Jerusalem for three
years, but Antiochus did not take away the daily
intercession of our High Priest in Heaven’s temple.
(Hebrews 7:25-27) The termination of the daily in Heaven
does not occur until the appointed time of the end arrives!
(Daniel 12:11,12; Revelation 8:2-5)
2. Gabriel said, “The four horns that replaced the one
that was broken off represent four kingdoms that
will emerge from his nation but will not have the
same power. In the latter part of their reign, when
rebels have become completely wicked, a stern-
faced king, a master of intrigue, will arise.” (Daniel
8:22,23) Many advocates of the Antiochus theory say
these two verses describe Antiochus IV because he rose to
power during the fading years of the Grecian empire. The
Bible says, “In the latter part of their reign, when
rebels have become completely wicked. . .” People
defending Antiochus IV claim “the latter part of their
reign” applies to the final days of the four divisions of the
Grecian empire because Antiochus IV came to power with
Rome’s permission in 175 B.C. and Grecia fell about seven
years later in 168 B.C. Does the phrase “the latter part of
their reign” point to the final days of the Grecian empire
or does it point to the reign of those kings who will be
ruling at “the appointed time of the end?” Does the stern-
faced king arise while Grecia is falling or at the end of the
world? These are pivotal questions that need answers.
In an effort to give Antiochus every advantage to fulfill
this prophecy, let us apply the phrase, “In the latter part
of their reign...” to the last days of Grecia, so that
Antiochus might be able to satisfy this specification. If
we do this, the next phrase, “. . . when rebels have
become completely wicked,” would have to apply to
the rebels in Jerusalem who, like Jason and the renegade
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 117

Jews, wanted to adopt the sensual ways of Antiochus IV

and the Greeks.
The next specification reveals: “. . . a stern-faced king, a
master of intrigue will arise.” Historians say that
Antiochus IV was a hoodlum, basically a leader of
bandits, not a stern faced king and a master of intrigue.
History says he was a self-indulgent and tempermental
nit wit. If he had not inherited the kingdom from his
father, historians are confident that he would not have
been able to build one. Because Antiochus IV was inept
as a king (remember, even the Romans called him a
madman), advocates of Antiochus IV claim he was
perhaps more stern-faced (as in pouting) than a master of
evil manipulation. They claim that Antiochus IV has to be
the fulfillment of the horn power of Daniel 8 because he
rose to power at the end of the Grecian period and he
caused the daily sacrifices in Jerusalem to cease for three
years. This claim may sound convincing for people who
have not examined Daniel 8, but obviously Antiochus
could neither take the daily away from the Prince of the
host (Jesus) nor did Antiochus live at the appointed time
of the end.
3. Gabriel said, “He [the horn power] will become very
strong, but not by his own power. He [will be
empowered by God as a destroyer and he] will cause
astounding devastation and will succeed in
whatever he does. He will destroy the mighty men
[who stand in opposition] and the holy people [the
saints of God]. [Because he is an evil despot and totally
lawless] He will cause deceit to prosper, and he will
consider himself superior [above every god]. When
they [the wicked] feel secure [with him], he will
destroy many [of his own people] and take his stand
against the Prince of princes [Jesus Christ]. Yet he
[this invincible and awesome being] will be destroyed,
but not by human power.” (Daniel 8:24,25, insertions
mine) Paul explains how Lucifer will be destroyed, “And
then the lawless one will be revealed, whom the
Lord Jesus will overthrow with the breath of his
118 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

mouth and destroy by the splendor of his coming.”

(2 Thessalonians 2:8) These verses bring the Antiochus
interpretation to an abrupt halt. Antiochus never became
a strong king. He did not cause astounding devastation
during his nine years on the throne. In fact, Antiochus
had very few successes. We have to put Antiochus within
the confines of historical perspective. At best, he ruled
over a tiny “state” kingdom with Rome’s permission. Did
Antiochus cause deceit to prosper throughout the world
more than any other pagan king? Did Antiochus take his
stand against the Prince of princes (the Lord Jesus)
during the appointed time of the end? If so, when did this
battle occur? Who won the battle? Did the Lord Jesus
destroy Antiochus with the brightness of His coming or
did he die in Persia from too much liquor? The Antiochus
interpretation does not come close to meeting all of the
specifications given in Daniel 8. If any doubt remains
about Antiochus IV fulfilling the specifications given in
Daniel 8, the next specification should remove it.
4. “Then I heard a holy one speaking, and another
holy one said to him, ‘How long will it take for the
vision to be fulfilled – the vision concerning the
daily sacrifice, the rebellion that causes desolation,
and the surrender of the sanctuary and of the host
that will be trampled underfoot?’ He said to me, ‘It
will take 2,300 evenings and mornings; then the
sanctuary will be reconsecrated.’ ” (Daniel 8:13,14)
The 2,300 evenings and mornings of Daniel 8 have proven
to be an insurmountable mystery for thousands of years,
and rightly so. Without valid rules of interpretation and
an understanding of the doctrine of God’s use of parallel
temples, the purpose, the meaning and the timing of the
2,300 days cannot be accurately determined! Because
many Christian scholars believe the horn power of Daniel
8 is Antiochus IV, consider how they explain the 2,300
evenings and mornings.
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 119

Scofield’s Explanation of the 2,300 Days

Cyrus I. Scofield (1843-1921), was a writer whose theological and
prophetic views dramatically influenced Protestants during the
twentieth century. Dr. Scofield was not the first to suggest that
Antiochus IV was the horn power of Daniel 8, but he was arguably
the best. To prove that Antiochus IV was the horn power, Dr.
Scofield claimed the 2,300 days in Daniel 8:14 began with the
desecration of the temple in Jerusalem (Kislev 15, 167 B.C.;
1 Maccabees 1:57) and terminated with the death of General
Nicanor on March 27, 160 B.C. According to 1 Maccabees 3, Nicanor
was one of the generals that Lysais appointed to destroy the Jews
while Antiochus was looking for someone to plunder in Persia.
According to 1 Maccabees 4:52-54, the temple was cleansed and
services resumed three years and ten days after its desecration. (See
also 2 Maccabees 10:1-8.) In other words, the number of days
between the defilement of the temple by Antiochus IV and the
reconsecration of the temple by Judas Maccabeus was 1,096 days,
less than half of the needed 2,300 days. Because Daniel 8:14
specifies 2,300 days, Scofield realized there was a problem, so he
began searching for some event that occurred 2,300 days after
Antiochus desecrated the temple in Jerusalem. The death of a
nondescript general was the only thing that Scofield could find that
even came close to 2,300 days. Rather than abandon the Antiochus
IV interpretation for a better interpretation of the horn power,
Scofield declared the 2,300 days were fulfilled by two events that do
not have 2,300 days between them. No doubt Dr. Scofield was a
sincere man, but if a person does not use valid rules of
interpretation, eventually he will end up in a corner where he has
no choice but to twist or distort the Word of God to make the pieces
fit. God said there would be 2,300 evenings and mornings – not
more, not less – before the sanctuary would be cleansed.
During the last half of the twentieth century, defenders of Scofield’s
position have been forced to acknowledge that temple services
resumed long before the 2,300 days expired. So, they argue with
weasel words that temple services were only free of “destructive
threat” after General Nicanor died. The problem with this claim is
that God says nothing about the temple being free of threat or about
the Jews enjoying freedom from destruction in Daniel 8:14. The
King James Version of Daniel 8:14 simply states, “Unto two
120 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

thousand three hundred days, then shall the sanctuary be

cleansed.” (or reconsecrated, NIV) The following chart shows how
Scofield defined the 2,300 days. The dates are taken from
1 Maccabees 1:57; 4:52 and 7:43.
Scofield’s Understanding of the 2,300 Days

167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159

B.C. B.C. B.C. B.C. B.C. B.C. B.C. B.C. B.C.

x y z

Chart 4.3
x = December 6, 167 B.C. Antiochus IV desecrated temple.
y = December 16, 164 B.C. Temple cleansed and services resume.
z = March 27, 160 B.C. General Nicanor killed.

The 2,300 days are calculated as follows:

360 + 360 + 360 + 360 + 360 + 360 + 110 = 2,270
add 30 days per seven years for calendar adjustment 30
Total time 2,300 days

Here are five major problems with Scofield’s interpretation:

Problem 1: 1 Maccabees 4:52 says the temple in Jerusalem was
cleansed and services restored years before General Nicanor was
killed. So, Nicanor’s death has nothing to do with the cleansing of
the temple!
Problem 2: The calendar presented in Chart 4.3 is based on the
supposition that the Jews observed a 360-day year. Advocates of
this dating scheme calculate the time between December 6, 167, and
March 27, 160 B.C., to be 2,270 days. Then they add one month of 30
days for calendar adjustment because a solar year is 365.242 days in
length. The total time, according to this formula, adds up to 2,300 days.
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 121

This view of the 2,300 days has no merit. First, there is no historical
evidence showing the Jews ever observed a 360-day year. The
Jewish year is either 354 or 384 days in length depending on the
cycles of the moon – never 360 days. Even if the Jews did observe a
360-day year, the adjustment of 30 days every seven years does not
resolve the problem of solar alignment which is critical for planting
crops. In seven years, a proper alignment with the arrival of Spring
requires an adjustment of 36.7 days, not 30 days if one is using a
360 day calendar. If the Jews used a 360-day calendar with a 30-day
correction every seven years, their calendar would be 27 days out of
alignment with the sun in 28 years. No agricultural nation could
survive this kind of error in their calendar.
Problem 3: Dr. Scofield knew the time-frame between the
desecration of the temple and the death of General Nicanor was not
precisely 2,300 days, so he declared God’s prophetic time-periods to
be “indeterminate” (not very precise). Scofield, commenting on the
seventy weeks of Daniel 9:24, wrote these words: “In this connection
it should be remembered that, in the grand sweep of prophecy,
prophetic time is invariably so near as to give full warning, so
indeterminate as to give no satisfaction to mere curiosity.” (See the
Scofield Reference Bible, commentary on Daniel 9:24.) Does Scofield
mean that once we find something “close enough” to fit within a
prophetic time-period, we can declare a prophetic mystery solved?
How can an omniscient God not know the actual number of days
between two events? In Daniel 12, God mentions two specific time
periods having 1,290 days and 1,335 days. Revelation 20 speaks of
1,000 years. Revelation 13:5 speaks of 42 months and Revelation
11:9 speaks of 3.5 days. Does God regard these time-periods as
indeterminate? Of course not! Scofield “imposed” a bad
interpretation onto Daniel 8:14 and then justified a poor fit for the
2,300 days by declaring God’s Word to be “indeterminate.” If God
can number the hairs of our heads, if God can number the stars of
the sky, if God created the precise pulses of atomic energy in
billionths of a second, surely He can accurately count the span of
days between two events.
Problem 4: An issue affecting the 2,300 days in Daniel 8:14 exists
which Scofield did not resolve. We know that the “time, times and
half a time” in Daniel 7:25 represents 1,260 years. The Bible
confirms this point. (See Revelation 12:6,14.) Bible history confirms
122 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

that God sometimes translates a day for a year so that 1,260 days
would represent 1,260 years. This is not unusual. Most scholars
agree that the “seventy weeks” in Daniel 9:24 have to be translated
as 490 years because of the day/year principle found in the Jubilee
Calendar. Because the 2,300 days in Daniel 8 and the seventy
weeks in Daniel 9 begin at the same time (this point will be
demonstrated in our study on Daniel 9), they share the same
translation. In other words, the 2,300 days represent 2,300 years
because the seventy weeks represent 490 years. In fact, the seventy
weeks of Daniel 9 are “cut off” from the 2,300 days in Daniel 8! The
matrix is at work and the timing in Daniel and Revelation fits
together like hand and glove. God measures the time-periods in
Daniel 7, Daniel 8 and Daniel 9 according to the day/year operation
of the Jubilee Calendar. (Leviticus 25) This is why Rule Four states:
“God measures apocalyptic time according to the presence or absence
of the Jubilee Calendar.” Scofield should have translated the 2,300
days as 2,300 years.
Problem 5: Scofield claims the bitter persecution of the Jews under
Antiochus IV ended with the death of General Nicanor. History says
just the opposite. In fact, life for the Jews only became worse after
Nicanor was killed. For example, King Demetrius killed Judas
Maccabeus (1 Maccabees 9:18) about 2 months after Nicanor died.
Then, about a year after the death of Nicanor in May, 159 B.C.,
“Alcimus ordered the wall of the inner court of the sanctuary to be
torn down, thus destroying the work of the prophets.” (1 Maccabees
9:54) The book of 1 Maccabees records that many wars were inflicted
on Israel after Nicanor’s death. Thus, the persecution of the Jews
did not cease with the death of General Nicanor. History discredits
Scofield’s explanation of the 2,300 days.
Given the evidence presented thus far, advocates of Antiochus face
insurmountable issues: The temple in Jerusalem was not free from
threat after the death of Nicanor. The length of time between the
Antiochus’ desecration of the temple and Nicanor’s death was not
2,300 days. Jewish persecution did not end after Nicanor died. The
2,300 days of Daniel 8:14 cannot begin with the conduct of Antiochus
IV and end with the death of General Nicanor. Nicanor’s death does
not have anything to do with the cleansing of the temple in
Jerusalem. When the “interpretation” of Antiochus is closely
examined, claims of fulfillment do not even come close to meeting all
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 123

of the specifications given in Daniel 8. Given the specifications in

Daniel 8, it is amazing that millions of Christians accept Scofield’s
position without question.

Section V - Heaven and Earth Linked Together with

2,300 Days

With God Timing Is Everything

God created the orbit of the electrons spinning around the nucleus of
the cesium atom. This demonstrates that He is very capable of
measuring time. If the cesium atom can be used to create an atomic
clock that does not vary by more than one second in a hundred
million years, surely God can measure time! I make this point
because when it comes to timing and punctuality, no one in the
universe is more precise than God! The God who said there would
be 2,300 evenings and mornings before the sanctuary would be
cleansed is the same God who said seventy weeks would be granted
to Israel in Daniel 9. Surely the Lord God knows what He is talking
about! Look at His punctuality with Israel at the Exodus: “At the
end of the 430 years, to the very day, all the Lord’s divisions
left Egypt. Because the Lord kept vigil that night to bring
them out of Egypt, on this night all the Israelites are to keep
vigil to honor the Lord for the generations to come.” (Exodus
12:41,42, italics mine) Consider the timing of the birth of Jesus:
“But when the time had fully come, God sent his Son, born of
a woman, born under law, to redeem those under law, that
we might receive the full rights of sons.” (Galatians 4:4, italics
mine) God is never late. God is never wrong. With God, timing is
everything!
Look up! The Event Is Not on Earth
The 2,300 days is placed in Daniel 8 for a very good reason, if you
are aware of two prerequisites. First, you need to know about the
historical matrix which the four rules produce. Second, you have to
understand the essential doctrine that explains God’s use of parallel
temple services. (See Chapters 11 and 12 in Jesus, The Alpha and
The Omega.) When these two prerequisites are combined, we can
124 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

determine when Jesus began to cleanse Heaven’s temple and why it

must be cleansed. God connected the cleansing of Heaven’s temple
with the ram (the kingdom of the Medes and Persians). The
connection between the ram and the cleansing of Heaven’s temple is
precisely 2,300 years in length. The countdown of 2,300 years began
when the Persian, King Artaxerxes, issued a decree to restore and
rebuild Jerusalem in 457 B.C. (Ezra 7) Because God tied the decree
of Artaxerxes to a yardstick that was 2,300 years in length, we can
easily calculate the date when the cleansing of God’s temple began
in Heaven. Even though we cannot see the event taking place in
Heaven, we know it began in 1844. We will also see, when we
examine the seventy weeks of Daniel 9 and the seven seals in
Revelation, that the dates of 1798 and 1844 are highly important
dates in Heaven’s sequence of events.
1,150 Days?
Some people have tried to divide the 2,300 evenings and mornings
so that this time-period is 1,150 literal days (1,150 evenings + 1,150
mornings = 2,300 evenings and mornings), but, this timing scheme
does not work for several reasons. First, the Hebrew words ‘erab and
boqer go together to form one unit of time. They literally mean
“evening and morning,” as in one day. Notice how ‘erab and boger
are used on the first page of the Bible: “And God called the light
Day, and the darkness he called Night. And the evening
[‘erab] and the morning [boqer] were the first day.” (Genesis 1:5,
KJV) According to God’s method for measuring time, a “day” has an
evening and a morning. A day begins at sundown (evening) and the
midway point through the day is sunrise (morning). (Leviticus
23:32) Translators of the King James Version recognized this fact
and they translated the 2,300 evenings and mornings of Daniel 8:14
as 2,300 days. New International Version translators were more
literal with the text, translating it as “2,300 evenings and
mornings.”
Unfortunately, most Christians do not understand the doctrine of
God’s use of parallel temples. If a person does not understand the
cleansing of Earth’s temple, he cannot understand the cleansing of
Heaven’s temple. If a person does not understand God’s purpose in
cleansing Heaven’s temple, then the timing of this event is of no
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 125

value. If God’s use of parallel temples was better understood,

Christians could understand that the temple to be cleansed is not on
Earth, but in Heaven! Bible students tend to interpret Bible
prophecy as though Earth was the center of prophecy, but this is not
the case. Daniel was directed to view a great convocation in Heaven.
He saw a service when the Ancient of Days took His seat and
billions of angels were in attendance. This heavenly meeting is
profoundly important because it marks the beginning of services in
Heaven’s temple that lead up to the end of the world. The services
in Heaven’s temple are directly linked to the final events that occur
on Earth. Remember the Heaven-Earth-Linkage-Law?
Five clues in the Bible indicate the temple to be cleansed in Daniel
8:14 is in Heaven:
First, the doctrine of parallel temples teaches there were two
temples. The one on Earth was a shadow of the real temple in
Heaven where our Jesus serves as our High Priest. (Hebrews 8:1-5)
We know the earthly temple was destroyed by the Romans in A.D.
70. The only temple remaining is in Heaven.
Second, the cleansing of the earthly temple occurred at an
appointed time every year – on the Day of Atonement (Leviticus 16),
but the heavenly temple is cleansed only once – at the appointed
time of the end! (Hebrews 9:24-26)
Third, the 2,300 evenings and mornings must be translated as
2,300 years because God uses the Jubilee Calendar to translate a
day into a year. (This point and the Jubilee Calendar will be
discussed at length when we examine the seventy weeks of Daniel
9.) The 2,300 years began in the Spring of 457 B.C. and they ended
in the Spring of 1844.
Fourth, the cleansing of Heaven’s temple began in 1844. This date
aligns with 1798 which marks the year the great convocation in
Heaven’s temple began. (See Chart 4.4.) In fact, the timing of the
great convocation in Daniel 7 (1798) and the cleansing of the
sanctuary in Daniel 8 (1844), aligns with the seventy weeks in
Daniel 9 (457 B.C.), and these three events align with the opening of
the third seal in Revelation 6. The matrix is building!
126 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

The 2,300 Days of Daniel 8:14

|<--457 B.C. ----------------2300 Day/Years-----------------1844 -->| The Time of the End
Goat
Horn
Ram with with
Power
Two Horns One Temple
Daniel 8 Artaxerxes Great Judgmen- from the
Cleansing
t of the North
Issues Horn -- Begins in
Living Stern
Decree in then Heaven
Faced
457 B.C. Four
King
Horns

1,260 Day/Years
A.D. 538 to 1798Books Little
Medo Grecia Rome 10
Opened Horn
Persia Leopard Monster Horns
Guilt Recovers
Bear with with at First
Three Ribs Four
Little Court Assigned and is
Beasts are
Daniel 7 Horn Seated to Guilt Heard
Heads Destroyed
Rises, in Bearer Boasting
in the Fire
Uproots Heaven at the End
3 Horns Little
Horn
Falls on
Earth

Chart 4.4
Fifth, the remarks that follow do not begin to cover the scope and
breadth of the subject of parallel temples (Hebrews 8:1-5), but a few
words may be necessary about the annual service of cleansing the
earthly temple, so you can understand the marvelous parallel that
exists between the earthly temple and the heavenly temple. Again,
the doctrine of parallel temples is a prerequisite doctrine for
understanding Daniel 8.
The angel said, “. . .Unto two thousand three hundred days,
then shall the sanctuary be cleansed.” (Daniel 8:14, KJV) Why
does the sanctuary in Heaven need cleansing? The answer to this
question is found in the cleansing of the earthly temple. The
cleansing of the earthly temple was an annual event that occurred
on the tenth day of the seventh month. This day was called the Day
of Atonement. Jews today call it Yom Kippur, which means Day of
Judgment. The cleansing of the earthly temple was necessary
because it was defiled by sinners bringing sin offerings to the
temple. The sinner, standing at the Altar of Burnt Offering,
confessed his sins over the head of his sacrifice. Then, he cut the
jugular vein of the sacrificial animal with his own hands. The priest
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 127

then captured some of the lamb’s blood and sprinkled this blood on
the horns of the altar. This procedure shadows a divine truth. The
sinner’s guilt was transferred away from himself and his family to
the Altar of Burnt Offering by the blood of the Lamb.
This earthly process was a shadow or pantomime of a reality that
was coming. The guilt of sinners could be transferred to Heaven’s
temple through the death of Jesus (the Lamb of God). When the
blood was applied to the horns of the altar, the altar became defiled
because the guilt of the sinner had been transferred to it. The
process of setting sinners free of the guilt of sin defiles the temple
because the sinner’s guilt is transferred to the altar. Because the
altars of the temple were depositories of guilt, the earthly temple
was defiled until the Day for Cleansing (the Day of Atonement)
arrived. For a single day, the earthly temple was restored to an
undefiled state. (Leviticus 16) Then, on the following day, sacrifices
resumed and the temple was defiled because the annual cycle
started over.
How Jesus Cleanses the Temple in Heaven
Unlike the earthly temple, which was cleansed annually, Heaven’s
temple is cleansed once, at the end of the age. (Hebrews 9:24-26)
This cleansing began in 1844, which is 2,300 years after the decree
to restore and rebuild Jerusalem given by Artaxerxes in 457 B.C.
(457 B.C. also marks the beginning of the seventy weeks in Daniel
9.) The Day of Atonement service in the earthly temple was a
shadow of the plan of salvation. Notice what the shadow reveals:
Two animals, a bull and a goat, were sacrificed in this service.
(Leviticus 16) The service began right after day break with the
slaying of a bull that belonged to the high priest. This bull (a very
expensive sacrifice) represents the sacrifice which the Father made
in order to redeem mankind. “For God so loved the world that
He gave His only begotten Son . . .” (John 3:16, KJV) The Father
gave up the most valuable asset He could provide so fallen man
could have the offer of salvation. After the bull was slain, the high
priest carried some of the bull’s blood behind the veil into the Most
Holy Place where he met with God. The high priest had to be found
worthy to cleanse the temple before he could conduct the service.
The slaying of the bull and the worthiness of the high priest
128 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

shadows the sacrifice which the Father made and the qualifying
process which Jesus our High Priest underwent before He could
conclude the sin problem. (See Revelation 4 and 5.)
The next event on the Day of Atonement was the casting of lots to
determine which goat should die. After the lots were cast, the Lord’s
goat was slain. The Lord’s goat represents the death which Jesus
was willing to experience in order to save man. A goat was used for
this sacrifice because a goat has a free spirit. Jesus freely gave up
His life for sinners. After the Lord’s goat was slain, its blood was
mixed with the bull’s blood. Then, the high priest went behind the
veil a second time to begin the cleansing of the temple. The first
item to be cleansed was the Ark of the Covenant. The second item
was the Altar of Incense and the last item to be cleansed was the
Altar of Burnt Offering. These items were cleansed in this order and
they became free of sin (cleansed, reconsecrated, restored) when the
mixed blood of the bull and goat was sprinkled on them.
The last event in this service was the laying of hands on the head of
the scapegoat. The scapegoat represents Lucifer, the author of sin,
who freely exercised his power of choice to commit sin. After the
temple furniture had been made holy with the sprinkling of blood,
the high priest placed his hands on the head of the scapegoat.
Through the placement of hands on the scapegoat, the sins of the
people (which had been stored on the temple’s altars) were
transferred onto the head of the scapegoat. Then, the scapegoat was
led out into the wilderness to slowly starve to death.
This may come as a shock, but in God’s economy, sin is never
forgiven because someone other than God is responsible for sin. The
beauty of salvation is that sinners can escape the penalty of sin
through faith. If a sinner makes restitution for his sin and confesses
his sin to God, he transfers his guilt to Heaven’s temple. At the end
of the 1,000 years in Revelation 20, Lucifer, the scapegoat, will
receive all of the guilt transferred into Heaven’s temple because he
is responsible for the presence of sin. On the other hand, if a sinner
does not transfer his sin to the temple, his sins remain upon his own
head and in God’s economy, the wages of sin is eternal death.
(Romans 6:23) At the end of the 1,000 years, God will execute
justice on the scapegoat and the wicked and they will suffer in
proportion to their guilt until they are annihilated. This is the
meaning of divine justice.
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 129

The Temple to be Cleansed Is in Heaven

The cleansing of the earthly temple shadows a process that began in
Heaven in 1844. It is interesting to notice that 1844 is exactly forty-
six years after 1798. When Jesus began His ministry on Earth, His
first action after returning from fasting in the desert was the
cleansing of a temple that took forty-six years to restore! (John 2:13-21)
The parallel is that Jesus began cleansing the heavenly temple
forty-six years after the twenty-five thrones had been arranged and
the convocation in Heaven began!
Before the cleansing of Heaven’s temple could begin, someone had to
be found worthy to conduct the process. Jesus was found worthy to
cleanse Heaven’s temple. After Jesus was found worthy, both Daniel
(Daniel 7:13,14) and John (Revelation 4 and 5) saw Jesus highly
exalted. Daniel 7 and Revelation 4 and 5 describe the same scene
from slightly different angles. After Jesus was found worthy to
cleanse Heaven’s temple, He began passing judgment on the records
of the dead. Since the Spring of 1844, Jesus has been going through
the books of record – one sinner at a time. Standing before the hosts
of Heaven, Jesus has been deciding who will be a part of His eternal
kingdom and who will not. When Jesus determines a person will be
saved, Jesus removes the record of sin from Heaven’s book and He
transfers the guilt of the sinner to the head of Lucifer. When Jesus
determines a person cannot be saved, Jesus places the guilt of that
sinner on the sinner’s head. The point is that the temple in Heaven
is cleansed as the guilt of sin is removed and placed on the
appropriate party. (Leviticus 20; Ezekiel 11:21; 22:31; 18:1-24)
When the time comes for the destruction of sinners at the end of the
1,000 years, every wicked person will suffer the appropriate penalty
for his sins. God will see that every condemned sinner gets their
due reward: “For we know him who said, ‘It is mine to avenge;
I will repay,’ and again, ‘The Lord will judge his people.’ It is
a dreadful thing to fall into the hands of the living God.”
(Hebrews 10:30,31)
Jesus will complete the task of judging mankind during the Great
Tribulation. People living during the Great Tribulation will not be
judged in the same way as those who have died. The faith of people
living at that time will be tested with persecution. In this way, they
will choose and determine their eternal destiny. At the sounding of
130 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

the seventh trumpet (Revelation 11:15-19) the cleansing of Heaven’s

temple will be finished and the temple will at last, be free of sin.
(Revelation 15:1-8) The book of Revelation reveals much more about
this process, but this synopsis is intended to give you a general
overview of the judgment process. Consider these comments by
Bible writers:
“Now all has been heard; here is the conclusion of the
matter: Fear God and keep his commandments, for this is the
whole duty of man. For God will bring every deed into
judgment, including every hidden thing, whether it is good
or evil.” (Ecclesiastes 12:13,14, italics mine)
“Moreover, the Father judges no one, but has entrusted all
judgment to the Son, that all may honor the Son just as they
honor the Father. He who does not honor the Son does not
honor the Father, who sent him.” (John 5:22,23, italics mine)
“For we must all appear before the judgment seat of Christ,
that each one may receive what is due him for the things
done while in the body, whether good or bad.” (2 Corinthains
5:10)
“For he [the Father] has set a day when he will judge the
world with justice by the man he has appointed. He has
given proof of this to all men by raising him from the dead.”
(Acts 17:31, insertion and italics mine)
“As Paul discoursed on righteousness, self-control and the
judgment to come, Felix was afraid and said, ‘That’s enough
for now! You may leave. When I find it convenient, I will send
for you.’” (Acts 24:25, italics mine)
“Behold, I am coming soon! My reward is with me, and I will
give to everyone according to what he has done.” (Revelation
22:12)
Remember that the 2,300 days in Daniel 8:14 have been a great
mystery for most Bible students. The reason for the mystery is
quite simple. The event to which this prophecy points is not on
Earth, but in Heaven. God uses the Heaven-Earth-Linkage-Law
again to inform us of the timing of something we cannot see. God
put the kingdoms of Medo-Persia and Grecia in Daniel 8 because the
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 131

2,300 days began during the time of Medo-Persia. Then, God linked
the decree of a Persian king (Artaxerxes, Ezra 7) with the cleansing
of Heaven’s temple in 1844 by inserting a 2,300 year time-period in
the prophecy of Daniel 8. (Review Chart 4.4 and notice how Daniel 7
and Daniel 8 align.)
A starting date for the 2,300 years is not mentioned in Daniel 8
because the starting date is given in Daniel 9. To make matters
more mysterious, the cleansing of the temple is in Heaven and not
on Earth! No wonder this time-period has been a great mystery for
nearly twenty-six centuries! Fortunately, God has revealed the
architecture of Daniel and we can determine when the 2,300
evenings and mornings began. We will find in our study on Daniel 9
that the seventy weeks and 2,300 days start together and we will
find that Daniel 7, Daniel 8, Daniel 9 and Revelation 4 and 5
perfectly align. I hope you will be patient enough to allow the
prophetic matrix to build. My frustration, as the author of this book,
is in trying to explain why each piece of prophecy belongs in a
certain place (according to the rules) before all the pieces that
belong to the story have been identified! Therefore, all I can ask at
the present is that you allow the matrix to place each new piece in
its place.

Section VI - The Horn Power in Daniel 8 Cannot be the

Papacy

The Time of Wrath

The Reformation Christians believed the horn power of Daniel 8
represented the papacy and some Christians today believe the same
thing. Let us briefly examine this view. Gabriel told Daniel, “. . . I
am going to tell you what will happen later in the time of
wrath, because the vision concerns the appointed time of the
end.” (Daniel 8:19) Since the ram and goat represent ancient
empires, this leaves the horn power as the only element in this
vision that can appear at “the appointed time of the end.” This
vision includes a prophetic span of 2,300 evenings and mornings, so
the appointed time of the end has to occur after 1844! In other
132 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

words, the horn power described in Daniel 8 does not appear prior to
1844. This simple fact eliminates the Roman Catholic Church as a
possible candidate for the horn power of Daniel 8 because the
Roman Catholic Church achieved absolute power in A.D. 538. The
little horn of Daniel 7 and the horn power of Daniel 8 cannot be the
same entity for the following reasons:
1. The little horn of Daniel 7 rises out of the Roman empire.
The horn power of Daniel 8 does not derive its strength
from Rome or any nation. The horn power in Daniel 8 is a
power unto itself. It appears out of one of the four winds,
specifically, the north.
2. The little horn of Daniel 7 arises in A.D. 538 after the ten
horns have broken the Roman empire. The horn power of
Daniel 8 has to appear after 1844 because it appears
during the appointed time of the end.
3. The little horn of Daniel 7 represents a diverse or
different type of kingdom (Daniel 7:8) that wars against
the saints for a very long time (1,260 years). The little
horn in Daniel 7 was unlike the remaining seven horns in
that it had eyes and a mouth. The horn power of Daniel 8
represents a man, a stern-faced king who will take “the
daily” away from Jesus during the appointed time of the
end. As we will see, taking the daily away from Jesus is
something that no ordinary mortal can do, not even a
pope!
4. Daniel 7 predicts the papacy will recover from its wound
and speak boastfully against the Most High. Revelation
13:1-5 confirms the deadly wound will be healed at the
time of the end, but Daniel 8 reveals that the Antichrist
will destroy the authority of the papacy by casting all
religions to the ground and trampling on them. The
Antichrist “will exalt himself over everything that is
called God” by means of the miracles he has power to do.
(2 Thessalonians 2:4; Revelation 13:14) The Antichrist
will abolish all religious systems, including the papacy, to
establish his global religion. The stern-faced king in
Daniel 8 will lead the world to war against the King of
kings, and the prince of darkness will take his stand
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 133

against the Prince of Heaven’s hosts (Jesus, King of kings)

at the Second Coming.
5. The horn power in Daniel 8 cannot be destroyed by
human power. This feature stands in contrast to the fact
that the little horn in Daniel 7 is subject to mortality. The
papacy was almost destroyed by the sword (war) in 1798.
6. Daniel 11:36-12:3 contributes several important points to
the apocalyptic matrix. Even though we have not studied
Daniel 10-12, this prophecy amplifies the works and
activities of the horn power in Daniel 8. The king of the
north in Daniel 11:36 and the stern-faced king that comes
out of the north in Daniel 8 are the same entity. The
papacy cannot meet all of the specifications that go with
the horn power of Daniel 8. A study of Revelation 9 and
Revelation 13:11-18, will show the Antichrist, the
physical appearing of Lucifer with millions of his angels,
to be the only solution that satisfies all of the
specifications for this power in the books of Daniel and
Revelation.

Section VII - The Termination of the Daily

The Antichrist Will Take the Daily Away from Jesus

The wording of Daniel 8:13 is difficult to understand at first: “Then
I heard a holy one [angel] speaking, and another holy one
[angel] said to him, ‘How long will it take for the vision to be
fulfilled – the vision concerning the [cessation of the] daily
sacrifice, the [vision concerning a great] rebellion that causes
desolation, and the surrender of the sanctuary and of the
host [of saints] that will be trampled underfoot?’ ” (Insertions
mine) To help you understand this question better, here is a
paraphrase of Daniel 8:13: “Daniel heard one angel speak to
another angel. The first angel said, ‘How long will it take for this
vision of the ram, the goat, and the horn power to be fulfilled?”
When the question is phrased this way, the answer that follows
makes sense. Daniel writes, “And I heard a man’s voice from
134 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

the Ulai [canal] calling, ‘Gabriel, tell this man the meaning of
the vision.’ As he came near the place where I was standing, I
was terrified and fell prostrate. ‘Son of man,’ he said to me,
‘understand that the vision concerns the time of the end.’ ”
(Daniel 8:16,17, insertion and italics mine) It is clear that the
question in verse 13 is finally answered in verses 16 and 17. You
may wonder why the actual question in verse 13 is worded in such a
complex way. God is both deliberate and purposeful in everything
He does. With one question and one answer God informs us that the
appointed time of the end involves four great issues:
1. The termination of the daily
2. A rebellion that causes desolation
3. The surrender of Heaven’s sanctuary
4. God’s people will be trampled underfoot
We have examined Daniel 8:11 within the context of Antiochus IV.
Let us examine it again, this time within the context of the
Antichrist and the appointed time of the end. This approach will
yield a much better fulfillment of Scripture. Gabriel said, “It [the
horn power will] set itself up to be as great as the Prince of the
host [Jesus]; it took away the daily sacrifice from him [Jesus],
and the place of his [Jesus’] sanctuary was brought low.”
(Daniel 8:11, insertions mine) The word “daily” is a term that
describes the daily cycle of services that occurred in the earthly
temple. Every day, evening and morning, a lamb was slain on the
Altar of Burnt Offering and its blood was sprinkled on the Altar of
Incense. Every day, sinners presented their sacrifices at the Altar of
Burnt Offering. These rituals, and many other services became
known as the “daily” or the “continual.” They shadowed the
intercession that Jesus began making on behalf of humanity the day
sin occurred as well as His death on Calvary. The immediate
intercession of Jesus spared Adam and Eve from sudden death the
day they sinned. (Genesis 2:17) The Father allowed Adam and Eve
(and their offspring) to live because of Christ’s intercession on their
behalf. (Genesis 2:17; Hebrews 7:25) Gabriel indicates the coming
Antichrist will take away Jesus’ daily intercession in Heaven’s
temple. Christ’s intercession for man is terminated in one of four
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 135

ways. Notice how two ways concern the individual and two ways
concern corporate bodies of people:
1. When a person dies, life terminates. The dead
know nothing. There is no need for further
intercession. (Ecclesiastes 9:5,6)
2. If a person commits the unpardonable sin,
intercession for that person ends because there is
nothing more that God can do to bring a person to
repentance. There is no forgiveness for the
unpardonable sin. (Hebrews 10:26, Matthew
12:31,32)
3. When a decadent nation exhausts the limits of
God’s patience, corporate intercession ends and
that nation is destroyed. (Genesis 15:16; Leviticus
4:13,14; 18:24-28; Jeremiah 25)
4. When God’s patience with the decadence of the
world reaches its limit, He sends destruction.
(Genesis 6; Matthew 24:37)
Corporate and Personal Intercession Ends
You may wonder how the Antichrist can take away the daily
intercession from Jesus during the appointed time of the end. The
termination of the daily happens twice because daily services in
Heaven’s temple involves atonement at two altars. The corporate
altar is called the Altar of Incense and its services will be concluded
first. (Daniel 12:11; Revelation 8:2-5) The individual altar is called
the Altar of Burnt Offering and its services will be terminated at the
seventh trumpet. (Daniel 8:11-13; Revelation 11:15-19). The
corporate daily ends when the majority of the world stands in
rebellion against the authority of God. As it was in the days of Noah;
God’s patience will come to an end. We know His patience can come
to an end with a city of people (e.g., Sodom and Gomorrah) or with
the whole world as it did in Noah’s day. When this happens, He
sends a series of judgments to destroy those who have exhausted
His grace. (Genesis 6; Revelation 7:1-4 and 8:2-13) On the
individual level, the termination of the daily is similar: When the
devil leads a person to finally commit the unpardonable sin
(persistently rejecting the demands of the Holy Spirit) God’s
136 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

patience with that person comes to an end and God turns that
person over to be subject to the devil. (Matthew 12:31,32; Hebrews
10:26) When a person, a nation, or the whole world refuses to
surrender to the clearest evidences of God’s will, Jesus will no
longer offer intercession for them. Why should He? For this reason,
Jesus’ corporate intercession for Babylon, Medo-Persia, Grecia, and
Rome ended and the kingdoms fell. (See Daniel 5.)
We see a parallel on the individual level as well. During the Great
Tribulation, God will empower His servants, the 144,000, to
proclaim the terms and conditions of salvation to every nation,
kindred, tongue and people. The Antichrist will lead the wicked of
Earth into committing the unpardonable sin. He will lead them to
rebel against the authority of God and despise the generous offer of
salvation from Jesus. (2 Thessalonians 2:11,12; Romans 1:18-32;
Hebrews 10:29) Thus, the daily intercession of Jesus on behalf of the
world and individuals will be taken away.
Some people will not voluntarily go along with the devil’s schemes.
God knows this and He empowers the Antichrist to bring an end to
Christ’s intercession by forcing people to make a hard choice. There
will be no middle ground. The devil will require worship (obedience)
and all who refuse to submit to his assumed authority are to be
killed. (Revelation 13:15) The “salvation” which the Antichrist offers
will be the temporal privilege of obtaining the necessities of life
during the final days of the Great Tribulation. In other words, if a
person chooses to join forces with the devil and receive the mark of
the beast, that person will be able to buy and sell so that he can
survive. If a person refuses the mark of the beast, that person will
be shut off from all earthly means of survival to starve or be killed.
When every decision for or against salvation has been made, Jesus’
intercession for that person ends.
Gabriel also said, “. . . and the place of his [Jesus’] sanctuary was
brought low.” The exalted ministry of man’s Savior in Heaven’s
temple will become a matter of mockery (brought low through
contempt). During the Great Tribulation, a majority of people will be
convinced the devil is God! (2 Thessalonians 2) In other words, the
unseen ministry and temple of Jesus in Heaven will not be able to
compete with the dazzling show of miracles which the Antichrist
conducts. However, the heavenly temple will be physically displayed
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 137

to everyone living on Earth after the daily has ended. (Revelation

11:19)
Rebellion Will Overtake the World
Consider this next verse: “Because of rebellion, the host of the
saints and the daily sacrifice were given over to it [the
Antichrist]. It prospered in everything it did, and truth was
thrown to the ground.” (Daniel 8:12, insertion) This verse aligns
with many details in Revelation. The following is a short scenario of
this verse:
When the Great Tribulation begins, the Holy Spirit will be poured
out on all nations and people. The purpose of the Spirit’s influence
is to pry open every heart to receive the gospel message that God’s
servants, the 144,000, will present. Jesus will send the Holy Spirit
for one purpose, to save as many people as possible. Sadly, billions
of people will refuse to submit to the demands of the Holy Spirit,
and they will choose rebellion (lawlessness) against God. When the
advance of the gospel stalls, God allows “the stern-face king,” the
destroyer, to physically appear. The mission of the Antichrist is to
deceive and destroy. As the devil’s popularity grows (it starts out
small), the wicked people of Earth will be divided into two camps.
One camp will be the “religious wicked” and the other camp will
consist of wicked people who want nothing to do with the devil.
They just want him to go away and leave them alone. The “religious
wicked” will be people like the Pharisees in Christ’s day who
stubbornly hang on to false religion. These people would rather
believe that Lucifer is God than to submit to the authority of Jesus
Christ. These people appear to be religious, but they do not love
truth. They do not even love God. These are people who chase
miraculous signs instead of searching for truth. The other camp, the
“non-religious wicked,” consists of people like Hitler and Stalin who
have no use for God and they detest Lucifer’s heavy handed ways. They
will not accept the authority and dominion of the Antichrist. The “non-
religious wicked” are represented in Daniel 11:36-12:3 as the kingdom
of the South. In other words, the kingdom of the South is poles apart
from the kingdom of the North. The Antichrist will use their rebellion
against his authority to justify their destruction. Of course, the devil
will destroy many saints for the same reason. The war described in
the sixth trumpet (Revelation 9) is conducted to establish Lucifer’s
undisputed dominion over Earth. (Revelation 9:13-21) Revelation
138 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

says the devil and his angels will kill one-third of mankind (the non-
religious wicked). When he has gained control of Earth, the devil
will divide up the spoils of Earth and he will appoint ten kings to
rule over ten sectors. His puppet kings will control Earth. The
surviving saints will run for their lives and hide in the desolate
places of Earth. God will feed and sustain them just as He did
Elijah. (1 Kings 17:6) With this setting in mind, consider Daniel’s
words again. I have inserted phrases that complete the ideas
already presented: “[At the time of the end] It [the horn power, the
Antichrist will] set itself up to be as great as the Prince of the
host [Jesus]; it took away the [need for the] daily sacrifice from
him, and the [exalted purpose or] place of his [intercession for
sinners in Heaven’s] sanctuary was brought low [ridiculed].
Because of [extensive] rebellion, the host of the saints [*were
defeated] and the daily sacrifice were given over to it [brought
to an end]. It [the Antichrist] prospered in everything it did,
and truth was thrown to the ground [because truth was
despised].” (Daniel 8:11,12, insertions mine.)
Arrogance and Blasphemy
“He [the Antichrist] will cause deceit to prosper, and he will
consider himself superior [above the gods of all religions]. When
they [his followers] feel secure [in his lies], he will destroy many
[the non-religious-wicked] and take his stand against the Prince
of princes [Jesus]. Yet he will be destroyed [by the sword that
comes out of the mouth of Jesus], but not by human power.”
(Daniel 8:25, insertions mine ) The following specification about the
horn power cannot be overlooked: “The king [of the North] will do
as he pleases. He will exalt and magnify himself above every
god and will say unheard-of things against the God of gods.
He will be successful until the time of wrath is completed, for
what has been [pre-]determined must take place. . . . He [the
Antichrist] will pitch his royal tents between the seas at the
beautiful holy mountain. Yet he will come to his end, and no
one will help him.” (Daniel 11:36,45)
Four elements stand out in these verses.
1. Jesus Himself destroys the horn power in Daniel 8.
(Daniel 8:25; 2 Thessalonians 2:8)

* See Revelation 13:7.

Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 139

2. The horn power of Daniel 8 will lead the whole

world into a great deception. (Daniel 8:25;
Revelation 13:14)
3. The horn power of Daniel 8 will exalt himself
above all of the gods that people worship. (Daniel
8:25, 11:36; 2 Thessalonians 2:4)
4. The Antichrist will pitch his royal tents “between
the seas at the beautiful holy mountain.”
Daniel indicates the devil will establish a throne in Jerusalem.
What better way to stop the controversies between Christians,
Arabs and Jews? The term “holy mountain” is used several times in
the Old Testament as a reference to Jerusalem (the city of God,
Mount Zion, Mount Moriah, etc.). It is well known that Jews,
Muslims and Christians have roots in this ancient city. Perhaps the
best reason for interpreting this specification just as it reads is that
at the end, two kings will take their stand against each other. The
stern-faced king of Daniel 8 establishes his kingdom and rules from
ancient Jerusalem. The King of kings, however, will rule from His
city, New Jerusalem. This is good news! The stern-faced king will
come to his end and no one among the wicked will be left to help
him!
Gabriel’s Final Words
“The vision of the evenings and mornings that has been
given you is true, but seal up the vision, for it concerns the
distant future.” (Daniel 8:26) With these words, Gabriel left
Daniel. It is interesting that Gabriel gave this vision a title. While
the prophetic sequence concerns a ram, a goat, the appointed time of
the end and a stern-faced king, Gabriel called it “The vision of the
[2,300] evenings and mornings.” Evidently, Gabriel used this title to
highlight the critical element within this vision. The most
important element in Daniel 8 is the daily services in Heaven’s
temple. The daily intercession of Jesus is the only thing that
protects mankind from God’s wrath and the wrath of the destroyer!
Even the words, 2,300 evenings and mornings reflects the time of
day when daily temple services were conducted. The date for
cleansing Heaven’s temple was given in temple language! The
bottom line in Daniel 8 is that a time is coming when the stern-faced
140 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

king (the Antichrist) will cause Jesus’ daily intercession to cease. This
is the worst possible thing that can happen to Earth’s inhabitants,
because when Jesus terminates His intercession on behalf of sinners,
the seven bowls of God’s wrath will be poured out without mercy.
(Revelation 15 and 16)
Daniel was deeply distressed and very disturbed after seeing this
vision. He did not understand what he had seen, but he did
recognize enough to know the world would continue to spiral
downward until Lucifer himself would be released upon humanity.
The thought of this must have made him sick. Daniel writes, “ I,
Daniel, was exhausted and lay ill for several days. Then I got
up and went about the king’s business. I was appalled by the
vision; it was beyond understanding.” (Daniel 8:27)
Conclusion
This chapter has been lengthy because Daniel 8 contains several
critical building blocks in the matrix that is unfolding. If you still
have questions, please review this chapter to make sure you
understand how the apocalyptic rules work and the results they
produce. If the apocalyptic foundations in Daniel 2, Daniel 7 and
Daniel 8 are not laid properly, the remaining prophecies in Daniel
and Revelation cannot yield their intended meaning. If the
foundation of a skyscraper is not solid, no amount of paint or
ornamentation will compensate for it. We have seen all four rules at
work in this chapter. The four rules have produced these conclusions
for us:
Rule One. Daniel 8 is a prophecy that has a beginning point in
time (538 B.C.) and an ending point in time (the destruction of the
Antichrist at the Second Coming). The events in this prophecy occur
in the order they were given: Ram – Goat – Horn Power.
Rule Two. The appearing of the Antichrist during the appointed
time of the end is the only interpretation that meets all of the
specifications given in this prophecy.
Rule Three. The Bible uses various types of language in this
prophecy. For example, by reviewing seven Bible texts we found the
direction of “north” to be very significant for the origin of the horn
power. We also found “the starry hosts” to be used in five texts as a
broad definition for false religions.
Chapter 4 – Daniel 8 141

Rule Four. God measures the 2,300 days as years because God
measures time according to the presence or absence of the Jubilee
Calendar. This point will be amplified in our study of Daniel 9.
Note: The Origin of the Antiochus IV Interpretation
From the 1500’s to the 1900’s, Protestants widely agreed the horn
power of Daniel 8 was the papacy because Protestantism struggled
against the Roman Catholic Church in much the same way that
Christians struggled against Judaism. If history teaches anything, it
is this: Religious institutions place loyalty and allegiance above the
importance of truth. The reason behind this is simple. Over time,
religious organizations embrace a collection of doctrines or teachings
which they believe to be God’s will and any significant deviation
from that body of knowledge is considered divisive and/or heretical.
During the 1,260 years of papal dominion, “the protesters” as they
were first called, suffered imprisonment or death for challenging the
authority of the church. Protesters claimed the Bible was the final
authority in matters of faith. Church leaders were convinced that
ecclesiastical authority and traditions were higher authority. This
simple difference became the all important distinction between
Protestants and Catholics. As Protestants began to see that the
church was unwilling to change, a number of “protester” preachers
began to conclude that the church was anti-Christ. The Protestant
position was bolstered by the prophetic fact that the little horn of
Daniel 7 is the papacy. Protesters traced the history and power of
the church (the little horn) back to its Roman origin. Because there
is some similarity between the little horn of Daniel 7 and the horn
power of Daniel 8, Protestants assumed that Daniel 8 was a
repetition and enlargement of Daniel 7.
About the turn of the seventeenth century, two Jesuit scholars from
Spain, Francisco Ribera and Luis de Alcasar, introduced counter-
reformation theories to refute the claims of Protestants. Their
objective was to use the Bible to defeat Protestants by openly
refuting their prophetic interpretations with Scripture! As a result
of their endeavors, two conflicting prophetic schemes emerged
within the Catholic Church. Ribera’s findings, published in 1590,
claimed that the Antichrist was a single male individual who would
appear just before the Second Coming of Jesus. By showing the
Antichrist to be a single individual, Ribera thought he could defeat a
142 Chapter 4 – Daniel 8

principal argument of the Protestants. Most sixteenth century

Protestants believed the popes occupied the seat of the Antichrist. In
other words, Protestants did not believe the Antichrist was a single
individual (the little horn of Daniel 7 is not a single individual).
Ribera claimed that the Antichrist would bitterly persecute the
saints during the last days of Earth, and he would abolish the
Christian religion and rebuild the temple in Jerusalem. Ribera also
claimed that the Jews would receive the Antichrist as Messiah
because of his miracles and then he would conquer the world in
three and one half years.
Alcasar’s preterist position, published in 1614 was just the opposite.
Alcasar’s position was based on the supposition that Revelation’s
story was essentially fulfilled during the first century A.D. Alcasar
concluded that Revelation described the victory of early Christians
over the Jewish nation and the overthrow of pagan Rome in A.D.
476. He concluded that Nero was the Antichrist of Revelation. He
also concluded that Antiochus Epiphanes IV was the horn power of
Daniel 8.
When these opposing views were presented to the Protestants, they
were not moved or impressed. For about two hundred years,
Protestants stood firm and united on their prophetic position that
the Roman Catholic Church was the Babylon of Revelation and the
Antichrist was a succession of popes. In the early part of the
nineteenth century, Protestantism began to change its mind because
it became apparent to some Protestants that the Roman Catholic
Church could not meet all of the specifications about the Antichrist
in Daniel and Revelation. A survey of prophetic literature written by
Protestants since 1826 shows how Protestant expositors began to
drift away from their long standing claim that the Roman Catholic
Church was the Antichrist. Today, most Protestant expositors do not
believe the Roman Catholic Church is Babylon and they do not
believe the succession of popes is the Antichrist. It is ironic that
three hundred years after Ribera published his works, the
Protestant, C.I. Scofield, endorsed a modified version of Ribera’s
counter-reformation claim and, as a result, most Protestants today
accept the ideas advanced by Ribera.
 Chapter 5
Daniel 6 – The Question of Loyalty
Loyalty

“I issue a decree that in every part of my kingdom

people must fear and reverence the God of Daniel. ‘For
he is the living God and he endures forever; his
kingdom will not be destroyed, his dominion will never
end. He rescues and he saves; he performs signs and
wonders in the heavens and on the earth. He has
rescued Daniel from the power of the lions.’”
– Daniel 6:26,27

Someone once said that loyalty is like the juice of an orange – the
flavor cannot be determined until the orange is squeezed beyond the
breaking point. The Bible testifies to the truthfulness of this
statement. Loyalty is one of the most powerful forces within the
human heart. Loyalty can produce good results, and misplaced
loyalty can produce evil results. For example: Judas Iscariot was
loyal to his dreams of self-importance, power and wealth. When he
realized that following Jesus would not fulfill his dreams, he
betrayed Jesus for the equivalent of $12.60 (thirty pieces of silver).
King David was loyal to his passions for Bathsheba. To cover up
their illicit affair and the resulting pregnancy, the king killed her
husband. David’s crime was especially heinous because Bathsheba’s
husband, Uriah, was one of the thirty-seven gallant men who
defended David during his days of hiding from King Saul. Peter
swore loyalty to Jesus in the garden, but when he learned that he
might have to share a martyr’s death with Jesus, he denied that he
knew The Master. The Philippian jailer was loyal to his job until an
earthquake destroyed his jail. When he realized his life was in
jeopardy, he suddenly experienced a change of heart. Saul was loyal
to his religion. He faithfully persecuted Christians until Jesus
confronted him on the road to Damascus. Afterwards, Paul
maintained unwavering loyalty to Jesus and he suffered persecution
from Jews and Romans alike for preaching salvation through Jesus
144 Chapter 5 – Daniel 6

Christ. Legend says that Nero sentenced Paul to death because Paul
refused to renounce his loyalty to Jesus and worship Caesar.
Shadrach, Meshach and Abednego chose to be loyal to the God of
Heaven rather than worship the golden image, and King
Nebuchadnezzar threw them into a fiery furnace. John the Baptist
was loyal to God’s righteousness when he told King Herod that
living with his brother’s wife was a sin. John’s remarks cost him his
life. Jonathan was loyal to David instead of his father, King Saul.
Jonathan was almost killed because of his loyalty to David.
Jeremiah was loyal to the Lord when he told Israel all that the Lord
had said about their apostasy. The Jews threw Jeremiah into a
cistern to die. Job’s loyalty to God was tested with some of the
harshest suffering ever recorded, but Job was more blessed in the
end than at the beginning. Noah was loyal to God’s command and he
suffered an incredible amount of ridicule, but his loyalty and faith
saved his family. Ruth was loyal to Naomi and chose to suffer
poverty with her, but Ruth’s loyalty to Naomi made her an ancestor
of Jesus. Because she feared God, Rahab, the prostitute, was loyal
to the spies that entered Jericho and she saved her family. Queen
Esther was loyal to her people and ultimately saved them from
destruction. The prophet Daniel chose to defy the decree of the king
by openly praying toward Jerusalem, and for this act of rebellion, he
was thrown into the lions’ den. Webster says that loyalty means
being constant and faithful, bearing true allegiance to something.
Every human being has loyalties, but the essential question is, “To
what or whom are we loyal?” Our deepest loyalties are revealed
when we are forced into making a decision that favors one loyalty
and harms others. Until we are put to the test, it is impossible to
say where our deepest loyalties really lie. This is the sobering point
that Peter learned after the rooster crowed the third time.
Daniel: A Prisoner of War
For centuries, Christians have repeated the story of Daniel’s escape
from the lions’ den, but few people know the whole story that
surrounds this incident. As we will see, Daniel’s loyalty to God had
a profound impact on two nations! I would like to present this story
with the necessary background information so that (a) you can
“stand in Daniel’s sandals” and consider the importance of loyalty to
God, and (b) Daniel 9 will make a lot more sense.
Chapter 5 – Daniel 6 145

Daniel was taken to Babylon as a prisoner of war as a result of

Nebuchadnezzar’s first siege on Jerusalem in 605 B.C. It is believed
that Daniel was about 17 or 18 years of age. It was King
Nebuchadnezzar’s policy to take the brightest captives and enroll
them in an academy to prepare them for government service. The
king had wisely established a school to train captives from various
tribal nations, so the captives could return to their homeland and
serve the empire of Babylon as rulers loyal to the interests of the
king of Babylon. This is why Daniel and some of his friends were
inducted into the king’s academy. The book of Daniel begins with
Daniel and his closest friends asking the king’s steward if they could
be excused from eating at the king’s table. They wanted to maintain
a more simple, vegetarian diet, but the steward refused this first
request. He was sure that Daniel and his friends would become sick
and feeble if they ate nothing but vegetables and water. If they
became sick on his watch, he could lose his job or possibly his head!
Daniel persisted and the steward gave in. When it came time for
the king to test the trainees, Daniel and his friends were found to be
at the top of their class. In fact, the Bible says their knowledge was
ten times better than their fellow students. (Daniel 1:20) Do you
think the success of Daniel and his friends had anything to do with
their diet and their loyalty to God?
A short time later, Daniel gained world-wide recognition when God
used him to interpret a dream that God gave to Nebuchadnezzar.
(Daniel 2) As a result of that incident, Nebuchadnezzar promoted
Daniel to a very high government position and all the wise men of
Babylon reported to him. Do you think Daniel’s lofty promotion had
anything to do with his loyalty to God?
Why Was Daniel Sent to Babylon?
Historians tell us that Nebuchadnezzar set siege to Jerusalem three
times. He finally destroyed the city in 586 B.C., because Israel’s
kings refused to submit to Nebuchadnezzar’s “higher” authority. In
actuality, God destroyed Jerusalem with Nebuchadnezzar’s sword,
and He put the Jews in captivity for seventy years because Israel
refused to submit to His “higher” authority. The Bible carefully
justifies God’s wrath on Israel. To understand God’s wrath, we have
to start with a conversation between God and Moses. Carefully
review these texts:
146 Chapter 5 – Daniel 6

1. Sabbath Rest Required for the Land - Leviticus 25

A few weeks after the Exodus, “The Lord said to Moses on Mount
Sinai, ‘Speak to the Israelites and say to them: ‘When you enter
the land I am going to give you, the land itself must observe a
Sabbath to the Lord. For six years sow your fields, and for six
years prune your vineyards and gather their crops. But in the
seventh year the land is to have a Sabbath of rest, a Sabbath to
the Lord. Do not sow your fields or prune your vineyards. Do
not reap what grows of itself or harvest the grapes of your
untended vines. The land is to have a year of rest.’ ” (Leviticus
25:1-5) This text is self explanatory. God required the land to rest
every seventh year. Why would any nation refuse a year’s vacation
every seventh year? The Lord continues, “You may ask, ‘What will
we eat in the seventh year if we do not plant or harvest our
crops?’ I will send you such a blessing in the sixth year that
the land will yield enough for three years. While you plant
during the eighth year, you will eat from the old crop and will
continue to eat from it until the harvest of the ninth year
comes in.” (Leviticus 25:20-22) There is a profound point in these
verses: God promised to send a bumper crop every sixth year so there
would be enough food to observe a year of rest! Contrary to what
many scholars say, the Sabbath rest for the land was not for
agricultural purposes. In fact, God made the land produce its greatest
harvest during the sixth year – when the land was in its most
exhausted condition! The first lesson to be learned from the Sabbath
year is simple. God established the Sabbath year rest to test His
people. Would Israel be loyal or rebellious? (See Exodus 16 for a
parallel test concerning the seventh day.)
2. “If You Don’t Keep My Sabbath Years” - Leviticus 26
God warned Israel: “If in spite of this you still do not listen to me
but continue to be hostile toward me, then in my anger I will
be hostile toward you, and I myself will punish you for your
sins seven times over. . . . I will turn your cities into ruins and
lay waste your sanctuaries, and I will take no delight in the
pleasing aroma of your offerings. I will lay waste the land, so
that your enemies who live there will be appalled. I will
scatter you among the nations and will draw out my sword and
pursue you. Your land will be laid waste, and your cities will
Chapter 5 – Daniel 6 147

lie in ruins. Then the land will enjoy its sabbath years all the
time that it lies desolate and you are in the country of your
enemies; then the land will rest and enjoy its sabbaths. All the
time that it lies desolate, the land will have the rest it did not
have during the sabbaths you lived in it.” (Leviticus 26:27,28,31-
35, insertion mine) A person does not have to be a rocket scientist to
understand these words. God said His land was going to rest, with or
without Israel. God wanted His people to understand a profound
truth: “. . . [The Lord said] the land is mine and you are but
aliens and my tenants.” (Leviticus 25:23, insertion mine) God
wanted Israel to know that their occupation of His land was
conditional on their steadfast loyalty to Him. (Leviticus 18;
Deuteronomy 28)
3. Because You Have Rebelled - Jeremiah 25
The Old Testament indicates over and over again that Israel did not
remain loyal to God. Their cup of grace overflowed with rebellion
and around 615 B.C., God gave a message to Jeremiah. He said, “I
will summon all the peoples of the north and my servant
Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylon,’ declares the Lord, ‘and I
will bring them against this land and its inhabitants and
against all the surrounding nations. I will completely destroy
them and make them an object of horror and scorn, and an
everlasting ruin. I will banish from them the sounds of joy
and gladness, the voices of bride and bridegroom, the sound
of millstones and the light of the lamp. This whole country
will become a desolate wasteland, and these nations will
serve the king of Babylon seventy years. But when the
seventy years are fulfilled, I will punish the king of Babylon
and his nation, the land of the Babylonians, for their guilt,’
declares the Lord, ‘and will make it desolate forever.’ ”
(Jeremiah 25:9-12) Notice three things: First, God called King
Nebuchadnezzar “my servant.” This is an important concept. God
chose a pagan king to be His agent of wrath against Jerusalem.
(Parallel: The Antichrist, the modern king of Babylon, will be God’s
agent of wrath during the Great Tribulation.) Second, God said that
Jerusalem would be destroyed and Israel would be captives in
Babylon for seventy years. Third, God said that Babylon would
eventually be destroyed for the same sins as Jerusalem.
148 Chapter 5 – Daniel 6

4. 430 Years of Rebellion

During the seventy years of captivity in Babylon, God raised up two
prophets. Ezekiel was a prisoner of war like Daniel, but Ezekiel
lived among the captives while Daniel lived in the ivory halls of
power. Ezekiel was timid and afraid of public speaking, so the Lord
prompted him to “act out” various signs for the elders of Israel to
watch. Notice this sign: “. . . This will be a sign to the house of
Israel. . . [Ezekiel] lie on your left side and put the sin of the
house of Israel upon yourself. You are to bear their sin for
the number of days you lie on your side. I have assigned you
the same number of days as the years of their sin. So for 390
days you will bear the sin of the house of Israel. ‘After you
have finished this, lie down again, this time on your right
side, and bear the sin of the house of Judah. I have assigned
you 40 days, a day for each year.’ ” (Ezekiel 4:3,6, insertion
mine) This text is important because we find the length of rebellion
to be a total of 430 years. (390 + 40 = 430) This number should
catch the attention of the reader, because it is the same number of
years mentioned in Exodus 12:41. These two separate and distinct
instances of 430 years have three things in common: apostasy,
timing and vigil. First, the apostasy of the Israelites in Egypt is no
different than the apostasy of the Israelites in the promised land of
Canaan! Apostasy is the direction of fallen man. Second, God’s
timing was perfect in both instances. The Bible says that God
delivered the Israelites from Egyptian slavery exactly 430 years
later, to the very day. (Exodus 12:41) If God delivered Israel from
Egypt on time, then it should come as no surprise that He sent them
into captivity on time as well. It should be noted that when Israel
had filled up their cup of iniquity by violating seventy Sabbath
years, God sent them into captivity! How do we know this? Ezekiel
performed the “430 day” sign for the elders of Israel, because they
knew there are seventy Sabbatical years in 430 years. In other
words, the Babylonian captivity was seventy years in length because
that is the exact number of Sabbath years Israel violated.
Remember God’s threat in Leviticus 26:34,35? “Then the land will
enjoy its Sabbath years all the time that it lies desolate and
you are in the country of your enemies; then the land will
rest and enjoy its Sabbaths. All the time that it lies desolate,
the land will have the rest it did not have during the
Chapter 5 – Daniel 6 149

Sabbaths you lived in it.” This text points to a significant parallel

between these 430 year periods. Third, God keeps vigil. He does not
sleep. He is very much aware of everything that takes place on Earth
and He steps into the affairs of men when the timing is perfect. He
delivered Israel from slavery in Egypt on time, and He sent Israel
into captivity in Babylon on time! Even more, the next text
demonstrates that God delivered Israel from captivity right on time!
5. Prophecy Fulfilled
The Bible says, “God handed all of them [the Jews] over to
Nebuchadnezzar. He carried to Babylon all the articles from
the temple of God, both large and small, and the treasures of
the Lord’s temple and the treasures of the king and his
officials. They set fire to God’s temple and broke down the
wall of Jerusalem; they burned all the palaces and destroyed
everything of value there. He carried into exile to Babylon
the remnant, who escaped from the sword, and they became
servants to him and his sons until the kingdom of Persia
came to power. The land enjoyed its sabbath rests; all the
time of its desolation it rested, until the seventy years were
completed in fulfillment of the word of the Lord spoken by
Jeremiah.” (2 Chronicles 36:17-21, insertion mine) Again, the
reason for the Babylonian captivity is simple and obvious. God
handed Israel over to Nebuchadnezzar because of disloyalty. Israel
refused to keep His Sabbath days and His Sabbath years, so He
evicted them and the land rested for seventy years.
Zooming Forward
Now that we understand why the Jews were sent to Babylon, we can
zoom forward to the fall of Babylon. Historians say Babylon fell on
Tishri 16 (around October 13), 539 B.C. Darius began to rule over
the province of Babylon during that year (his ascension year), so
Darius’ first calendar year (according to the religious calendar of the
Jews) was 538/7 B.C. The first year of Darius’ reign was Daniel’s
sixty-eighth year in captivity. Daniel knew the end of captivity in
Babylon was near. Daniel and his contemporaries knew that
Jerusalem had been besieged during the Sabbath year of 605 B.C.
(Jeremiah 34:12-21), and Daniel knew the seventy years of
desolation decreed upon Jerusalem (Daniel 9:2) would have to end
during a Friday year. (Counting inclusively, 605 B.C. minus 536 B.C.
150 Chapter 5 – Daniel 6

equals seventy years, which is ten weeks of seven years.)

Note: When God established the weekly cycle of seven years at the
time of the Exodus, God required Israel to set their slaves free at the
beginning of the seventh year. The seventh or Sabbath year was
observed as a year of freedom from the bondage of slavery. (See
Exodus 21:2 and Jeremiah 34:14-16.) Daniel knew of God’s
requirements, and he understood the operation and synchrony of the
Jubilee Calendar. In fact, God used the synchrony and operation of
the Jubilee Calendar in Daniel 9 to pinpoint the year of Messiah’s
death (in the middle year of the week of seven years – Daniel 9:27).
The Political Situation in Daniel’s Sixty-eighth Year
It was most unusual in ancient times for a conquering king to give a
prisoner of war a position of high authority in his government. The
possibility of treason or rebellion was just too great. Incredible as it
was, this happened to Daniel three times. Nebuchadnezzar
promoted Daniel to one of his highest governing positions after
Daniel interpreted his dream. Belteshazzar promoted Daniel to one
of his highest governing positions after Daniel read the handwriting
on the wall. Finally, Darius promoted Daniel to one of the highest
positions in the kingdom when Darius became king. Do you think
Daniel’s promotions had anything to do with his loyalty to God?
Daniel must have believed that God placed him in a very powerful
political position within the government of Darius so that he, Daniel,
might facilitate Israel’s release from captivity. However, Daniel was
nearing ninety years of age, and he knew that if he acted on his own,
he might interfere with God’s marvelous ways as Moses did when he
wrongfully killed the Egyptian. (Exodus 2:11-14) Daniel also knew
that if any of his actions backfired, many Jews would suffer, as in
the days when Moses and Aaron ordered the Hebrew slaves to rest
from their weekly labors before the Exodus. (Exodus 5:5) Daniel was
aware that he would dishonor God if his actions to free his people
aroused suspicion, jealousy or any hint of rebellion against the
Medes and Persians. Many of the Chaldeans intensely hated the
Jews, and any move on Daniel’s part to free his people would
probably be construed as treason. If Daniel was convicted in a court
of public opinion, he knew the punishment was sudden death.
Note: Hatred for the Jews erupted throughout the Persian kingdom
Chapter 5 – Daniel 6 151

about seventy years after Daniel died. The noble, Haman, obtained a
universal death decree from King Artaxerxes for all Jews in the
Persian kingdom, but God used a strategically-placed Queen Esther
to save His people.
Daniel’s dilemma also had other ramifications. During the seventy
years of captivity in Babylon, the Jews multiplied and integrated
into the province of Babylon. In some cities, the Jews prospered,
while others remained servants or slaves of the Chaldeans. When
Darius began his reign over Babylon, most of the original captives
from Jerusalem had died. Therefore, the next generation had little
attachment to Jerusalem, a place they had not seen. In fact, when
King Cyrus set the Jews free in 536 B.C., Ezra 2 indicates that a
small minority of captives, 29,818 Jewish males, returned to
Jerusalem.
Political and Economic Problems
Daniel knew the emancipation of his people after seventy years in
Babylon could cause many problems for King Darius. If large
numbers of Chaldeans lost their slaves, financial losses could
destabilize the economy and produce social unrest. Daniel was also
aware that during the seventy years of desolation, tribal nations had
moved into Jerusalem and a returning Israel would be embroiled in
wars and land disputes unless there was a royal land grant decreed
by the king who ruled over the territory of Canaan. So, any decree
that freed the Jews from the province of Babylon would also require
a land grant by King Cyrus, who ruled over Canaan. Daniel’s
desire, of course, was that his people would recover the land they
had lost, but the political and economic problems of setting Israel
free greatly perplexed Daniel. What could he do to facilitate the
freedom of his people? Even if they were set free, how would he
motivate a majority of the Jews to return to Jerusalem? Daniel’s
mind must have churned over these issues for months. As a high
government official, he saw how a significant exodus from Babylon
could be a political nightmare.
Jealousy Knows No Bounds
From Daniel’s point of view, the upcoming seventieth year, 536/5
B.C., would not be a very good year to attempt the release of the
Jews. Even though Daniel held one of the highest positions in the
152 Chapter 5 – Daniel 6

empire, Darius was a new king over the province of Babylon. This
meant a new administration was in place adhering to a new set of
laws and a new corporate attitude, which included a large group of
powerful nobles who hated the Jews. As Daniel pondered his
helpless position, it became apparent to him that Israel’s
deliverance from slavery would have to be an “Act of God,” a miracle
as great as the Exodus from Egypt. To his credit, Daniel faithfully
carried out his responsibilities within Darius’ administration, and
Darius came to explicitly trust his elder statesman. The Bible says
of this time period, “Now Daniel so distinguished himself
among the administrators and the satraps by his exceptional
qualities that the king planned to set him over the whole
kingdom.” (Daniel 6:3)
Sometime during Darius’ first calendar year (538/7 B.C.), Daniel
decided the best thing he could do was seek God’s wisdom through
fasting, praying and wearing sackcloth and ashes. Time was
running out! The seventieth year was approaching fast. So, Daniel
sought the Lord in utter humility to see what God wanted of him.
To be seen in sackcloth and ashes was a sign of mourning or extreme
humiliation. To the Medes and Persians, Daniel’s appearance must
have been very odd since he usually wore clothing appropriate for
his exalted office. Regardless, Daniel embarrassed (humbled) him-
self before God as a man in sackcloth and ashes, demonstrating that
God could use him in whatever meaningful or menial way God desired.
Unbeknown to Daniel, King Darius had planned to promote Daniel
above the other two governors of his empire. Evidently, Darius
decided to do this because he had contracted a degenerating health
problem. Darius favored Daniel because Daniel was “pure in heart,”
a very unusual quality among people in political office. Darius also
wanted to make Daniel, “the Jew,” his number two man in the
kingdom because this would strategically protect his throne when he
became too weak to meet the day-to-day needs of his office. Unlike
the other two administrators, Darius knew Daniel would be loyal to
him instead of an inner or hidden ambition to acquire his throne.
Darius knew that even an intelligent Jew could not aspire to be king
over an empire of Medes. By putting Daniel in the number two seat,
Darius knew his throne would be safe from the schemes of ambitious
politicians and administrators.
Chapter 5 – Daniel 6 153

Somehow, Darius’ plans were leaked to the two administrators, and

they were filled with jealousy and rage. No self respecting Mede or
Persian would be subject to a Jew! Jealousy and hatred for Daniel,
“the Jew,” led them to search for anything they could use to mar
Daniel’s reputation and disqualify him from such a position of
honor. They closely studied Daniel’s personal history, conducted
interviews and audited his finances trying to find a flaw in his
character. They were unable to find anything. The Bible says, “At
this, the administrators and the satraps tried to find grounds
for charges against Daniel in his conduct of government
affairs, but they were unable to do so. They could find no
corruption in him, because he was trustworthy and neither
corrupt nor negligent. Finally these men said, ‘We will never
find any basis for charges against this man Daniel unless it
has something to do with the law of his God.’ ” (Daniel 6:4,5)
Given the hatred and determination of his enemies, and the
notorious behavior of politicians down through the ages, these are
amazing words coming from their lips!
Putting the Squeeze on Daniel
Finally, the administrators and satraps concluded that the only way
to stop Darius from promoting Daniel was to prove to Darius that
Daniel’s loyalty to his “Jewish” God was higher than his loyalty to
Darius. They figured the question of loyalty would prove their
point. When it comes to politics, kings have to be gods. Their ego
and government rests upon nothing less than total submission and
devotion to their will. If no one respects the king, how can he be
king? Therefore, “loyalty tests” were sometimes used by ancient
kings to ferret out people with bad attitudes. This may explain why
Darius did not quibble or hesitate to issue a loyalty decree. Loyalty
tests were simple: During the specified month, suspects were
arraigned and questioned before a court of political leaders. If the
suspect freely confessed allegiance to the king as his highest
authority on Earth, the suspect would then affirm his loyalty to the
king by swearing an oath. However, if the suspect was hostile
toward the king or plotting rebellion, a “loyalty test” became a life
and death issue, even though the suspect may not have been caught
doing anything wrong. This is why loyalty tests were so effective. If
the suspect refused to take an oath affirming his allegiance and
submission to the king, he was declared a rebel and killed
154 Chapter 5 – Daniel 6

immediately. On the other hand, if he lied about his allegiance to the

king and gave an oath of loyalty, his sympathizers would see that the
suspect was a common coward and a liar. Who could respect such a
disgusting person? This technique for testing loyalty was simple and
effective. Incidently, the Caesars also used loyalty tests. Thousands
of Christians perished because they would not bow down before the
“man-god,” Caesar. (John 19:15; Romans 10:9) During the Great
Tribulation, God will use a simple loyalty test. A test of worship will
put the “squeeze” on every person and our deepest loyalties will be
“squeezed out” for everyone to see. (See Revelation 13:8-18.)
The Perfect Plot
The crafty administrators asked Darius for permission to conduct a
“loyalty check” for three reasons: First, a loyalty test was a well-
known tactic. Since the province of Babylon was a new territory for
Darius, a loyalty test appeared to be a “good idea” to eliminate those
who might be rebellious. Second, if Daniel should slip through the
thirty-day decree trap, Darius would never know the real motives
behind the administrators’ request for the loyalty test. Third, if
Daniel was caught in their trap, he would be “legally” killed because
the law demanded the sudden death of anyone caught in rebellion
against the king. If Daniel was destroyed, the administrators would
not be implicated in Daniel’s death. The “loyalty test” seemed like
the perfect way to eliminate Daniel, or so they thought.
When the administrators asked the king for a loyalty decree, they
must have known that Darius did not know about Daniel’s current
state of humiliation. If Darius had been aware of Daniel’s behavior,
praying to his God three times a day in sackcloth and ashes, this
knowledge would have foiled their plot. “So the administrators
and the satraps went as a group to the king and said: ‘O King
Darius, live forever! The royal administrators, prefects,
satraps, advisers and governors have all agreed that the king
should issue an edict and enforce the decree that anyone
who prays to any god or man during the next thirty days,
except to you, O king, shall be thrown into the lions’ den.
Now, O king, issue the decree and put it in writing so that it
cannot be altered–in accordance with the laws of the Medes
and Persians, which cannot be repealed.’ So King Darius put
the decree in writing.” (Daniel 6:6-9)
Chapter 5 – Daniel 6 155

Daniel Springs the Trap

“Now when Daniel learned that the decree had been published,
he went home to his upstairs room where the windows opened
toward Jerusalem. Three times a day he got down on his knees
and prayed, giving thanks to his God, just as he had done
before. Then these men went as a group and found Daniel
praying and asking God for help. So they went to the king and
spoke to him about his royal decree: ‘Did you not publish a
decree that during the next thirty days anyone who prays to
any god or man except to you, O king, would be thrown into
the lions’ den?’ The king answered, ‘The decree stands–in
accordance with the laws of the Medes and Persians, which
cannot be repealed.’ Then they said to the king, ‘Daniel, who is
one of the exiles from Judah, pays no attention to you, O king,
or to the decree you put in writing. He still prays three times a
day.’ When the king heard this, he was greatly distressed; he
was determined to rescue Daniel and made every effort until
sundown to save him.” (Daniel 6:10-14)
Did you notice how fast Daniel willfully disobeyed the king’s decree?
Why did one of the kingdom’s highest officials publicly defy the law
of the king? The answer lies in the fact that Daniel understood the
motives and reasons behind the loyalty test. Daniel remembered his
three friends and their fiery furnace test, and he knew he was being
tested just like them. Evidently, notification of the decree came
suddenly and without warning to Daniel. I find it interesting that
Daniel did not go to his immediate superior, King Darius and plead
his case! When Daniel learned of the loyalty test, he ran to (not
from) his prayer room. This action says volumes about Daniel’s
loyalty to the God of Heaven!
When Daniel humbled himself by wearing sackcloth and ashes,
Daniel’s heart was ready and willing to submit, even to death, if
that was God’s will. Daniel was willing to do anything God required
of him to facilitate the release of his people. Daniel’s loyalty to God
was extraordinary and God’s approval of Daniel was amazing. In
fact, Daniel’s loyalty became the very tool that God used to glorify
His name before the Medes and Persians so that He could deliver
the Jews from captivity! If the plot to kill Daniel was clever, God’s
use of the situation was even more so. God used the administrators’
156 Chapter 5 – Daniel 6

hatred of Daniel, Darius’ affection for Daniel, Daniel’s loyalty, and

ultimately, the lion’s den to set Israel free from slavery. Watch how
these elements combined to accomplish God’s plan.
King Darius Humiliated
The next morning, “. . . the king gave the order, and they
brought Daniel and threw him into the lions’ den. The king
said to Daniel, ‘May your God, whom you serve continually,
rescue you!’ A stone was brought and placed over the mouth
of the den, and the king sealed it with his own signet ring
and with the rings of his nobles, so that Daniel’s situation
might not be changed. Then the king returned to his palace
and spent the night without eating and without any
entertainment being brought to him. And he could not
sleep.” (Daniel 6:16-18)
Daniel was quickly arraigned before King Darius. When the king
saw his elder statesman in sackcloth and ashes, he became furious
with his administrators. He saw through their plot immediately.
Daniel, “the Jew,” was no rebel and Darius knew it. In fact, Daniel
was the only administrator the king could trust! According to law,
however, Daniel was subjected to the usual “loyalty” interrogation,
and without hesitation, Daniel confessed to praying to his God three
times a day. Daniel did not offer excuses, plead his case or beg for
his life. Even more importantly, he did not swear an oath of loyalty
to King Darius as his highest authority. King Darius churned with
grief and anger. He condemned himself all night for failing to
consider the intense hatred his administrators had for Daniel, “the
Jew.” How ironic the twist of events. Darius was planning to
promote Daniel, but now he would have to kill him instead. Darius
knew Daniel was unjustly condemned, but not even the king himself
could change the law of the Medes and Persians. With these words,
“May your God, whom you serve continually, rescue you!”
Darius bade farewell to Daniel. The king gave the order and with
his own ring and the rings of those who hated the Jew, Darius
issued the judgment requiring Daniel to be thrown into the lions’
den. Daniel was at peace. Darius was in torment and the
administrators were on their way to a secret celebration party.
Chapter 5 – Daniel 6 157

King Darius Exhilarated

“At the first light of dawn, the king got up and hurried to the
lions’ den. When he came near the den, he called to Daniel in
an anguished voice, ‘Daniel, servant of the living God, has
your God, whom you serve continually, been able to rescue
you from the lions?’ Daniel answered, ‘O king, live forever!
My God sent his angel, and he shut the mouths of the lions.
They have not hurt me, because I was found innocent in his
sight. Nor have I ever done any wrong before you, O king.’
The king was overjoyed and gave orders to lift Daniel out of
the den. And when Daniel was lifted from the den, no wound
was found on him, because he had trusted in his God. At the
king’s command, the men who had falsely accused Daniel
were brought in and thrown into the lions’ den, along with
their wives and children. And before they reached the floor
of the den, the lions overpowered them and crushed all their
bones. Then King Darius wrote to all the peoples, nations
and men of every language throughout the land: ‘May you
prosper greatly! I issue a decree that in every part of my
kingdom people must fear and reverence the God of Daniel.
For he is the living God and he endures forever; his kingdom
will not be destroyed, his dominion will never end. He
rescues and he saves; he performs signs and wonders in the
heavens and on the Earth. He has rescued Daniel from the
power of the lions.’ So Daniel prospered during the reign of
Darius [the Mede] and the reign of Cyrus the Persian.” (Daniel
6:19-28, insertion mine) Thoughtfully consider the profound
experience of Darius that morning. Upon hearing Daniel’s voice, a
pagan king was given every reason to put his faith in the God of
Daniel. The tomb was opened and “a dead man” walked out! The
king immediately issued another decree requiring every person in
his kingdom to fear and reverence the God of Daniel, “the Jew.” The
news about Daniel’s miraculous deliverance was told everywhere!
When the intense hatred of the Chaldeans for the Jews is
considered, the significance of Darius’ actions really stands out.
Because of Daniel’s loyalty, the God of Heaven was exalted to the
highest position by a heathen king! This demonstrates an
interesting point that all religious people would do well to
158 Chapter 5 – Daniel 6

remember. The objective of serving the God of Heaven is to bring

honor and glory to God, not to the superiority of one’s religion.
Israel Set Free
The story of Daniel’s miraculous deliverance, and the immediate
destruction of his enemies by the same lions that refused to eat him
has been closely examined in this book for some important reasons.
First, remember that God’s timing is always perfect! Evidently, the
lions’ den episode happened during Darius’ first year, 538/7 B.C.
This allowed time for Darius to become acquainted with Daniel and
to develop such confidence in him that he wanted to make him the
number two man in his kingdom. As we are about to see, the timing
of the lions’ den event is too perfect to be a coincidence!
God used the hatred of the administrators and the loyalty of Daniel
in a way that no one could have anticipated. I believe the events
unfolded as follows: When Daniel sought the Lord in sackcloth and
ashes for instructions on what he should do to facilitate the
deliverance of Israel, God heard Daniel’s prayer and gave him
something that he did not know he was about to need. God gave
Daniel peace in the face of death. This peace is reflected in Daniel’s
courageous action after he learned about the law. God did not give
Daniel wisdom to outfox the evil administrators, and God did not
rain down plagues on Babylon like He did in Egypt. God had a
better plan in mind.
After Daniel violated the king’s law, God rewarded Daniel’s loyalty
with protection and enormous notoriety. (Who else has spent a
night in a den of wild and ravenous lions and lived to tell about it?)
Simultaneously, God eliminated an enormous obstacle that stood in
the way of delivering His people. God granted Darius a legal
opportunity to purge his government of men who were disloyal to
the higher interests of their king. Politically speaking, the death of
these administrators made releasing the Jews a manageable
problem for the king, even though Darius did not know the Jews
were about to be set free. After Darius destroyed the administrators
who hated Daniel, the king promoted Daniel to the number two
position in his kingdom and no one dared to complain!
Evidently, King Darius died soon after this event (the following
year) and King Cyrus (the Persian) absorbed the territory of Darius
Chapter 5 – Daniel 6 159

into his expanding kingdom. Therefore, the ascension year of Cyrus

over the province of Babylon was 537/6 B.C., and his first calendar
year was 536/5 B.C. Because of Daniel’s notoriety from the lions’
den event and because he was the highest official in Darius’
kingdom, Daniel became well acquainted with King Cyrus during
his ascension year. During 536/5 B.C., which was the final year or
seventieth year of captivity, King Cyrus met with Daniel, and
Daniel informed the Persian king that the God of Heaven had
chosen Cyrus to be a great king before he was even born. Daniel
showed Cyrus the writings of the prophet Isaiah, where Cyrus is
called by name in Scripture a hundred years before Cyrus was born.
(Isaiah 45:1-4) When Daniel explained to King Cyrus why he was
fasting and praying – the behavior that ultimately sent him to the
lions’ den – the king’s heart was moved at the loyalty and devotion
of this elderly man to the Supreme God over Heaven and Earth.
Daniel told Cyrus that the God of Heaven had appointed the Persian
king to set the Jews free, “without price or reward,” (Isaiah 45:13)
for the purpose of rebuilding His temple. Cyrus was honored to
learn of God’s approval and blessings, and he issued the decree in
Daniel’s presence during the seventieth year, a Friday year, in 536/5
B.C. Free at last! Israel was free to enter Canaan a second time. It
is interesting to note that Israel’s first full year in Canaan after the
Babylonian captivity was a Sabbath year. This beautifully parallels
their first full year in Canaan after Joshua led them across the
Jordan into the Promised Land. In both instances, the slaves had
been set free to enjoy the Sabbath year in the Promised Land. The
Bible says, “In the first year of Cyrus king of Persia, in order
to fulfill the word of the Lord spoken by Jeremiah, the Lord
moved the heart of Cyrus king of Persia to make a
proclamation throughout his realm and to put it in writing:
‘This is what Cyrus king of Persia says: “The Lord, the God of
heaven, has given me all the kingdoms of the earth and he
has appointed me to build a temple for him at Jerusalem in
Judah. Anyone of his people among you–may his God be with
him, and let him go up to Jerusalem in Judah and build the
temple of the Lord, the God of Israel, the God who is in
Jerusalem.” ’ ” (Ezra 1:1-3) The timing could not have been more
perfect. The decree of Cyrus ended seventy years of captivity
(counting inclusively). It is amazing how God took Daniel through
160 Chapter 5 – Daniel 6

the lions’ den so that he could present God’s will to a pagan king who
controlled the province of Babylon, as well as the territory of
Canaan. This decree was only possible because Cyrus ruled over the
province of Babylon where the Jews were captives, as well as the
territory of Judea where Jerusalem was located. God solved the
political and economic problems. God’s timing is so perfect. His
ways are so magnificent! Remember, God required slaves to be
released at the end of the Friday year (the sixth year), and this is
exactly what He did for the nation of Israel. The captives were
emancipated from slavery in 536 B.C., a Friday year.
Calendar of Events

Julian Years
1 2 3 4
January January January January

539 B.C. 538 B.C. 537 B.C. 536 B.C. 535 B.C.

Tuesday Year Wednesday Thursday Friday Year

Spring Spring Spring Spring

Jewish Years
Chart 5.1

1. Babylon falls, ascension year for Darius

2. First year for Darius, lions’ den
3. Darius dies, ascension year for Cyrus
4. First year for Cyrus, frees the Jews
Chapter 5 – Daniel 6 161

Note: There are three good reasons for concluding that the Darius
discussed in Daniel 6 died in 537* B.C. First, even though they were
contemporary kings, Darius and Cyrus did not rule over the
province of Babylon at the same time. History reveals that Babylon
fell in 539 B.C. The Bible says that Cyrus, in the first year of his
reign, which was the seventieth year of Israel’s captivity, issued a
decree restoring the Jews to their land. “The land enjoyed its
Sabbath rests; all the time of its desolation it rested, until the
seventy years were completed in fulfillment of the word of
the Lord spoken by Jeremiah. In the first year of Cyrus king
of Persia, in order to fulfill the word of the Lord spoken by
Jeremiah, the Lord moved the heart of Cyrus king of Persia
to make a proclamation throughout his realm and to put it in
writing. . . .” (2 Chronicles 36:21,22) If the seventy years in
Jeremiah 25:11 began in the year 605 B.C. as most historians say,
the decree of Cyrus had to be issued in the Friday year, 536 B.C.
Israel’s first full year in their homeland was a Sabbath year. (This
timing is consistent with God’s command that slaves were to be set
free for the Sabbath year rest. Jeremiah 34:14) The count of years
and actions of the kings easily align in this case. Babylon fell in 539
B.C. and Darius died in 537 B.C. Cyrus’ ascension year over the
province of Babylon was 537 B.C. and his first year as king was
Friday year, 536 B.C., the year he wrote the decree.
Second, history also reveals that Cyrus had been a Persian king for
more than twenty years before he began to rule over the province of
Babylon. For Cyrus to have “a first year” as king over the province
of Babylon in 536 B.C., Darius had to vacate the throne by dying in
537 B.C. The Bible confirms that Daniel served under these two
kings saying, “So Daniel prospered during the reign of Darius
and the reign of Cyrus the Persian.” (Daniel 6:28) Of course,
this text could also be interpreted to mean that Daniel prospered
during the co-regent reign of both kings. The problem with this
argument is that Daniel could not prosper under a king who did not
rule over Babylon until the death of Darius in 537 B.C.
The third reason for concluding that Darius died shortly after taking
office as king of Babylon comes from written history. The
Nabonidus Chronicle, a cuneiform document which describes the fall
of Babylon, indicates that an elderly man, Ugbaru, the governor of
Gutium, entered Babylon without a battle on Tishri 16 (the seventh
162 Chapter 5 – Daniel 6

month of a year in a Spring-to-Spring year). Daniel 5:31 says Darius

was 62 years old when he took over the kingdom of Babylon. The
Chronicle also indicates that Ugbaru installed satraps to govern the
province of Babylon. The Bible says, “It pleased Darius to
appoint 120 satraps to rule throughout the kingdom.” (Daniel
6:1) The Chronicle says that Ugbaru died soon after he began to
reign. He died on the 11th of Arahshamnu (the Jewish equivalent to
Adar, the twelfth month of a Spring-to-Spring year). The province of
Babylon mourned his royal death for seven days. According to the
Nabonidus Chronicle, Cyrus appointed Gubaru as governor over
Babylon after Ugbaru died and Gubaru evidently assumed the name
“Darius.” The Bible and other historical documents indicate the
second Darius ruled for several years. For example, “The temple
was completed on the third day of the month Adar, in the
sixth year of the reign of King Darius.” (Ezra 6:15)
When all of the pieces of history are brought together, there is one
explanation that resolves the puzzle. Once the reign of the kings is
determined and once we understand that two men, Ugbaru and
Gubaru, both using the name “Darius,” ruled in Babylon during this
time-frame, the actions and dates given in the Bible fall into perfect
harmony.
*For purposes of discussion, the years mentioned in this addendum
are singular instead of defined as 538/7 B.C.
 Chapter 6
Daniel 9 –“God’
–“God’ss Timing Is So PPerfect”
Timing erfect”
“. . . Who foretold this long ago, who declared it from
the distant past? Was it not I, the Lord? And there is
no God apart from me, a righteous God and a Savior;
there is none but me.”
– Isaiah 45:21

Introduction
Some of the chapters in the book of Daniel are not in chronological
order. For example, Daniel 7 occurred chronologically before Daniel
6. This point is mentioned because the prayer recorded in Daniel 9
occurred during the year that Daniel was sent to the lions’ den
(Daniel 6). Even though the prayer recorded in Daniel 9 was left
unfinished because of Gabriel’s unexpected visit, it was included in
the book of Daniel for at least two reasons: First, the Bible tells us
that God sent an answer to Daniel while he was praying. This
information assures us that God hears the prayers of His children
and He responds according to His infinite wisdom. Second, this
special prayer has been preserved in the Bible because of its
amazing content. Daniel states many profound truths in his prayer
that everyone should thoughtfully consider.
Part I
The story in Daniel 9 occurred during 538 B.C. and Daniel knew the
seventy years of captivity were drawing to a close. He was deeply
concerned about Israel’s release from captivity and was anxious to
fulfill whatever role the Lord might want him to play. So, Daniel
turned to the Lord with humility, fasting and prayer. “In the first
year of Darius the [grand] son of Ahasuerus, of the seed of the
Medes, which was made king over the realm of the
Chaldeans; In the first year of his reign I Daniel understood
by books the number of the years, whereof the word of the
Lord came to Jeremiah the prophet, that he would
accomplish seventy years in the desolations of Jerusalem.
164 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

And I set my face unto the Lord God, to seek by prayer and
supplications, with fasting, and sackcloth, and ashes:”
(Daniel 9:1-3, KJV, insertion mine)
Commentary on Part I
Consider some of the concerns and concepts that must have been in
Daniel’s mind before he began to pray:
1. Daniel knew that God had set the descendants of
Abraham apart from other nations for a glorious purpose.
(Exodus 19:4-6; Isaiah 42:6)
2. Daniel knew why his people were captives in Babylon.
3. Daniel knew that Israel’s deliverance would have to be
“an Act of God.”
4. Daniel knew that God kept vigil, and He would not forget
His promise to free His people from captivity. (Exodus
12:42)
5. Daniel knew that God had set a date for the release of His
people and “the Friday year” of 536/5 B.C. was the
seventieth year of captivity.
6. Daniel believed he had been placed in a high
administrative position to somehow facilitate the release
of his people, but he did not know what to do.
Now that some of Daniel’s concerns have been identified, carefully
examine Daniel’s confession and prayer:
Part II
“And I prayed unto the Lord my God, and made my
confession, and said, O Lord, the great and dreadful God,
keeping the covenant and mercy to them that love him, and
to them that keep his commandments; We have sinned, and
have committed iniquity, and have done wickedly, and have
rebelled, even by departing from thy precepts and from thy
judgments: Neither have we hearkened unto thy servants the
prophets, which spake in thy name to our kings, our princes,
and our fathers, and to all the people of the land.
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 165

“O Lord, righteousness belongeth unto thee, but unto us

confusion of faces [shame and embarrassment], as at this day;
to the men of Judah, and to the inhabitants of Jerusalem,
and unto all Israel, that are near, and that are far off,
through all the countries whither thou hast driven them,
because of their trespass that they have trespassed against
thee. O Lord, to us belongeth confusion of face, to our kings,
to our princes, and to our fathers, because we have sinned
against thee. To the Lord our God belong mercies and
forgivenesses, though we have rebelled against him; Neither
have we obeyed the voice of the Lord our God, to walk in his
laws, which he set before us by his servants the prophets.
“Yea, all Israel have transgressed thy law, even by departing,
that they might not obey thy voice; therefore the curse is
poured upon us, and the oath that is written in the law of
Moses the servant of God, because we have sinned against
him. And he hath confirmed his words, which he spake
against us, and against our judges that judged us, by
bringing upon us a great evil: for under the whole heaven
hath not been done as hath been done upon Jerusalem. As it
is written in the law of Moses, all this evil is come upon us:
yet made we not our prayer before the Lord our God, that we
might turn from our iniquities, and understand thy truth.”
(Daniel 9:4-13, KJV, insertion mine)
Commentary on Part II
Daniel’s fasting and prayer must have been motivated by three
factors. First, fasting is something we can do when we want God to
consider the intensity of our heart’s desire. Second, Daniel
humiliated (embarrassed) himself with sackcloth and ashes to show
God that he was willing to do anything God wanted him to do to
facilitate the release of his people. Third, Daniel knew about
Solomon’s prayer, which the Lord confirmed by sending fire from
Heaven when Solomon dedicated the temple in Jerusalem. Solomon
prayed: “When they [Israel] sin against you – for there is no
one who does not sin – and you become angry with them and
give them over to the enemy, who takes them captive to a
land far away or near; and if they have a change of heart in
the land where they are held captive, and repent and plead
166 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

with you in the land of their captivity and say, ‘We have
sinned, we have done wrong and acted wickedly’; and if they
turn back to you with all their heart and soul in the land of
their captivity where they were taken, and pray toward the
land you gave their fathers, toward the city you have chosen
and toward the temple I have built for your Name; then from
heaven, your dwelling place, hear their prayer and their
pleas, and uphold their cause. And forgive your people, who
have sinned against you.” (2 Chronicles 6:36-39, insertion mine)
Given the content and eloquent language in Daniel’s prayer, it is
possible that Daniel prepared this prayer for a specific worship
service. It is also possible that he prepared this prayer to meet one
of the conditions required for deliverance! Notice what the Lord had
said when He gave the covenant to Israel at Sinai: “[If you rebel
against me] You will perish among the nations; the land of
your enemies will devour you. Those of you who are left will
waste away in the lands of their enemies because of their
sins; also because of their fathers’ sins they will waste away.
But, if they will confess their sins and the sins of their fathers
– their treachery against me and their hostility toward me,
which made me hostile toward them so that I sent them into
the land of their enemies – then when their uncircumcised
hearts are humbled and they pay for their sin, I will
remember my covenant with Jacob and my covenant with
Isaac and my covenant with Abraham, and I will remember
the land.” (Leviticus 26:38-42, italics and insertion mine)
Daniel’s prayer indicates that he well understood the terms and
conditions of the covenant between Israel and God. Daniel
acknowledged that God had afflicted Israel with a curse as the
covenant stipulated. Daniel knew that Israel deserved captivity
because of rebellion. Daniel justified God’s righteous actions and he
openly confessed that Israel had insulted God. He prayed, “. . .
therefore the curse is poured upon us, and the oath that is
written in the law of Moses the servant of God, because we
have sinned against him [the Lord our God].” (Daniel 9:11)
Bilateral Covenant
The curse which God placed on Israel is difficult for some people to
understand, so some background information may prove helpful.
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 167

God made a unilateral covenant (a one-sided unconditional covenant)

with Abraham. God promised Abraham that a) all nations would be
blessed through him, b) his descendants would be as numerous as the
stars, and c) they would inherit a specific parcel of land. At the
Exodus, God made a bilateral (a two-sided or mutually agreed upon)
conditional covenant with Israel, and it may be summarized with
these words: “If you will be my people, I will be your God.” (Leviticus
26:12) However, “if you choose to love other gods and rebel against
my laws, I will destroy you.” (Leviticus 26:14-39) Bible history
indicates that God destroyed Israel several times. The Bible indicates
that God began destroying Israel with the first generation that came
out of Egypt. The first generation was put to death in the wilderness
because of rebellion!
The nation of Israel could uphold their end of the bilateral covenant
only if a majority in Israel loved and obeyed the Lord. Moses knew
this was a crucial point. In his farewell address to the second
generation of Israel – the generation that entered the Promised
Land – he said, “Love the Lord your God with all your heart
and with all your soul and with all your strength.”
(Deuteronomy 6:5) He also wrote, “Do not seek revenge or bear a
grudge against one of your people, but love your neighbor as
yourself. I am the Lord.” (Leviticus 19:18) According to Jesus,
these two commandments were the greatest commandments spoken
by Moses. (Matthew 22:36-40)
It has been said in this book that God’s treatment of Israel is a
mirror reflecting how He deals with all nations. The inverse of this
statement is also true. Israel’s treatment of God is a mirror
reflecting how the human race treats God. The carnal nature of
individual Jews made Israel’s corporate behavior rebellious and
ungrateful. A grateful company of slaves was willing and eager to
enter into a covenant with God at the base of Mt. Sinai. However,
forty days later, they were dancing around a golden calf. After two
years, this same group of people became so rebellious that God
refused to allow them to enter the Promised Land. (Numbers 14)
God confined that generation to the wilderness for forty years so
that all of the adults (except Caleb and Joshua) would die without
receiving what had been promised to them. (Hebrews 3:10,11) This
is a crucial point. Many people have wondered, “Why did God deal
so harshly with Israel? Would it have been easier for Him to
168 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

abandon Israel and start over with another nation? This almost
happened. God almost destroyed Israel when they bowed down and
worshiped the golden calf in the shadow of Mt. Sinai, but Moses
interceded. (Exodus 32:10) Consider God’s love. From the
beginning, God foreknew the offspring of Abraham would fail, so
why did He enter into a covenant with them? This is a profound
point: God does not treat us on the basis of what He knows the
outcome will be. Instead, God deals with His subjects on the basis of
love. God loved Abraham and He did everything a heart of love
could do to accomplish His plans through Abraham’s children. God
wisely put “a destruction clause” into His bilateral (two-sided)
conditional covenant with the offspring of Abraham because God
had made a unilateral covenant (one-sided non-conditional) with
Abraham. In other words, God unconditionally promised the
patriarch Abraham that his descendants would inherit a specific
parcel of land. God foreknew that Abraham’s offspring would rebel
against Him time after time, and the only way He could fulfill
everything He promised to Abraham was through a provision in the
covenant that would provide for rebels to be destroyed! Every time
God destroyed Israel, He started over with a remnant. When Israel
rejected Messiah, God did not abandon Israel and turn to the
Gentiles. God redefined Israel by making Gentile believers in
Christ the heirs of Abraham! (Galatians 3:28,29; Ephesians 2) By
doing this, God will be able to fulfill the unconditional covenant He
gave to Abraham!
Blessings and Curses
God’s bilateral covenant with Israel was conditional. The covenant
began with “If you will be my people, I will be your God.” To
motivate Israel to be faithful to the covenant between them, God put
an important balance between blessings and curses in the covenant.
This balance mirrors the two options from which mankind can
choose. Our first option is to love God, submit to His laws and enjoy
His presence, favor and blessings. Our second option is to rebel
against God and experience the pleasures of sin for a short season
and suffer the consequences of sin and destruction. (Leviticus 25;
Deuteronomy 28; Ezekiel 18; Romans 8) These are the only options
available to mankind, because everything in the universe belongs to
God. People who wish to live forever in God’s kingdom cannot live
in rebellion against God because God will not tolerate rebellion in
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 169

His house. God cast Lucifer and a third of the angels out of Heaven
because of rebellion, and God cast Israel out of His favor for the
same reason. (Ezekiel 28:17; Revelation 12:7-9; Matthew 23:38)
Consider God’s words to Israel: “Follow my decrees and be
careful to obey my laws, and you will live safely in the land.”
(Leviticus 25:18) “If in spite of this [a series of punitive
judgments] you still do not listen to me but continue to be
hostile toward me, then in my anger I will be hostile toward
you, and I myself will punish you for your sins seven times
over.” (Leviticus 26:27,28, insertion mine)
God has demonstrated through Israel’s long history that perfect
laws cannot change a rebellious heart. (Romans 8:7) God blessed
Israel with His magnificent laws and promised them every material
benefit if they would follow Him, but unfortunately, God’s generosity
did not cure their rebellion. Instead of becoming a conduit through
which God’s blessings could flow to all the nations around them,
Israel selfishly appropriated God’s blessings to themselves.
However, we should not condemn Israel too harshly because every
nation has followed the same path! Remember, Israel’s treatment of
God is a mirror reflecting how mankind treats God. A carnal heart
can change. The carnal heart can even do “a good deed” every now
and then, but good deeds do not transform the carnal heart into the
type of heart that God wants. The root problem with the carnal
heart is that it cannot love God and others as much as it loves itself.
Believe it or not, selfishness and rebellion against God are genetic!
Human beings are born with a carnal nature. This is why everyone
who wants to be a part of God’s kingdom must be born again. All
sinners can receive a new heart if they surrender to God’s will. The
carnal heart is self-seeking; therefore, we cannot joyfully submit to
God’s will until we surrender to His will. If we surrender daily to
go, to be and to do all as God directs, He will do something within us
that we cannot do for ourselves. God will transform our selfish
hearts into selfless hearts through the power of His Spirit. A loving
heart does not think less of itself, it thinks more of others than
itself. The born-again experience does not occur in groups of people;
it occurs within the heart of one individual at a time. Because most
people in Israel did not experience the new birth, the nation of Israel
corporately failed to reach the glorious potential which God offered.
Israel’s history indicates that most people in Israel were constantly
170 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

rebellious toward God at any given time. Israel destroyed the

prophets God sent, and ultimately, God destroyed His temple and
His city along with two-thirds of His people. Then He put the
survivors in Babylonian exile for seventy years. (Ezekiel 5:11,12)
This Land Is My Land
Few Christians today understand this point: “. . . [The Lord said to
Israel] the land is mine and you are but aliens and my
tenants.” (Leviticus 25:23, insertion mine) Many people believe
that God’s promise to Abraham is still binding, and they believe that
modern Israel is entitled to the land that was inhabited by the
Palestinians for the past few centuries. This is not true! God did
not grant Canaan to Israel without conditions. (Leviticus 18;
Deuteronomy 28) In fact, the same requirements hold true for all
nations. God owns all of Earth. He created the continents, and
through the blood of Christ, He purchased humanity back to
Himself. (Romans 5:18) God allows nations to occupy a parcel of
land for as long as that nation upholds principles of righteousness.
(Acts 17:26) When rebellion within a nation becomes so great that
there is no recovery, God cauterizes the malignancy of sin by
sending destruction to that nation. He overthrows offending
governments and slows the degenerate process of sin by killing off
most, if not all, of its inhabitants. God turns the land over to
another nation and the process starts over. King Nebuchadnezzar
thought Babylon was an invincible city, but Babylon became
decadent and rebellious, so God opened the city gates giving the
city and the land to the Medes and Persians in a single night.
(Daniel 5)
Part III
The prayer of Daniel continues: “Therefore hath the Lord
watched upon the evil, and brought it upon us: for the Lord
our God is righteous in all his works which he doeth: for we
obeyed not his voice. And now, O Lord our God, that hast
brought thy people forth out of the land of Egypt with a
mighty hand, and hast gotten thee renown, as at this day; we
have sinned, we have done wickedly. O Lord, according to all
thy righteousness, I beseech thee, let thine anger and thy
fury be turned away from thy city Jerusalem, thy holy
mountain: because for our sins, and for the iniquities of our
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 171

fathers, Jerusalem and thy people are become a reproach to all

that are about us.
“Now therefore, O our God, hear the prayer of thy servant, and
his supplications, and cause thy face to shine upon thy
sanctuary that is desolate, for the Lord’s sake. O my God,
incline thine ear, and hear; open thine eyes, and behold our
desolations, and the city which is called by thy name: for we
do not present our supplications before thee for our
righteousnesses, but for thy great mercies. O Lord, hear; O
Lord, forgive; O Lord, hearken and do; defer not, for thine
own sake, O my God: for thy city and thy people are called by
thy name.” (Daniel 9:14-19, KJV)
Commentary on Part III
Daniel’s prayer and Jesus’ prayer recorded in John 17 are the best
examples of intercessory prayer in the Bible. Prayer coming from a
contrite heart always gains an audience with God. (Psalm 51:17;
Isaiah 57:15; Isaiah 66:2) “The Lord detests the sacrifice of the
wicked, but the prayer of the upright pleases him.” (Proverbs
15:8)
The Bible indicates that God answers the prayers of a humble
petitioner in one of three ways: “Yes, No or Wait.” (Psalm 66:18; 1
John 1:9; Hebrews 5:7) If, in His omniscient wisdom, God says “No”
or “Wait,” He knows the consternation His decision will bring, so
God sends peace in the middle of the storm if we are willing to
receive it. Jesus said, “Peace I leave with you; my peace I give
you. I do not give to you as the world gives. Do not let your
hearts be troubled and do not be afraid.” (John 14:27) At best,
this world offers a peace that is temporal and fleeting. The carnal
nature is at peace when everything is going according to its will, but
a new disturbance can rise out of nowhere and ruin its peace in a
heartbeat. Jesus offers a different type of peace than the world can
give. His peace transcends the anxieties of life. (Isaiah 26:3) When
God’s peace rests on us, we have joy and we cease worrying –
knowing that He is in control. Of course, this does not mean that
God’s decisions will necessarily be what we think is best; rather,
God’s peace comes from knowing that He will make the best of the
situation. Daniel went peacefully to the lions’ den and his three
friends went peacefully to the fiery furnace. They were concerned,
172 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

but they had peace about their decision. We find and receive God’s
peace “which passes all understanding” when we submit to the
wisdom and plans of a sovereign God. Faith in God is not easy to
maintain. Israel’s history proves this. Without faith, it is impossible
to please Him. (Hebrews 11:6)
Part IV
“While I was speaking and praying, confessing my sin and
the sin of my people Israel and making my request to the
Lord my God for his holy hill [or mountain] – while I was still
in prayer, Gabriel, the man I had seen in the earlier vision,
came to me in swift flight about the time of the evening
sacrifice. He instructed me and said to me, “Daniel, I have
now come to give you insight and understanding [into the
earlier vision]. As soon as you began to pray, an answer was
given, which I have come to tell you, for you are highly
esteemed. Therefore, consider the message and understand
the [earlier] vision:” (Daniel 9:20-23, italics and insertions mine)
Commentary on Part IV
The appearance of the angel Gabriel suddenly interrupted Daniel’s
prayer. Gabriel and Daniel first met during the vision recorded in
Daniel 8. So, “the vision” mentioned in verse 21 refers to the vision
of the ram, goat, and horn power which occurred about twelve years
earlier, in 550 B.C. When Gabriel appeared, he said, “As soon as
you began to pray, an answer was given, which I have come
to tell you, for you are highly esteemed.” Daniel’s prayer takes
about three minutes to read out loud. Since Gabriel flew to Daniel’s
location with an answer as soon as he began to pray, we have to
conclude that we are not far away from our Father’s ear. (For
comparison, it takes about eight minutes for light to travel from the
Sun to Earth.)
Gabriel’s remarks to Daniel total less than 250 words and the casual
Bible student will find them to be cryptic and obscure. Although
Gabriel’s words were few, they are packed with meaning. Since
many people do not understand the architecture of Daniel (which
was sealed up until the time of the end) or how the Jubilee Calendar
works, many expositors have distorted and manipulated Gabriel’s
words so that millions of Christians anticipate a series of prophetic
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 173

events that will never occur. This is a horrible tragedy in the making.
Bible prophecy is about to unfold in a way that is contrary to the
views of millions of people, and when many Christians are
disappointed, they will feel very bitter towards God and their
religious leaders who mislead them.
The Question
Gabriel said “an answer” was given when Daniel began to pray, so
what was Daniel’s question? A personal question had churned
within Daniel’s heart for twelve years. Daniel wanted to understand
the previous vision, because he was told during the vision of Daniel 8
that God’s people would be destroyed by the horn power from the
north. This information was contrary to everything Daniel believed
about Israel’s destiny. Remember Daniel’s mindset before he began
to pray? (See my earlier commentary on Part I.) Daniel knew that
God had selected the descendants of Abraham from among the
nations of Earth to be trustees of the everlasting gospel. Daniel also
understood that God had chosen Israel to be a light for the Gentiles.
Israel was to show the world the way to God. Even more, Daniel
knew that God had promised Abraham that his children would be as
numerous as the stars of the sky when God established His kingdom
on Earth. However, Daniel was disturbed that Israel was not
included in any of the previous visions! Nothing was included
about Israel in the visions of Daniel 2 or Daniel 7, and Daniel 8
indicates that God’s people would be destroyed by the horn power:
“He [the horn power] will destroy the mighty men and the holy
people.” (Daniel 8:24, insertion mine)
Daniel was a devout Jew and he had absorbed a very strong
prophetic paradigm as he grew up. In Daniel’s mind there was no
question that his people would play a prominent role when God set
up His kingdom on Earth. Jewish culture instilled this prophetic
destiny in every child from birth and Daniel was no exception.
Daniel believed the Jewish nation would be exalted among the
nations of the world as a kingdom of priests. (Exodus 19:3-7)
However, reality produced a stark contrast in Daniel’s mind. Israel
was not a kingdom of priests. Israel was once again a nation of
prisoners in a foreign land, and to make matters worse, there was
no reference in his previous visions to a glorious role for the Jews.
In fact, it was the other way around. Daniel learned the horn would
174 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

destroy “the holy people.” This information greatly distressed the

elder statesman.
God is so wise in everything He does. He solved two problems with
one action when He sent Gabriel to Daniel. First, God gave Daniel
the information he wanted, although “the answer” was not what
Daniel had hoped to hear. Second, God ordained that Gabriel’s
words would be published so that future generations would know
about His plans for Israel. God wanted Israel to know that His plans
were much more inclusive than merely allowing the Jews to inhabit
Jerusalem again. God wanted Israel to know that their restoration
was deliberate and conditional. Israel would be given one last
chance to accomplish the mission and purpose for which He had
called them out of Egyptian slavery, and now, Babylonian captivity.
The Answer
Gabriel said, “I have now come to give you insight and
understanding [into the earlier vision]. As soon as you began to
pray, an answer was given, which I have come to tell you, for
you are highly esteemed. Therefore, consider the message
and understand the [earlier] vision.” (Daniel 9:22-23, insertions
mine) When Gabriel began to speak, the angel said nothing about
Daniel’s prayer, that is, the imminent fulfillment of Jeremiah’s
prophecy and the release of Israel from Babylon. This is interesting
because deliverance from Babylon was the focus of Daniel’s prayer.
Instead of presenting details about deliverance from Babylon,
Gabriel presented a sequence of events that integrated the nation of
Israel into the earlier vision of Daniel 8. This sequence of events
spans 527 years (457 B.C. - A.D. 70), and this span of time began
during the time of the ram which Daniel saw in the previous vision.
(Daniel 8)
Plan A – Plan B
In essence, Gabriel revealed “Plan B.” God had a back-up plan for
Israel because Israel had irreparably ruined “Plan A” which was
God’s original plan for the nation. A new generation of Jews were
about to be freed from captivity to do God’s will. It is interesting to
note how deliverance from Babylon parallels Israel’s deliverance
from Egypt. The first generation had to die because of rebellion
before God could start with a new generation. According to Gabriel,
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 175

God had much more planned for Israel than merely returning the
Jews to Jerusalem. God wanted to establish His eternal kingdom on
Earth within 500 years! This could be accomplished if Israel
fulfilled certain terms and conditions. Consider the following
paraphrase of Gabriel’s words (Daniel 9:24-27):
1. Seventy weeks of probationary time are determined upon
Israel to: a) finish the years allotted for sin on Earth, b) to
bring in atonement for sin and establish everlasting
righteousness, c) to seal up this vision and its predictions
so that its contents might not be known, and d) to anoint
the Messiah.
2. From the issuing of the decree to restore and rebuild
Jerusalem until Messiah begins His ministry, there will
be one Jubilee cycle of 49 years plus 62 weeks (434 years)
for a total of 483 years.
3. In the middle of the seventieth week, Messiah will be
rejected by His people and be put to death. The execution
of Messiah will confirm the unilateral covenant of
salvation which God gave to Adam and Eve, and Messiah
will put an end to the sacrifices and offerings required
since the fall of Adam and Eve.
4. After Jerusalem and the temple are rebuilt, they will be
totally destroyed again because of rebellion.
5. Wars and desolations have been decreed upon the Jews
and Jerusalem until the end of time.
6. The destroyer, Lucifer, will continue his deadly work
until the end of time.
Gabriel’s statements are not difficult to understand if a person has a
working knowledge of three subjects: 1) God’s use of unilateral and
bilateral covenants with Adam and Eve, and Abraham and his
descendants; 2) the operation of God’s Jubilee Calendar; and 3) what
history reveals about the timing of Christ’s ministry on Earth.
When these three matters are properly understood, the events
predicted by Gabriel were fulfilled with a precision that is
astonishing! Even more, history confirms the alignment of these
events within the prophetic matrix that began unfolding in Daniel 2.
176 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

(Note: A study on unilateral and bilateral covenants is found in

Chapters 7 and 8 of my companion volume, Jesus, The Alpha and
The Omega. A study on the operation of the Jubilee Calendar is
found in my reference paper, Great Clocks from God.)
Now that we have some ideas about Gabriel’s comments, let us
examine Gabriel’s six statements in detail:
Statement 1
Gabriel said, “Seventy weeks are determined upon thy people
and upon thy holy city, to finish the transgression, and to
make an end of sins, and to make reconciliation for iniquity,
and to bring in everlasting righteousness, and to seal up the
vision and prophecy, and to anoint the most Holy.” (Daniel
9:24, KJV) Many Christians have heard about Daniel’s seventy
weeks, but few have heard the truth about the seventy weeks.
Many scholars claim that sixty-nine of the seventy weeks occurred
long ago, but the seventieth week is still to come. This theory forces
a large gap of many centuries between the sixty-ninth week and the
seventieth week. It will be demonstrated that this gap is artificial
and contrived. Inserting a gap of many centuries between the sixty-
ninth week and the seventieth week is like inserting a gap of many
days between Wednesday and Thursday. The continuum of time
cannot be broken. The seventy weeks are seventy consecutive
weeks. Before we complete this chapter, we will see that Jesus
Himself confirms the seventy weeks are 490 consecutive years.
What Is a Week?
What did Gabriel mean when he said, “seventy weeks?” Why did
God choose to measure time in weeks and not in years? God’s choice
of words, as in “seventy weeks” is highly important but poorly
understood because of a property called synchrony.
When God created the world, He established four great “clocks” for
measuring time. The first clock was called a “day,” and the
synchrony of a day is set at sundown. A day begins and ends at
sundown. The second clock was called a “month,” and the synchrony
of a month is set by a new moon. A month begins and ends with a
new moon. The third clock was called a “year,” and the synchrony of
a year is determined by the first new moon on or after the Spring
Equinox. The fourth clock was a perpetual cycle of seven days called
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 177

a “week,” and the synchrony of each week begins with the first day
and ends with the seventh day. The first day of the week is always
Sunday and the seventh day of the week is Saturday or God’s
Sabbath of rest. In biblical terms, a week is not Wednesday through
Tuesday. Wednesday through Tuesday is seven days, but not a
week. A week is a perpetual cycle of time that remains aligned (or
synchronous) with the seven days of Creation. (See Chart 6.1)
About 2,500 years after Creation, God added three more clocks to
the four established at Creation. God imposed all seven clocks on
Israel at the time of the Exodus so that Israel could accurately track
the passage of time and seasons, and observe His feasts at the
appointed time. (Exodus 12) The fifth clock was a “week of seven
months.” The sixth clock was a “week of seven years,” and the
seventh clock was a “week of seven weeks” or forty-nine years. The
operation and synchrony of these seven clocks is marvelous. These
clocks enabled the ancient Jews to measure the passage of time, and
today they allow us to understand something about God’s larger
timing and plans for Earth.
Seven Clocks from God
1. Day – sundown to sundown
2. Month – new moon to new moon
3. Year – first new moon on or after the Spring Equinox
4. Week – Sunday through Sabbath
5. Week of seven months – synchronized with the month of
Nisan
6. Week of seven years – synchronized with the year of the
Exodus
7. Week of seven weeks – synchronized with the year of the
Exodus
When properly understood, these seven clocks produce a self-
correcting calendar which remains properly coordinated with the
Sun, moon and the four seasons. A self-correcting calendar is not a
small feat when considering the complexity of measuring time via
planetary motion. When Israel used God’s clocks, their measurement
178 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

of time was never off by more than one day in any given month. If
they happen to miscalculate the arrival of a new month, the error
was easily corrected at the beginning of the following month.
You may have noticed that the three clocks God gave to Israel were
based on a template of Creation’s weekly cycle. Because the weekly
cycle was a template, the weekly cycle can be used to represent
different periods of time by changing the scale of time. For example,
a week of days and a week of years follow the same template, but
the scale of time changes from days to years. Each clock has a
special synchrony, that is, a specific alignment. For example, the
weekly cycle is reset every Sunday because the Creation of the world
began on Sunday. Similarly, “a week of seven years” aligns with
“the Sunday year” of the Exodus (when this clock began to operate).
“A week of seven weeks,” which amounts to forty-nine years, aligns
with the Sunday year of the Exodus. (Leviticus 25:8) (See Charts
6.1-4.) We will discover that an understanding of these clocks and
their synchrony is critical to understanding why God said, “seventy
weeks.”
The Importance of Synchrony
Because each week starts and stops in perpetual alignment with
Creation’s week, the weekly cycle has “synchrony” or alignment.
God has placed great significance on the synchrony of the weekly
cycles because the observance of His seventh-day Sabbath is tied to
Creation. For example, God withheld manna on the seventh day of
the week for forty years in the wilderness to ensure that everyone in
Israel knew which day of the week aligned with His Sabbath rest at
Creation. (Exodus 16)
Humanity cannot survive without knowing the synchrony of time.
The alignment of the Sun with Earth determines the timing of our
seasons. Certain crops are planted in the spring because they
require a specific number of days of sunlight without frost, while
other crops are planted in fall and winter because these plants need
the rain and weather conditions necessary for survival during that
time. If the human race did not know about the synchrony of the
seasons, we would soon starve! If synchrony did not exist, one
person could say that it was 4:35 p.m. on January 5, and at the same
time, another person could say it was 2:21 a.m. on September 3 and
no one could reasonably dispute either claim. For a person to know
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 179

the time as well as the seasons, he must know about the rotation of
Earth, the orbit of the moon around Earth, and the orbit of Earth
around the Sun. For a clock to have practical value, it has to
synchronize (and stay synchronized) with planetary motion.
Otherwise, the information provided by a mechanical clock would
mean nothing. Without synchrony, time cannot be measured. When
we say this is year A.D. 2003, what do we mean? We mean it has
been 2003 years since the birth of Christ (although this is not
actually the case, but that’s another story). In other words, the
Julian/Gregorian calendar is theoretically synchronized with the
birth of Christ. When everyone uses the same synchrony of time,
everyone knows that a 1954 Corvette is an antique car! With the
importance of synchrony in mind, let us examine the three clocks
that God created and gave to Israel at the time of the Exodus.
A Week of Seven Months
When God mandated that Israel observe six festivals during the
course of a year, He gave them a religious calendar indicating when
these feasts were to take place. This religious calendar consisted of
a week of seven months (Nisan through Tishri). This religious
year should not be confused with a full year of twelve months.
(Exodus 23:16) Rather, Israel’s religious year is similar to a “school
year,” which lasts for nine or ten months. During the religious year,
God required Israel to observe six festivals. For example, Passover
was observed on the fifteenth day of the first month and the Day of
Atonement on the tenth day of the seventh month. (See Chart 6.2.)
Understand that a religious year did not consist of any seven
months. The religious year began on New Year’s Day (Nisan 1), and
New Year’s Day was determined by the first new moon on or after
the Spring Equinox. The religious year ended (depending on the
position of the moon) six or seven days after the Feast of
Tabernacles ended. At the time of the Exodus, the Jews often
referred to months by number, although they sometimes used
Canaanite names for the months. (Exodus 13:4) Centuries later,
the Jews adopted Babylonian names for the months of the year.
Therefore, Bible writers sometimes call the first month of the year
Nisan which is taken from the Babylonian name Nisanu.
(Nehemiah 2:1) The synchrony of Nisan 1 with the first new moon
on or after the Spring Equinox forces Passover to occur in the spring
and the Day of Atonement to occur in the fall of the year.
180 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

A Week of Seven Years

The week of seven years was based on the weekly template, too.
Remember, synchrony does not allow a week to start and stop at
random times. Likewise, a week of seven years cannot start with
just any given year. The Sabbath year (the seventh year) was just as
holy to the Lord (Leviticus 25:4) as was the seventh-day Sabbath.
(Exodus 20:8-11; Jeremiah 34:13-17) Sabbath years were
determined by counting from the year of the Exodus. Because the
Jews were required to observe the feasts, they managed to keep
track of time. (1 Kings 6:1) The Old and New Testaments
demonstrate a perfect synchrony of Sabbatical years. (Isaiah 37:30;
Jeremiah 34:14; Nehemiah 8:2,3; Deuteronomy 31:10,11; Daniel
9:24-27; Luke 3:1) At the beginning of the Sabbath year, God
required all slaves to be set free and the land was to lay fallow and
rest. (See Chart 6.3.)
A Week of Seven Weeks
A week of seven weeks equals forty-nine years. Study Chart 6.4
and notice how a week of weeks represents forty-nine years.
(Leviticus 25:8) This calendar is called the Jubilee Calendar because
the “year of Jubilee” was a special Sabbatical year that occurred
after each forty-nine year cycle ended. The year of Jubilee was
counted as the fiftieth year of the outgoing Jubilee cycle, but it was
also counted as the first year of the incoming Jubilee cycle. (See
Chart 6.4) Thus, the year of Jubilee always fell on a “Sunday” year.
It may seem strange that the fiftieth year of the old Jubilee cycle
and the first year of the new Jubilee cycle were the same year. This
problem vanishes when one realizes this method of counting time
parallels the count of days for the feast of Pentecost. The fiftieth
day always fell on the first day of the week. (Leviticus 23:15,16) In
other words, the only difference is that the count for Pentecost is in
days and the count for the year of Jubilee is in years. The weekly
template remains the same.
The Bible mentions one year of Jubilee. It took place during the
fifteenth year (702 B.C.) of Hezekiah. (Isaiah 36:1; 37:30, see also 2
Kings 19:29) The year of Jubilee was consecrated on the tenth day of
the seventh month, on the Day of Atonement (near the end of the
religious year). Consecration was delayed until the Day of
Atonement because this gave the Israelites six full months into the
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 181

year of Jubilee to make sure all property was returned to its rightful
owner before the Day of Atonement took place.
The beauty of understanding the synchrony of these clocks begins to
appear when one realizes that all Sabbath years and Jubilee years –
forward and backward – can be easily calculated once a known year
is located. For the sake of comparison, one could say that it is easy
to calculate paydays – both past and future – when one knows what
day of the week payday occurs and how often payday occurs!
Synchrony makes this type of calculation possible.

The Weekly Cycle is Alligned with the First Day of Creation

Day One Day Two Day Three Day Four Day Five Day Six Day Seven

Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Sabbath

Chart 6.1

The Week of Seven Months is Aligned with New Year's Day, Nisan 1

Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Sabbath

Nisan Ziv Sivan Tammuz Ab Elul Tishri

Chart 6.2

The Week of Years is Aligned with the Exodus, 1437 B.C.

Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Sabbath

Exodus
1436 B.C. 1435 B.C. 1434 B.C. 1433 B.C. 1432 B.C. 1431 B.C.
1437 B.C.

Chart 6.3
Look at Chart 6.4 and count off ten years beginning with the Exodus
year. You should see a Tuesday year, 1428 B.C. Now count off ten
weeks of years from the Exodus year. What year falls in the middle
of the tenth week? (1371 B.C.) Bear in mind, the ten weeks shown
on Chart 6.4 are not part of the seventy weeks that Gabriel spoke
about. Rather, these weeks mark the beginning of the “weekly
182 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

The Week of Seven Weeks is Aligned with the Exodus, 1437 B.C.

Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Sabbath

Year Year Year Year Year Year Year

Sunday Exodus 1431

1436 1435 1434 1433 1432 Week 1
Week 1437 B.C. (Year 7)
Mon 1424
1430 1429 1428 1427 1426 1425 Week 2
Week (Year 14)
Tue 1417
1423 1422 1421 1420 1419 1418 Week 3
Week (Year 21)
Wed 1410
1416 1415 1414 1413 1412 1411 Week 4
Week (Year 28)
Thu 1403
1409 1408 1407 1406 1405 1404 Week 5
Week (Year 35)
Fri 1396
1402 1401 1400 1399 1398 1397 Week 6
Week (Year 42)
Sabbath 1389
1395 1394 1393 1392 1391 1390 Week 7
Week (Year 49)

Jubilee Cycle #2

Sunday Jubilee 1382

1387 1386 1385 1384 1383 Week 1
Week 1388 B.C. (Year 7)
Mon 1375
1381 1380 1379 1378 1377 1376 Week 2
Week (Year 14)
Tue 1368
1374 1373 1372 1371 1370 1369 Week 3
Week (Year 21)

Chart 6.4

clock” which God initiated at the Exodus. As we continue to examine

the synchrony of time, it will become apparent that inserting a gap of
time between days, weeks or years is impossible! When one year
ends, another year begins. When one week of seven years ends,
another week of seven years begins! When one Jubilee cycle of forty-
nine years ends, a new Jubilee cycle begins! If these cycles are
broken, the synchrony of the weekly cycle is destroyed and, without
synchrony, time cannot be measured.
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 183

Why Seventy Weeks?

Gabriel said, “Seventy weeks are determined. . . .” Why did God
deliberately choose the number “seventy weeks” as a measure of
time in Daniel 9:24? We know that God is deliberate and purposeful
in everything He does. He could have said, “Four hundred ninety
years are determined upon your people. . . .” Instead, God chose to
use the term “weeks” as the measurement of time in Daniel 9
instead of “years,” because weeks have a synchrony that years do
not have! We know that God initiated weeks of years at the Exodus
because He required the land to lay fallow during the Sabbath year!
This fact produces a key point: The seventy weeks of Daniel 9 cannot
begin with just any year. God used the word “weeks” because the
seventy weeks began with a Sunday year which aligns with the year
of the Exodus. Remember, a week of days always begins with
Sunday and a week of seven years always begins with a Sunday
year and ends with a Sabbatical year. When God determined
“seventy weeks” of years on Israel, He gave Israel a tremendous hint
to identify the specific decree that would start the seventy weeks!
Gabriel’s words were not intended to be mysterious or secret!
Review Chart 6.4 again and notice that a week of years always
begins with a Sunday year and that “weeks of years” are always
synchronous with the year of the Exodus.
When God sentenced Israel into captivity in Babylon, He did it for a
specific period of time. “This whole country will become a
desolate wasteland, and these nations will serve the king of
Babylon seventy years.” (Jeremiah 25:11) It is interesting that
God said seventy years in Jeremiah’s prophecy instead of saying ten
weeks. (Ten weeks of seven years equals seventy years.) God’s use
of “years” instead of “weeks” in Jeremiah’s prophecy reflects the fact
that the Babylonian captivity did not start in a Sunday year. The
seventy years of Babylonian captivity began in 605 B.C., which is a
Sabbath year! Therefore, the seventy years in Babylon cannot be
called ten weeks of years. This feature, incidently, unlocks a
mystery about the 2,300 days in Daniel 8:14. The 2,300 days (or
evenings and mornings) amount to 328 weeks plus five days
(counting inclusively). Even though the 2,300 evenings and
mornings began at the same time as the seventy weeks of Daniel 9
(the decree of Artaxerxes in the Sunday year of 457 B.C.), the 2,300
days are expressed in units of days instead of units of weeks because
184 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

it takes 2,303 days to make 329 weeks! Since 2,300 days do not equal
329 weeks, God described this time-period using days.
God’s Signature
In Chapter 1, remember that seven appears to be God’s signature:
there are seven days of the week, seven continents, seven colors in
the rainbow, seven churches in Revelation, seven seals, seven
trumpets, seven bowls, etc. If seven is God’s signature, then seventy
(ten times seven) must have prominence, too. I believe the number
seventy suggests the fullness of God’s patience with rebellion. For
example, God waited until Israel had violated seventy Sabbath
years before sending them into Babylonian captivity. The violation
of seventy Sabbath years explains why the captivity in Babylon
lasted seventy years. (Leviticus 26:34,25; 2 Chronicles 36:21)
Likewise, the seventy weeks granted to Israel in Daniel 9 reflect the
limits of God’s patience with Israel’s rebellion. This makes me
wonder if there is also a correlation to man’s life being
approximately seventy years. (Psalm 90:10)
You may recall the following text: “Then came Peter to him, and
said, Lord, how oft shall my brother sin against me, and I
forgive him? till seven times? Jesus saith unto him, I say not
unto thee, Until seven times: but, Until seventy times seven.”
(Matthew 18:21,22) This verse is not translated as it should be.
When Peter asked the Lord how many times he should forgive his
brother, Jesus did not respond with a numerical count (70 x 7 =
490), Jesus responded with a much larger concept, the idea of
seventy sevens. To the Jewish mind, seventy sevens referred to the
seventy weeks of unmerited grace given to Israel in Daniel 9. Jesus
told Peter that he was to forgive his brother as God had forgiven
Israel! In other words, forgiveness was not a numerical total, it was
an attitude.
God’s signature of seven and the number ten have an important
relationship throughout the Bible. For example, God deliberately
put the Day of Atonement on the tenth day of the seventh month.
(10/7) This annual event on the tenth day of the seventh month
marked the end of mercy in the camp of Israel. All sins had to be
transferred to the temple before the Day of Atonement arrived.
Because everyone knew when the Day of Atonement occurred, every
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 185

Israelite knew the limits of God’s mercy, and it ended with the
arrival of the tenth day of the seventh month.
The great red dragon in Revelation 12 has ten horns and seven
heads. (10/7) The dragon-like beast (or composite beast) in Revelation
13 also has ten horns and seven heads. (10/7) This strange anatomy
indicates the fullness of rebellion against God during the Great
Tribulation! The seven heads represent seven false religions of the
world, and the ten horns represent ten kings who will rule with the
Antichrist for a short period of time. (Revelation 17:12)
One more point about the number seventy should be considered:
The duration of sin appears to last for seventy centuries or a week of
seven millenniums. (7/10) If this is true, the one thousand years of
Revelation 20 could be a Sabbatical rest from sin for planet Earth.
God will destroy sin with fire at the end of seventy centuries. God
foreknew how long He would allow sin to exist – even before sin
began. My study has convinced me that the number seventy
indicates the limits of God’s patience with rebellion, and this is why
Gabriel told Daniel, “Seventy weeks are determined upon your
people. . . .” With this vision, God put the nation of Israel on notice
that His patience with them as a nation was limited to seventy more
weeks, beginning with a specific decree to restore and rebuild
Jerusalem that would occur during a Sunday year.
Seventy Weeks Make a Statement
When He defined the probationary time for the Jews as “seventy
weeks,” God informed the Jews of three things: First, God
acknowledged the presence and operation of the weekly cycle of
years that He had established at the time of the Exodus. (Leviticus
25:1-4) Weeks of years did not suddenly begin during or after the
Babylonian captivity. Second, when God said, “Seventy weeks are
determined. . . ,” He forced the decree and the first year of the
seventy weeks to align with a Sunday year, because a week of years
always begins with a Sunday year! Last, when God indicated that
Messiah would cause sacrifices and offerings to cease in the middle
of the seventieth week, He affirmed that His calendar would
continue to operate after Jesus died on the cross. This is a key point
that many people overlook: God’s calendar could not cease to
operate when Jesus died because He died in the middle of the
seventieth week! If the week of years ended at the cross, as many
186 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

scholars claim, then the seventy-weeks prophecy would have been

stated as a 69 ½-weeks prophecy, not as a seventy-week prophecy!
Work with Me!
I call God’s objectives for the seventy weeks “Plan B.” Israel was in
captivity because it had ruined “Plan A.” If the new Israel
cooperated with God, He would bring an end to sin and establish His
kingdom on Earth at the end of the seventy weeks. If Israel failed to
cooperate, God promised to destroy Jerusalem and displace Israel
with a “new” Israel, starting over again. One might call the next
plan, “Plan C.” Remember Gabriel’s words: “Seventy weeks are
determined upon thy people and upon thy holy city, to finish
the transgression, and to make an end of sins, and to make
reconciliation for iniquity, and to bring in everlasting
righteousness, and to seal up the vision and prophecy, and to
anoint the most Holy.” (Daniel 9:24, KJV) The objectives
presented in this verse are very similar to the objectives God gave
Israel (“Plan A”) before entering the Promised Land, but the
essential difference is timing. In Daniel 9:24, God declared that He
was ready to bring in everlasting righteousness within 490 years of
a particular decree! Talk about excitement! Of course, God’s
objectives could only be met if Israel allowed the Holy Spirit to have
dominion in the hearts of the majority of its citizens. God said,
“Work with me and see what I will do through you!” If Israel had
cooperated with Him, God would have accomplished four amazing
things:
1. The nation of Israel and the city of Jerusalem would have
risen from its ashes and flourished above all nations as an
example of God’s redemption. (God gave numerous
prophecies about Israel’s restoration and prominent role
to Daniel’s contemporary, Ezekiel. If Israel had
cooperated with God, the prophecies of Ezekiel would
have been fulfilled. This is a key point that will be
discussed further at the end of this chapter, because this
point is connected to the 2,300-days prophecy.) Israel’s
redemption and release from captivity were to be a
pattern of salvation, giving hope to all nations of the
world that God would redeem everyone and free them
from the captivity of sin and rebellion if they loved Him.
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 187

The exciting news which God gave to Daniel was that all
this could occur within seventy weeks of years. Think of
it! God had allotted the remaining time for sin and
rebellion on Earth to be a mere 490 years, but only if
Israel cooperated! It is such a tragedy to discover that
each generation in Israel cared less and less about this
amazing opportunity as the 490 years rolled by.
2. God promised to send His Sacrifice, the Lamb of God, and
offer Him up for sin within 490 years. The Savior of the
world would appear, and He would die in the middle year
of the seventieth week. Afterwards, Jesus would usher in
everlasting righteousness, but only if Israel cooperated.
3. If Israel cooperated with God, they would have the
privilege of anointing “The Most Holy.” The term,
“anointing the most holy,” is a Hebraic concept that refers
to anointing the most holy officer in Israel, the high
priest. (Exodus 29:21; Leviticus 4:3; Leviticus 8:30)
Even though Israel had long anticipated the birth of
Messiah (the word Messiah means the Anointed One),
God told Israel they would have the privilege of anointing
the Messiah! Tragically, He came unto His own and His
own did not receive Him. (John 1:11) So, the Holy Spirit
anointed Jesus at His baptism. (Mark 1:10; Luke 4:18)
4. The fourth objective was an amazing promise. If Israel
cooperated, God promised to seal up this vision and all
the other prophecies in the book of Daniel, because these
prophecies would not come to pass. In other words, if the
new Israel cooperated with God so that “Plan B” could be
fulfilled, the course of human history would unfold as
promised under the original plan. This is a very
important point to understand. Once implemented,
Daniel’s prophecies become unconditional. This means
they are not subject to man’s cooperation to be fulfilled.
The Rock in Daniel 2 will hit the ten kings and destroy
them. The little horn power of Daniel 7 would appear and
persecute the saints. The goat would overrun the ram in
Daniel 8, etc. The point is that if the new Israel
cooperated with God, He would seal up these visions and
188 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

prophecies given to Daniel, and their contents would never

be known or implemented. Notice what God is doing. God
spoke to Ezekiel at the same time He spoke to Daniel, and
God promised a grand and glorious future for Israel if they
would cooperate with Him. The prophecies of Ezekiel were
conditional. Israel would be marvelously blessed if they
chose to cooperate with God. However, if Israel did not
cooperate, then Daniel’s visions and prophecies would be
fulfilled. You must see this larger picture of what God is
doing to appreciate the contrasting messages that God sent
to Daniel and Ezekiel.
Always Starting Over
These four objectives have profound significance, because they show
God’s intentions if Israel would cooperate with Him. The prophecies
of Jeremiah, Isaiah, and other prophets pointed to a grand
fulfillment of “Plan A.” Unfortunately, Israel did not cooperate.
Therefore, God destroyed His temple, people and city. After seventy
years in Babylon, God offered a new Israel “Plan B,” promising to
fulfill it within 490 years! It is hard to believe, but the new Israel
failed, too. They rejected God and they rejected God’s Son. (Luke
20:9-19; John 1; Romans 9-11) Therefore, God destroyed His temple,
people and city a final time in A.D. 70. (There’s another seventy –
A.D. 70!) Mercifully, God started again with “Plan C.” Under this
plan, God redefined Israel. Israel includes anyone who will believe
in His Son, Jesus Christ. (Ephesians 2, Galatians 3) Under “Plan C”
there is a new covenant that is even better than the former
covenant.
If I were to identify the primary reason for so much prophetic
confusion among Christians today, it would have to be this: Scholars
are still trying to figure out ways for God to fulfill the many Old
Testament prophecies that belong to “Plan A” and “Plan B.”
However, these scholars are wasting their efforts because God has
implemented “Plan C.” Instead of looking forward to a rebuilt
temple in old Jerusalem, we should be looking forward to the New
Jerusalem that comes from God out of Heaven. The exciting news is
that there will be no temple in the New Jerusalem because the
Father and the Lamb will be among their people. (Revelation
21:2,22) Think about this: If Israel had cooperated with God during
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 189

the 490 years, there would have been no need for a Second Coming.
Nowhere in the Old Testament, other than in the book of Daniel, is
there a mention of a Second Coming. Instead, God would have
established His kingdom on Earth at the end of the 490 years! Sin
would have ended and everlasting righteousness would have begun.
Back to Gabriel’s Statements, Numbers 2 and 3
“Know and understand this: From the issuing of the decree
to restore and rebuild Jerusalem until the Anointed One, the
ruler, comes, there will be seven ‘sevens,’ and sixty-two
‘sevens.’ It will be rebuilt with streets and a trench, but in
times of trouble.” (Daniel 9:25)
Four decrees were issued for the restoration of Jerusalem. Cyrus
gave the first decree in the Friday year of 536 B.C. (Ezra 1) Darius
gave the second decree in the Monday year of 519 B.C. (Ezra 6)
Artexerxes gave the third and fourth decrees in the Sunday year of
457 and the Sabbath year of 444 B.C. (Ezra 7 and Nehemiah 2,
respectively) Remember that God used the word “weeks” instead of
years to indicate the synchrony for this all important decree with
His weekly cycle of years established at the Exodus. In verse 25,
Gabriel adds another specification that identifies which of the four
decrees God will use to count off the seventy weeks: “From the
issuing of the decree to restore and rebuild Jerusalem until
the Anointed One, the ruler, comes, there will be seven
‘weeks’ and sixty-two ‘weeks. . . .’” With these words, Gabriel
points to the public ministry of Messiah. Gabriel used seven weeks
and sixty-two weeks to highlight the all important synchrony of a
decree that would occur in a Sunday year and at the beginning of a
Jubilee cycle of seven weeks. (See Chart 6.5) By separating the 69
weeks into two smaller pieces – the first of which was a Jubilee
cycle, God was doing everything He could to help Israel identify the
right decree. Notice how this works: In verse 24, God points to a
decree that occurs on a Sunday year by using the words “seventy
weeks.” (Weeks always begin with a Sunday year.) In verse 25, God
indicates the decree will occur at the beginning of “seven weeks” or
49 years. A seven-week cycle is a Jubilee cycle of forty-nine years
and it always begins with a Sunday year. Only one of the four
decrees meets this specification. The decree in 457 B.C. occurred in
a Sunday year, which also happens to start a new cycle of seven
190 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

weeks (Jubilee cycle). Incidently, if 457 B.C. is a Jubilee year, so is

702 B.C., the only Jubilee year mentioned in the Bible. (Isaiah
37:30) God used language so plain that wise men from Ur figured it
out! However, the religious leaders in Jerusalem never did figure it
out. Religion can be so blinding.
My reference paper, Great Clocks from God, discusses the year of the
Exodus (1437 B.C.) and many other issues that accompany this
topic. For this study, just consider the possibility that 457 B.C. is a
Sunday year and 457 B.C. is the first year of a Jubilee cycle. From
the Bible we learn that on or about the very first day of the very first
month of the year of Jubilee (Nisan 1), King Artaxerxes issued a
decree providing for the refurbishing of Jerusalem and its temple.
(Ezra 7) We also know that Ezra left Babylon with the decree in his
hand on Nisan 12, the twelfth day of the first month! (Ezra 8:31)

The Decree of Artaxerxes, Nisan 1, 457 B.C. -- Jubilee Cycle #21 Since the Exodus

Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Sabbath

457 B.C.
456 B.C. 455 B.C. 454 B.C. 453 B.C. 452 B.C. 451 B.C. Week 1
Decree

450 B.C. 449 B.C. 448 B.C. 447 B.C. 446 B.C. 445 B.C. 444 B.C. Week 2

443 B.C. 442 B.C. 441 B.C. 440 B.C. 439 B.C. 438 B.C. 437 B.C. Week 3

436 B.C. 435 B.C. 434 B.C. 433 B.C. 432 B.C. 431 B.C. 430 B.C. Week 4

429 B.C. 428 B.C. 427 B.C. 426 B.C. 425 B.C. 424 B.C. 423 B.C. Week 5

422 B.C. 421 B.C. 420 B.C. 419 B.C. 418 B.C. 417 B.C. 416 B.C. Week 6

415 B.C. 414 B.C. 413 B.C. 412 B.C. 411 B.C. 410 B.C. 409 B.C. Week 7

Jubilee Cycle #22 Since the Exodus

408 B.C.
407 B.C. 406 B.C. 405 B.C. 404 B.C. 403 B.C. 402 B.C. Week 8
Jubilee

401 B.C. 400 B.C. 399 B.C. 398 B.C. 397 B.C. 396 B.C. 395 B.C. Week 9

394 B.C. 393 B.C. 392 B.C. 391 B.C. 390 B.C. 389 B.C. 388 B.C. Week 10

Chart 6.5
Look at Chart 6.5 and count off the “seven weeks” which Gabriel
mentioned (457 - 409 B.C.). Notice that first week of the “sixty-two
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 191

weeks” Gabriel mentioned began with 408 B.C., and if this chart
extended long enough, the 69th week would end with the Sabbath
year of A.D. 26. Notice that 457 B.C. is both a Sunday year and a
Year of Jubilee. (Remember, the Year of Jubilee is the fiftieth year of
the old Jubilee cycle, and it is also the first year of the new Jubilee
cycle.) None of the other decrees to restore and rebuild Jerusalem
can satisfy the synchrony that God indicates in Daniel 9. Therefore,
none of the other decrees can meet the “seven weeks and sixty-two
weeks” requirement that Gabriel specified. If this information does
not convince the reader, history proves these three decrees cannot
meet the Daniel 9 specifications either. Here’s how:
If 457 B.C. is the correct decree and it marks the beginning of the
seventy weeks, then we should expect the appearing of Messiah
“seven and sixty-two weeks later” (69 x 7 = 483 years), in the
Sunday year of A.D. 27. History precisely confirms this to be the
case! Jesus waited until His thirtieth birthday, which occurred in
the Fall of A.D. 27., to begin His ministry. Notice how Luke
documents the year of Jesus’ baptism: “In the fifteenth year of
the reign of Tiberius Caesar—when Pontius Pilate was
governor of Judea, Herod tetrarch of Galilee, his brother
Philip tetrarch of Iturea and Traconitis, and Lysanias
tetrarch of Abilene. . . . The people were waiting expectantly
and were all wondering in their hearts if John might
possibly be the Christ.” (Luke 3:1,15) Have you wondered why
people thought John the Baptist might be the Christ? I believe some
people were expecting Christ because they knew that 483 years had
lapsed since the decree of Artaxerxes. The year had come for the
Messiah to appear and John the Baptist, a forerunner of Messiah,
was attracting a lot of attention because the power of the Holy Spirit
rested on him. (Luke 1:17) Within this context Luke wrote, “When
all the people were being baptized, Jesus was baptized too.
And as he was praying, heaven was opened and the Holy
Spirit descended on him in bodily form like a dove. And a
voice came from heaven: ‘You are my Son, whom I love; with
you I am well pleased.’ Now Jesus himself was about thirty
years old when he began his ministry. . . .” (Luke 3:21-23)
Tiberius and A.D. 27
Some scholars claim that the fifteenth year of Tiberius cannot be
A.D. 27., but it was the fifteenth year for the Jews! The Romans did
192 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

not date Caesar’s rule with regnal years. Rather, the official count
of years in Roman service was determined by the years Tiberius
held tribunician power. Therefore, A.D. 27 would have been the
33rd or 34th year of Tiberius’ tribunician power (Tiberius was
granted power as a member of the tribune in 6 B.C.). I raise this
point because Luke dates the fifteenth year of Tiberius according to
Jewish tradition, not Roman tradition. The fifteenth year of
Tiberius, according to Jewish tradition, began in the fall of A.D. 27.
Here’s how:
History says that on August 19, A.D. 14, Augustus died. Tiberius
maneuvered the Senate for a few weeks and did not allow it to name
him emperor for almost a month. On September 17, A.D. 14,
Tiberius became the emperor of Rome at age 56. Because this is
what history says, we find that Luke follows the Jewish tradition of
inclusive dating. This means Luke counted the ascension year of
Tiberius as “year 1,” even though the ascension year was just a few
days in length before a new civil year began on Tishri 1. Josephus
also followed this practice when he dated the reigns of the Herods.
(Antiquities xv. 5.2; xvii. 8.1) The Mishnah further confirms this
method of Jewish regnal reckoning. (Mishnah Rosh Hashanah 1.1)
During the time of Christ, the Jews observed a fall-to-fall civil
calendar. The first month of this calendar was the seventh month of
their religious year. It was called Tishri. Therefore, Tiberius
ascended to the throne on September 17, A.D. 14, during a Jewish
civil year that ended about two months later (November 11, A.D.
14.) So, Luke counted September 17 to November 11 as “year 1”
because Tiberius, counting inclusively, ascended to the throne that
year. Therefore, the Jews regarded the following civil year Tishri 1
to Tishri 1 (November 12, A.D. 14 to October 31, A.D. 15), as the
second year of Tiberius’ reign. (See Chart 6.6.)
Luke’s Account: The Reign of Tiberius Caesar
Year 1 = A.D. 14/14 (September 17 - November 11)
Year 2 = A.D. 14/15 (Tishri 1 to Tishri 1)
Year 3 = A.D. 15/16 (Tishri 1 to Tishri 1)
Year 4 = A.D. 16/17 Etc.
Year 5 = A.D. 17/18
Year 6 = A.D. 18/19
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 193

Year 7 = A.D. 19/20

Year 8 = A.D. 20/21
Year 9 = A.D. 21/22
Year 10 = A.D. 22/23
Year 11 = A.D. 23/24
Year 12 = A.D. 24/25
Year 13 = A.D. 25/26
Year 14 = A.D. 26/27
Year 15 = A.D. 27/28
Chart 6.6

Chart 6.6 shows Tishri 1 to Tishri 1 (October 19, A.D. 27 through

November 6, A.D. 28) as the 15th year of Tiberius. According to
Roman dating, Jewish reckoning and Luke’s report, Jesus was
baptized in the fall of A.D. 27, sometime after Tishri 1. (The length
of Christ’s public ministry on Earth was almost 32 months.) Just as
Gabriel predicted, Jesus arrived at the banks of the Jordan River
where John baptized Him. Jesus began His public ministry in the
Sunday year of A.D. 27, which is the first year of the seventieth
week! This is not the end of the story. Two additional facts from
history confirm this synchrony of the Jubilee Calendar. In short,
God’s timing is astonishing.
The Wise Men
The story of Jesus’ birth includes a surprising visit by the Magi from
the East. Many people do not realize the Magi were careful students
of prophecy. Scholars believe they were clergymen from Ur, in the
province of Babylon. Evidently, they had discovered and deeply
studied Daniel’s writings, as well as other books of the Old
Testament. The Magi understood that priests and kings in Israel
were typically thirty years of age when they ascended to authority.
(Numbers 4; Genesis 41:46; 1 Samuel 13:1; 2 Samuel 5:4; 1 Chroni-
cles 23:3) Using this information, they determined when the sixty-
nine weeks would end. Then, they subtracted thirty years from that
calculation to determine the year of Messiah’s birth. When they saw
the star appear in the heavens, they knew it was a sign from God.
Think about it. Their round-trip journey to see baby Jesus required
them to travel more than a thousand miles over a period of a year.
The intensity of their desire to see the Messiah was obvious. Their
194 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

lavish gifts for baby Jesus reveals a love for God that few Jews could
understand. (The gifts from the Magi financially sustained Mary,
Joseph and Jesus during their exile in Egypt when they escaped
Herod’s decree to kill all baby boys less than two years of age.) Wise
men do not go to these extremes on a whim. Like Simeon and Anna
(the elderly prophets of Israel who longed to see Messiah before they
died), the wise men longed to see the Savior of the world with their
own eyes. Their visit was a powerful affirmation that the decree of
Artaxerxes in 457 B.C. is the correct decree for starting the 483-year
countdown. Consider their question to King Herod: “Where is the
one who has been born king of the Jews? We saw his star in
the east and have come to worship him.” (Matthew 2:2) They
were not questioning whether the king of the Jews had been born.
They were wanting to know where He had been born. Perhaps they
did not have access to Micah’s writings. If they did, they could have
gone directly to Bethlehem. (Micah 5:2) Their presence in
Jerusalem at just the right time suggests they understood Daniel 9,
since no other prophecy in the Bible pinpoints the time of Messiah’s
birth.
How could mere “Gentiles” from a distant land be better informed on
the timing of Messiah’s appearing than Jewish scholars? How did
the Samaritan woman at the well know Messiah’s coming was near.
She anticipated the appearing of the Messiah because she said: “. . .
I know that Messiah (called Christ) is coming . . . when he
comes, he will explain everything to us.” (John 4:25) The
answer is simple. Centuries earlier, the Lord had said, “You will
seek me and find me when you seek me with all your heart.”
(Jeremiah 29:13) Unfortunately, Jewish scholars were not looking
for Jesus. They were caught up in their tiny world of pseudo-
scholarship. They had nit-picked the Word of God into so many
senseless pieces, they could no longer see the big picture. Even
though the religious leaders discussed and debated the prophecies of
Daniel between themselves, they could not understand Gabriel’s
words. Ironically, the same situation appears to be true today.
Scholars still twist and distort Gabriel’s words. Unfortunately, they
have led millions of people to anticipate a non-existent pre-
tribulation rapture by tampering with the seventy weeks.
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 195

Jesus Died in the Middle of the Seventieth Week!

God’s timing is incredibly perfect. Let us review the facts. First, 457
B.C. aligns with the weekly cycle of years that began operating at
the Exodus in 1437 B.C. Second, 457 B.C. aligns with the forty-nine
year Jubilee cycles that began operating at the Exodus. Third,
Messiah appeared sixty-nine weeks after 457 B.C., in A.D. 27, to be
baptized by John the Baptist. Fourth, 457 B.C. was affirmed by the
wise men shortly after Jesus was born. The fifth and best proof that
the 457 B.C. decree is the one indicated in Daniel 9, is the timing of
Jesus’ death. Basically, Jesus began His ministry on time and He
died on time. The death of Jesus not only confirms the synchrony of
the Jubilee Calendar, it also confirms the decree of Artaxerxes in
457 B.C. to be the right decree. Paul was aware of this phenomenon:
“But when the time had fully come, God sent his Son, born of
a woman, born under law . . . You see, at just the right time,
when we were still powerless, Christ died for the ungodly.”
(Galatians 4:4; Romans 5:6, italics mine)
Gabriel’s Statement Number 3
Gabriel said, “After the sixty-two ‘sevens,’ the Anointed One
will be cut off and will have nothing. . . . He will confirm a
covenant with many for one ‘seven.’ In the middle of the [last]
‘seven’ he will put an end to sacrifice and offering.” (Daniel
9:26,27, insertion mine) Look ahead to Chart 6.7. Notice how A.D.
30 is located in the middle of the seventieth week of years. Of
course, Christians have no question that Jesus confirmed the
covenant that God first gave to Adam and Eve, as well as Abraham
and his descendants. There should be no doubt in any mind that He
put an end to animal sacrifices and ceremonial offerings when He
died on the cross. (Colossians 2) Yet, very few Christians realize
that Daniel predicted Jesus’ death and Jesus fulfilled Daniel’s
prophecy when he died in the middle of the seventieth week!
Look again at Chart 6.7. Counting from the decree of Artaxerxes,
notice that A.D. 30 is in the middle of the seventieth week. Notice
also that A.D. 30 occurs in the middle of the 210th week counting
from the Exodus in 1437 B.C. Notice that the seventy weeks of Daniel
9 began at the beginning of the 141st week (or 987 years) since the
Exodus, and also notice that the seventieth week terminates 210 weeks
of years, which is exactly thirty Jubilee cycles since the Exodus.
196 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

Counting Weeks from the Exodus (1437 B.C.) and the Decree
of Artaxerxes (457 B.C.)

Weeks Weeks
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thur Fri Sab Since Since
Decree Exodus
1437
B.C. 1436 1435 1434 1433 1432 1431 -- 1
Exodus

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

457
456 455 454 453 452 451 1st 141
B.C.

450 449 448 447 446 --- --- 2nd 142

Weeks 3 Through 68

A.D. 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 69th 209

A.D.
A.D. 27 28 29 31 32 33 70th 210
30

34 35 36 37 --- --- 71st 211

Chart 6.7
Proving A.D. 30 is the Year of Christ’s Death
Daniel 9:27 says, “. . . In the middle of the ‘seven’ [or week] he
will put an end to sacrifice and offering.” Gabriel said that
Jesus would die in the middle year of the seventieth week. (See
Chart 6.7.) Since we know that Jesus died at the time of Passover
(John 12), and since there is widely accepted astronomical data for
A.D. 30 that is accurate to within two hours, there is sufficient
evidence to prove beyond reasonable debate that Jesus was crucified
on Friday, April 7, A.D. 30. (There is another signature seven in
April 7!) If we allow Bible history and the synchrony of God’s Great
Clocks to resolve the question of the time of His death, all of the
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 197

data presented in the Gospels concerning Christ’s passion week

harmoniously fits together. In fact, A.D. 30 exclusively satisfies the
synchrony required by all seven clocks which the Creator devised!
A.D. 30 is the only year during which all of the events described in
Scripture could have occurred.
How Israel Measured Time
The Jews normally measured time inclusively. Any part of a year,
month or day counted as a whole unit. Remember how Tiberius
came to power about two months before Tishri 1 (the beginning of a
new Jewish civil year), but Luke counted those two months as a
whole year. (Luke 3:1) Similarly, if someone came to your home on
Tuesday and left on Wednesday, the ancients would measure the
time your guest visited in your home to be two days and two nights
– Tuesday and Wednesday – even though the actual time was less
than twenty-four hours. Because a day consists of a dark portion
and a light portion, any part of two days was called “two days and
two nights.” This inclusive method for measuring time explains how
Jesus could be dead for three days and three nights (Matthew
12:40), even though the Bible says the Father resurrected Jesus on –
not after – the third day (Acts 10:40), which was Sunday, the first
day of the week. (John 20:1-5) Using inclusive reckoning, Jesus was
in the tomb for three days and three nights: Friday, Sabbath and
Sunday. However, He was slain on Friday afternoon, rested in the
Tomb on Sabbath and resurrected on Sunday. The number of hours
that Jesus was dead was less than forty hours (two hours on Friday
afternoon, twenty-four hours on Sabbath and ten to twelve hours on
Sunday). The timing of this matter can be demonstrated beyond the
point of reasonable controversy!
One more point about inclusive measurement of time. Eighteen
prophetic time periods are in Daniel and Revelation’s seventeen
prophecies, and from God’s perspective, all of them use inclusive
reckoning. The decree by Artaxerxes in 457 B.C. occurs during the
first year of the seventy weeks; therefore, the year of the decree is
included in the count of 490 years. (See Chart 6.7.) The time period
of forty years the Israelites spent in the wilderness was measured
with inclusive reckoning. (Deuteronomy 2:14; Numbers 14:34) The
three days allotted to Pharaoh’s cupbearer was measured with
inclusive reckoning. (Genesis 40:12,13)
198 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

One Moon – Two Months

History says the Jews abandoned God’s “new moon” synchrony for
determining the beginning of a new month. In its place, they
adopted the Babylonian method of sighting the first crescent of a
new moon to determine the beginning of a month. Even today, Jews
and Moslems continue the practice of sighting a new moon to
determine the beginning of a religious month. God’s synchrony for
starting a new month is based on calculation, not observation. A
new moon occurs when the moon crosses an imaginary line between
Earth and the Sun. Since a new moon cannot be seen (the moon is
between Earth and the Sun), the time of conjunction has to be
calculated. Calculation of a new moon is not difficult. (See
Numbers 28:14; 1 Samuel 20:24-27; Isaiah 66:23.) Of course, when
two different methods for starting a given month are used, there are
two different results. The difference between these two methods is
usually two days. The sighting of the new crescent of a moon occurs
in Jerusalem anywhere between sixteen to forty hours after
conjunction. Because there are two methods for starting a new
month (thus, two calendars) in the New Testament, there is
confusion about the timing of Christ’s death.
The Bible indicates that Jesus and His disciples (and other Jews)
observed Passover according to the “new moon” calendar, even
though the nation of Israel observed its corporate Passover
according to the Babylonian method for starting a new month.
(Mark 14; John 13) Since the moon determines the first day of the
month for both groups of people, the position of the moon plays an
important role in determining the date for Passover. God
commanded the Passover lamb to be slain on Nisan 14 as the day
was ending, and after roasting the lamb for a few hours, it was to be
eaten at midnight on the fifteenth day of the first month. The Lord
passed over Egypt at midnight on the fifteenth of Nisan. (Exodus 12;
Leviticus 23:5,6; Numbers 28:16,17; Luke 22:1-8) Therefore, any
attempt to determine a date and time for the death of Jesus has to
address the astronomical position of a new moon for Nisan 1, as well
as the first sighting of the crescent of a new moon.
After the Babylonian captivity, the Jews often observed two Feasts
of Passover in the same month. This conflict (and many other
contradictory issues) gave the Romans another reason to mock the
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 199

Jews. Even as late as the fourth century A.D., the emperor

Constantine used the competing observance of two Passovers to
prove that Christians should not depend upon the Jews to determine
the correct time for Passover (the observance of Easter was
determined by the time for Passover in those days). Notice his
denigrating comments: “We ought not, therefore, to have anything
in common with the Jews, for the Savior has shown us another way;
our worship follows a more legitimate and more convenient course;
and consequently, in unanimously adopting this mode, we desire,
dearest brethren, to separate ourselves from the detestable company
of the Jews, for it is truly shameful for us to hear them boast that
without their direction we could not keep this feast [of Easter at the
proper time]. How can they be in the right, they who, after the
death of the Savior, have no longer been led by reason but by wild
violence, as their delusions may urge them? They do not possess the
truth in this Easter question; for in their blindness and repugnance
to all improvement, they frequently celebrate two Passovers in the
same year.” (Eusebius, Vita Const., Lib iii., 18-20, insertions mine)
Two Passovers in One Week!
When Jesus came to Earth, He came to declare the truth on many
issues which the Jews had distorted. The presence of two calendars
(and two Passovers) in Israel solves an interesting mystery, namely,
how Jesus could observe Passover at its appointed time with His
disciples in the upper room (on Nisan 15 – Mark 14:14-16), and
within the same year, also die at the time of the national Passover
which took place on Nisan 15 (John 19:14-31)! The solution to this
mystery is quite simple. Jesus and His disciples observed Passover
in the upper room according to God’s synchrony for the month (new
moon to new moon), but Jesus died on the cross according to the
Babylonian method of starting a new month (the sighting of the first
crescent of a new moon)! Since the observance of two calendars was
a common part of Jewish life, Gospel writers do not specifically
mention that two conflicting calendars existed. For two thousand
years, this silence has caused a lot of controversy over the day and
date of Christ’s death. I hope the following explanation eliminates
the confusion surrounding the time of Christ’s death.
Jesus was crucified on Friday afternoon, April 7, A.D. 30, which is
the precise year required by Daniel 9! Even though most Christians
200 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

accept A.D. 30 as the year of Christ’s death, few understand that it is

in the middle of the seventieth week and even fewer understand how
this date is determined.
Step 1
Solar and lunar tables posted at the United States Naval Observatory
(USNO) website offer astronomical data covering the years Jesus was
on Earth. This data has been carefully verified by several
astronomers through the years and is accurate to within one or two
hours. The dates and times from the USNO are given in Universal
Time. Notice the date of the equinox and the time of conjunction for
years A.D. 29-31, especially notice the days of the week:
A.D. 29 Vernal Equinox: Tuesday, March 22, 4 p.m.
First New Moon on or after Equinox: Saturday, April 2, 5 p.m.
A.D. 30 Vernal Equinox: Wednesday, March 22, 10 p.m.
First New Moon on or after Equinox: Wednesday, March 22, 6
p.m.
A.D. 31 Vernal Equinox: Friday, March 23, 3 a.m.
First New Moon on or after Equinox: Tuesday, April 10,
12 noon
Source: http://aa.usno.navy.mil/AA/faq/docs/springphenom.html
Step 2
According to the dates and times published by the USNO, a new
moon occurred on the same night as the Equinox in A.D. 30.
(Jerusalem local time for the new moon was 8 p.m. and for the
Equinox, midnight.) Since a new moon and the Equinox occurred on
the same day, a new month and a new year began on Wednesday
night, March 22, Universal Time. Converting Universal Time to
Bible Time: Wednesday night, March 22 becomes Thursday, March
23 and Nisan 1. This translation is necessary because a day in
God’s calendar begins at sundown. (Genesis 1; Leviticus 23:32)
Notice in the New Moon calendar (Chart 6.8) that New Year’s day
(Nisan 1) occurred on Thursday and Passover (Nisan 15) occurred on
a Thursday in A.D. 30.
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 201

New Moon Calendar

Jesus Ate Passover Thursday Night (April 6), Nisan 15, A.D. 30

Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Sabbath

Nisan 1 Nisan 2 Nisan 3

--- --- --- ---
March 23 March 24 March 25

Nisan 4 Nisan 5 Nisan 6 Nisan 7 Nisan 8 Nisan 9 Nisan 10

March 26 March 27 March 28 March 29 March 30 March 31 April 1

Nisan 11 Nisan 12 Nisan 13 Nisan 14 Nisan 15 Nisan 16 Nisan 17

April 2 April 3 April 4 April 5 April 6 April 7 April 8

Chart 6.8
If Jesus and His disciples observed Passover according to the new
moon calendar, Chart 6.8 indicates that Jesus and His disciples ate
the Passover together on Thursday night at midnight. (Remember,
in God’s calendar the night precedes the light.) We know that God
required the Jews to slay the Passover lamb near sundown on Nisan
14. (Exodus 12:6) In this case, the disciples killed the paschal lamb
about sundown on Wednesday afternoon and they roasted it until
about midnight on Thursday, Nisan 15. Jesus and His disciples
then celebrated the Passover, for it was at midnight that the Lord
passed over Egypt. (Exodus 11:4) Take a few moments and study
the Passion Week Outline. Notice how each of the gospel writers
describe the course of events in their order:
The Passion Week Calendar
C=Creation Calendar B = Babylonian Calendar
(Observed by Jesus) (Observed by the Jews)
C B
Nisan 11, 9 Sunday night
Sunday light
– Jesus arrived in Bethany (John 12:1)
202 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

C B
Nisan 12, 10 Monday night
– Mary washed Jesus’ feet at Simon’s
house (Mark 14:1)
Monday light
– Jesus went to the temple, publically rebukes the
leaders of Israel (Matt 23)
– Jesus went to Mount of Olives – predicted end of
Jerusalem and world (Matt 24,25)
– Judas went to the chief priests offering to condemn
Jesus (Mark 14:10, Luke 22:1)
– Chief priests held meeting to accept the offer of
Judas to condemn Jesus (Matt 26:3-5)
Nisan 13, 11 Tuesday night
Tuesday light
– Jesus rode into Jerusalem on a donkey
(John 12:12-16)
Nisan 14,12 Wednesday night
Wednesday light
– Disciples made preparations for Passover meal
(Mark 14:12, Matt 26:17)
Nisan 15, 13 Thursday night
– Jesus ate Passover at midnight with disciples
(Mark 14:17,18)
– Jesus predicted His betrayal (Matt 26:20,21)
– Jesus eager to eat this Passover before He suffered
(Luke 22:15)
April 6, A.D. 30
– Judas left room after midnight meal to betray
Jesus (John 13:30)
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 203

C B
Thursday light
– At daybreak, they sang a hymn and went out to the
Mount of Olives (Matt 26:30)
– Jesus spent all day talking to the disciples. (John
13:36-16:33)
– Jesus predicted the scattering of the disciples
(Matt 26:31,32)
– Jesus prayed for His disciples. (John 17)
Nisan 16,14 Friday night
– Jesus took Peter, James and John into
Gethsemane. (Matt 26:36)
– Jesus betrayed and arrested . (Luke 22:44-47)
– Peter denied knowing Jesus. (Luke 22:60,61)
Friday light
– Jesus taken before the chief priests and elders.
(Luke 22:66, Matt 27:1)
– Jesus taken to Caiaphas then to Pilate.
(John 18:28)
– Jesus taken to Herod and sent back to Pilate.
(Luke 23:7,12)
– Pilate offered to release a prisoner to Jews for
goodwill. (John 18:39)
Jesus Crucified:
– Jesus crucified about the third hour. (9 am)
(Mark 15:25)
April 7, A.D. 30
– Darkness covered the land from noon to 3 pm.
(Mark 15:33, 34)
– Jesus died about the ninth hour. (3 pm)
(Matt 27:46)
204 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

C B
– Jesus’ body was not prepared because Sabbath was
so close. (Luke 23:55)
– Jews asked Pilate to have the bodies removed for
Passover (John 19:31)
Nisan 17,15 Sabbath night
– National Passover feast eaten at midnight.
– Disciples mourned, chief priests worried that
Jesus’ body might be stolen.
Sabbath light
– Chief priests asked Pilate to seal the tomb to
prevent theft. (Matt 27:62)
Nisan 18,16 Sunday night
– Disciples hid for fear of Jewish leaders.
Sunday light
Jesus resurrected
– Mary and Mary go to the tomb near sunrise.
Empty! (Mark 16:1)
– Afternoon: Jesus walked with Cleopas and a friend
to Emmaus. (Luke 24:13)
Mark 14:16 clearly indicates that Jesus ate the Passover with His
disciples before going to His death. The sequence of events went
like this: Jesus ate the Passover on Thursday night. On Thursday
(the light part of Thursday follows the night part of Thursday) Jesus
spent the day with His disciples on the Mount of Olives. (Mark
14:26) As Friday night settled upon them, Jesus and three disciples
went into the Garden of Gethsemane. (Mark 14:32) Jesus was
arrested that night while in the garden. His trial began that night
and lasted until morning on Friday. He was crucified about 9 a.m.
and died around 3 p.m. (Mark 15:25, 34) About the time Jesus
expired, the Jews celebrated the slaying of the national Passover
lamb at the temple, and to their astonishment, the veil was torn
from top to bottom by unseen hands. The Jews hurried home from
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 205

the temple to kill their own Passover lambs so that they could observe
the feast at midnight (Nisan 15). Remember, Sabbath night comes
before Sabbath light, so the Jews ate Passover on Sabbath night (or
Friday night).
The Bible does not indicate anything unusual about Jesus eating
Passover or beginning the Feast of Unleavened Bread at a time that
was not in harmony with the national Passover. (Compare Matthew
26:17 with Mark 14:12.) The Bible also does not offer any
justification for killing the Passover lamb on late Wednesday
afternoon and eating the Passover on Thursday night, even though
the national Passover lamb was killed two days later on Friday.
This silence is for two reasons. First, the dating of the Passover was
a common conflict, one of many conflicts among religious sects in
Israel; therefore, a discussion about the presence of two calendars is
not included in the gospels. Second, the gospel writers did not
attempt to include for our understanding everything that was
common knowledge in their day. However, with a little background
investigation, we find that John dated the Passion week of Jesus
with the Babylonian Calendar (John 12) and Mark used the new
moon calendar. (Mark 14) This explains why there is an apparent
conflict between some of the things Mark and John wrote. Once we
understand which calendar they are using, the writings of Mark and
John are in perfect harmony.
The Bible clearly indicates two Passovers were celebrated during
the year that Jesus was crucified. It would be blasphemous to assert
the Creator did not know the true time for Passover. Actually, Jesus’
actions affirm what is Truth, for He is the Truth. (John 14:6) Jesus
correctly observed Passover with His disciples in the upper room on
Thursday night, the 15th day of Nisan – using God’s synchrony for
determining monthly cycles (conjunction). The Creator’s actions
perfectly synchronize with the instructions that Moses recorded in
Exodus 12. The timing of the new moon (the USNO tables) and the
testimony of the gospel writers confirm it!
Step 3
History reveals the Jewish nation synchronized Nisan 1, with the
sighting of the first crescent of a new moon at the time of Christ .
(Incidently, this practice has not changed since the time of Christ.)
Depending on the visibility afforded by weather and the position of
206 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

the Sun and the orbit of the moon, the first sighting of the crescent of
a new moon in Jerusalem occurs between sixteen and forty hours after
conjunction. Since it is impossible to precisely determine when the
crescent of a new moon was sighted in A.D. 30, we have to let Bible
facts help put the pieces together. The following facts help to
determine the correct date: 1) since the sighting of the new moon
crescent usually occurs two days after a new moon; 2) since Jesus
was arrested on the night after He ate the Passover with His
disciples; and 3) since the Jews observed Nisan 15 on a seventh-day
Sabbath the year of Christ’s death (John 19:14-31), these facts
indicate Nisan 1 (using the Babylonian calendar) had to occur on
Sabbath (March 25), and the death of Jesus occurred on Nisan 14,
which was Friday, April 7.
Babylonian Calendar
Jesus Was Crucified Friday (April 7), Nisan 14, A.D. 30

Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Sabbath

Nisan 1
--- --- --- ---
March 25

Nisan 2 Nisan 3 Nisan 4 Nisan 5 Nisan 6 Nisan 7 Nisan 8

March 26 March 27 March 28 March 29 March 30 March 31 April 1

Nisan 9 Nisan 10 Nisan 11 Nisan 12 Nisan 13 Nisan 14 Nisan 15

April 2 April 3 April 4 April 5 April 6 April 7 April 8

Chart 6.9
The Lamb of God died on the cross about 3 p.m. Friday afternoon
(April 7) and was buried before sundown because a special Sabbath
was about to begin. Special or high Sabbaths occurred when two
Sabbath rests coincided. When required feasts like the Passover
occurred on a seventh-day Sabbath, a “high Sabbath” occurred.
(John 19:31) In summary, we know the following facts: 1) We know
the astronomical positions of the Sun and moon for A.D. 30; 2) We
know that Jesus properly observed the Passover using God’s new
moon reckoning for the beginning of a month; 3) We know that Jesus
rested in the tomb over Sabbath and rose on the first day of the week
(John 20:1; Acts 10:40); and 4) We know that A.D. 30 occurred in the
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 207

middle of the seventieth week. This information leads to a solid

conclusion: Jesus was crucified on Friday, April 7, A.D. 30 (Nisan
14). The actions of Jesus (such as eating Passover with His
disciples) and the astronomical positions of the Sun and moon are
two witnesses that confirm the truth. No wiggle room is left. A.D.
30 is the only year during the seventieth week that will satisfy all the
necessary specifications.
The Seventy Weeks Nailed Down
If A.D. 30 is the year of Christ’s death, the seventy weeks prophecy
has no wiggle room left in it. There is amazing harmony from
several sides. Consider the following:
1. The seventy weeks have to begin with a Sunday
year because a week of years always begins with a
Sunday year. The synchrony of the week of years
from the year of the Exodus and A.D. 30 proves that
457 B.C. is a Sunday year.
2. The seventy weeks have to begin with a Year of
Jubilee because of the specification of “seven weeks
and sixty-two weeks.” The synchrony of Jubilee
cycles from the year of the Exodus confirms that 457
B.C. is a year of Jubilee, and according to Luke 3,
Jesus began His ministry 483 years later, in the
Sunday year of the seventieth week, A.D. 27.
3. The appearance of the wise men at the birth of
Jesus affirms their understanding of the sixty-nine
weeks mentioned in Daniel 9. No other prophecy in
the Bible points to the time of Christ’s birth.
4. According to Luke 1:17, John the Baptist began his
ministry before Jesus appeared. The baptism of
Messiah occurred during the fifteenth year of
Tiberius Caesar, which is A.D. 27 – which is the
first year of the seventieth week.
5. The Jublilee calendar and the decree of Artaxerxes
in 457 B.C. forces A.D. 30 to be the middle year of
the seventieth week – Jesus died at just the right
time.
208 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

6. The astronomical position of the Sun and moon in

A.D. 30 confirms that Jesus and His disciples ate
Passover at the correct time according to God’s
calendar.
7. The actions of the Jews and their use of the moon’s
first crescent method is consistent with the course of
events described in the four gospels. Jesus was
crucified on the day when the national Passover
lamb was slaughtered, Friday, April 7, A.D. 30.
8. Constantine refers to the fact that Jews frequently
observed two Passovers in the same year and used
this anomaly to prevent Christians from depending
on the Jews to set the date of Easter.
9. The writers of the four gospels are in perfect
harmony on the timing of these events.

When these nine points are woven together, all wiggle room
concerning the timing of the seventieth week is eliminated. No
other time frame can meet or satisfy the prophetic or
astronomical synchrony required for the seventieth week.
The overwhelming abundance of harmonious facts supports the
conclusion that the seventieth week occurred from Spring A.D. 27 to
Spring A.D. 34.
The Year of the Lord’s Favor
Notice what Luke says about the first days of Christ’s public
ministry in A.D. 27: “He [Jesus] went to Nazareth, where he had
been brought up, and on the Sabbath day he went into the
synagogue, as was his custom. And he stood up to read. The
scroll of the prophet Isaiah was handed to him. Unrolling it,
he found the place where it is written: ‘The Spirit of the Lord
is on me, because he has anointed me to preach good news to
the poor. He has sent me to proclaim freedom for the
prisoners and recovery of sight for the blind, to release the
oppressed, to proclaim the year of the Lord’s favor.’ Then he
rolled up the scroll, gave it back to the attendant and sat
down. The eyes of everyone in the synagogue were fastened
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 209

on him, and he began by saying to them, ‘Today this scripture

is fulfilled in your hearing.’” (Luke 4:16-21, italics mine) Some
people twist these words to mean A.D. 27 is a year of Jubilee. They
claim Jesus expressed the idea of freedom from slavery in this
passage because the first year of His ministry was a year of Jubilee.
The trouble with this argument is that slaves were not set free in the
year of Jubilee. Slaves were to be set free at the end of each Friday
year. (Exodus 21:2; Jeremiah 34:13-16) Because God required slaves
to be set free at the end of Friday years, there were no slaves at the
beginning of a Jubilee year (the fiftieth year). Furthermore, if A.D.
27 were a year of Jubilee or even a Sabbatical year, then several
dating changes would be required which history and prophecy do not
support. The astronomical data for A.D. 30, plus the harmony of the
gospels, plus the count of years established in Old Testament
prophecy makes an airtight case. The words of Jesus in Luke 4 are to
be understood within the context that “the year of the Lord’s favor” is
the first year of the seventieth week! The prophecy of Daniel was
fulfilled when Jesus spoke these words. Messiah had appeared!
Time Is Constant
Time on Earth has been constant since Creation. Therefore, the
positions of the Sun and moon can be calculated over long spans of
time. Any deviation from this constant requires massive changes in
planetary physics. Time is a steady and unbroken continuum, and
any tampering with dates will distort everything forward and
backward in time. In Luke 3, we find that Jesus was baptized in
A.D. 27, and in Luke 4, He began His ministry with the declaration
recorded in verses 16-21. The expression “to proclaim the year of
the Lord’s favor” that Jesus used indicates that He, God in the flesh,
had come from Heaven to usher in the kingdom of God, if Israel was
willing.
Back to Gabriel’s Statements, Numbers 4 - 6
Given the amount of information examined so far, I may need to
remind you that we are still studying Daniel 9. Gabriel’s comments
to Daniel were brief, but they were full of meaning! Earlier in this
chapter, I paraphrased Gabriel’s remarks to Daniel as six
statements. Now that the purpose of the seventy weeks has been
examined (Statement 1), and the timing of Messiah’s ministry and
death during the seventieth week has been examined (Statements 2
210 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

and 3), Gabriel’s final statements about Israel are very sad. Israel
could have done so well. Israel could have sealed up this segment of
the vision and prophecy, but it failed to cooperate with God. Gabriel
predicted:
4. After they are rebuilt, Jerusalem and the temple
will be destroyed again.
5. Wars and desolations have been decreed upon the
Jews and Jerusalem.
6. The Destroyer will continue his deadly work until
the end of time.
Consider this text: “After the sixty-two ‘sevens,’ the Anointed
One will be cut off and will have nothing. The people of the
ruler who will come will destroy the city and the sanctuary.
The end will come like a flood: War will continue until the
end, and desolations have been decreed.” (Daniel 9:26) This
verse says several things about Jesus and Jerusalem. Verse 26
predicts that Messiah will be rejected and disowned (cut off from
Israel, as in having no inheritance). Then, Gabriel told Daniel that
Jerusalem and the rebuilt temple will be destroyed again by “the
people of the ruler who will come . . . .” About six hundred
years later, Jesus Himself predicted the second temple would be
destroyed when He said to His disciples, “ ‘Do you see all these
things [pointing toward Jerusalem and the temple]?’ he asked. ‘I
tell you the truth, not one stone here will be left on another;
every one will be thrown down.’ ” (Matthew 24:2, insertion
mine) The Romans fulfilled this prophecy in A.D. 70. When they
broke through the walls of Jerusalem, a soldier threw a firebrand
into the temple complex. Thousands of Jews had sealed themselves
in the temple thinking that God would not allow His holy temple to
be destroyed. They were wrong. Fire quickly ignited the cedar that
generously adorned the edifice. To escape the fire the Jews threw
open the huge temple doors. As they ran to escape the fire, the
Romans slaughtered them. So many Jews were killed that day that
history says blood flowed down the temple steps like a river.
Because of the intense heat from the fire, millions of dollars in gold
ornamentation, utensils and goldware melted and the liquid metal
flowed into the cracks of the stones used to construct the temple. To
recover the gold, Roman soldiers literally pulled the temple apart –
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 211

stone by stone.
Another interesting point is found in Gabriel’s choice of words. He
said, “The people of the ruler who will come will destroy the
city and the sanctuary . . . .” Why did Gabriel say, “The people
of the ruler. . . .”? These words have a context and meaning that
need to be understood. In the previous verse, Gabriel said, “. . .
From the issuing of the decree to restore and rebuild
Jerusalem until the Anointed One, the ruler, comes. . . .” Did
you notice that the Anointed One (Messiah) is called a “ruler.”
Gabriel elevated the destruction of Jerusalem in A.D. 70 to that of a
divine decree issued by “the ruler,” Jesus Christ Himself. The
Romans were sent to destroy Jerusalem by One who overrules. The
Romans were unwitting servants of God, just like the Babylonians
had been unwitting servants of God (Jeremiah 25:9) when they
destroyed Jerusalem the first time. If Israel had cooperated with
God, the world would have enjoyed a glorious outcome when Jesus
came to Earth! The kingdom of God would have been established.
Israel would have been a kingdom of priests, the head of all nations
and not the tail. Unfortunately, Israel refused to accept Messiah
and submit to His truth. Therefore, “the Ruler” rejected them again
(Matthew 23:37,38), and in A.D. 70, He destroyed Jerusalem.
The expression, “The end will come like a flood. . . .” accurately
portrays Rome’s destruction of Jerusalem. The Romans literally
carried away everything of value as a flood carries away everything
in its path. In ancient times, the most destructive force known to
the human race was a flood of water. A pent-up wall of snow-melt
descending down a mountain ravine in the spring was an even more
devastating force than fire! Such a flood could remove huge stone
walls and bury cities in mud and debris, making recovery impossible
or impractical. (Hosea 5:10; Isaiah 59:19; Isaiah 8:6,7) Gabriel’s
words were fulfilled in A.D. 70, when the destruction of Jerusalem
and its temple came like a devastating flood.
Gabriel said, “War will continue until the end, and desolations
have been decreed [upon Jerusalem].” (Insertion mine) The
history of the city of Jerusalem since A.D. 70 has been one of war
and bloodshed, and this will continue until the end of time.
Contrary to every human effort, Jerusalem has not been at peace
and it will never be peaceful. Jerusalem is not the city of God. Two
212 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

cultures and religions cannot inhabit the same space and be at peace.
Men may negotiate a temporary cease-fire, and Lucifer may establish
his throne in Jerusalem when he appears on Earth, but there will be
no lasting peace and safety in Jerusalem. God has decreed it.
Gabriel said, “. . . And on the wing of abominations will come
one who makes desolate, even until a complete destruction,
one that is decreed, is poured out on the one who makes
desolate.” (Daniel 9:27, NASB) The last portion of verse 27 is hard
to translate smoothly into English. This explains why we find such
diverse wording in different translations of the Bible. After
reviewing several respected translations, I have chosen to use the
New American Standard Bible for this particular verse, because the
ideas expressed in this translation are easier to understand. Gabriel
predicts an unseen destroyer [Lucifer] will continue to cause
desolations long after Jerusalem is destroyed. His rage against
God’s people will not end until God’s wrath is poured out upon him.
You may recall from Daniel 8, that the stern-faced king will
eventually become visible. When he appears, he will destroy
everything in his wake, even the holy people. Daniel 8 also assures
us that this ruler will be brought to his end, but not by human
power.
A great tragedy is predicted in Gabriel’s last three statements.
These statements are compelling and sobering because Israel’s
disaster could have been diverted. Jesus cried, “O Jerusalem,
Jerusalem, you who kill the prophets and stone those sent to
you, how often I have longed to gather your children
together, as a hen gathers her chicks under her wings, but
you were not willing. Look, your house is left to you
desolate.” (Matthew 23:37,38) John summarized Israel’s rebellion
and their rejection of Messiah in one verse when he wrote, “He
came to that which was his own, but his own did not receive
him.” (John 1:11)
The 2,300 Evenings and Mornings
One final issue has to be addressed before closing this study on
Daniel 9. In fact, the timing of the 2,300 days of Daniel 8:14 cannot
be established without first understanding the seventy weeks of
Daniel 9. Let us revisit our examination of the 2,300 evenings and
mornings by asking two questions: Does God interpret the 2,300 days
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 213

as 2,300 days or 2,300 years, and when do they start? These are valid
questions and they deserve careful answers.
The 2,300 days in Daniel 8:14 share some similarity with the time,
times and half a time (1,260 years) mentioned in Daniel 7:25,
because neither of these time-periods is given a starting date. This
is not a big problem because both time-periods have a definite
length and end with an event that can be identified. So, we can
calculate backwards from the event at the end to a starting date.
Evidently, God did not give a starting event in either of these
prophecies because the information in Daniel was sealed up until
the time of the end. To be blunt about it, the generation that really
needs to understand Daniel and Revelation is the generation that
will experience the closing events of Earth’s history. Given this
emphasis on the final generation, the following steps have led me to
conclude that the 2,300 days of Daniel 8:14 represent 2,300 years.
Furthermore, I conclude they began at the same time as the seventy
weeks of Daniel 9 (457 B.C.).
Step 1
Daniel wrote, “While I was speaking and praying, confessing
my sin and the sin of my people Israel and making my
request to the Lord my God for his holy hill – while I was still
in prayer, Gabriel, the man I had seen in the earlier vision
[Daniel 8], came to me in swift flight about the time of the
evening sacrifice. He instructed me and said to me, ‘Daniel, I
have now come to give you insight and understanding. As
soon as you began to pray, an answer was given, which I
have come to tell you, for you are highly esteemed.
Therefore, consider the message and understand the [earlier]
vision:’ ” (Daniel 9:20-23, insertion mine) Daniel identifies Gabriel
as the “man” he had seen in his earlier vision. (See Daniel 8:16-19.)
Gabriel told Daniel that he had come to give Daniel insight and
understanding into the [earlier] vision. Which vision? The previous
vision given to Daniel is recorded in Daniel 8. This is the vision
where Daniel met Gabriel. It does not make sense for Gabriel to
say, “I have just been sent to you to give you insight and
understanding about a vision that does yet not exist.” Gabriel’s
remarks indicate that Daniel 9 is intimately connected to Daniel 8,
which suggests there is a relationship between the 2,300 days in
214 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

Daniel 8 and the seventy weeks in Daniel 9.

Step 2
Notice the words of Gabriel: “Seventy ‘sevens’ are decreed for your
people. . . .” (Daniel 9:24, italics mine) The Hebrew word translated
decreed (NIV) or determined (KJV) comes from the Hebrew word
chathak which means “to cut off” or “to determine by separation.”
This Hebrew word is used once in the Bible so by itself, it cannot
resolve many questions. However, it does make an important
contribution to our understanding of the seventy weeks. The word
indicates that a smaller period of time (seventy weeks) is “cut off” or
“separated” from a larger unit of time (2,300 years). This may sound
too simple, but the following process is very important. The Jubilee
calender forces seventy weeks to represent 490 years, and the Jubilee
Calendar forces the 2,300 days to represent 2,300 years. Therefore,
the short time-period of seventy weeks are cut off from the larger
time-period of the 2,300 days. In other words, the seventy weeks of
Daniel 9 are “separated” from the 2,300 years given in the “earlier
vision” of Daniel 8.
Gabriel was sent to Daniel in the first vision to explain the ram, goat
and horn power (Daniel 8) and Gabriel was sent to Daniel in the
second vision with “an answer” for Daniel’s question. Daniel wanted
to know how Israel fit into God’s larger picture. The details presented
in Daniel 9 concern the nation of Israel and they belong within the
larger prophecy of Daniel 8. Since the decree to restore Jerusalem
and rebuild the temple in Daniel 9 (457 B.C.) was issued during the
time of the kingdom of the ram in Daniel 8 (538-331 B.C.), there is a
solid link between the timing of Daniel 8 and Daniel 9.
Here is an illustration showing how the word chathak functions in
this context: Suppose your son asks if he can go play with the kids
next door. You notice the trash can in the kitchen is full, so you say,
“You can go play for one hour, but your hour includes taking out the
trash.” In this illustration, the time required to take out the trash is
“cut off” or separated out of the hour allotted with the kids next door
– and we know that in such a situation, the trash will probably
disappear in the twinkling of an eye.
Of course, the word chathak does not tell us if the seventy weeks are
separated from the beginning or the end of the 2,300 years, but the
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 215

word indicates the seventy weeks are “cut off” from the 2,300 years
because there is no other time-period in Daniel 8. More will be said
about starting both time periods with the decree of Artaxerxes (457
B.C.) in a moment.
Step 3
The 2,300 days have to be interpreted as 2,300 years for two
reasons: First, Rule Four (mentioned at the end of Chapter 1)
requires days to be translated as years during the operation of the
Jubilee Calendar. Second, if seventy weeks amount to 490 years –
using the scale of a day for a year, then the 2,300 days have to use
the same scale and represent years as well, because a person cannot
separate 490 years from 2,300 literal days (about six years and four
months). However, it is possible to “cut off” 490 years from 2,300
years. If the seventy weeks are “cut off” from the 2,300 years, this
forces the 2,300 years into the operation of the Jubilee Calendar!
Interpreting the 2,300 days as 2,300 years is consistent with Rule
Four, which states, “God reckons apocalyptic time in two ways: (a) a
day for a year, and (b) as literal time. The presence or absence of the
Jubilee Calendar determines how God measures time.”
The Seventy Weeks of Daniel 9 “Cut Off”
from the 2,300 Days of Daniel 8:14
Chart 6.10

457 B.C. -- A.D. 33 A.D. 34 ---------------------------------- 1844

Seventy Weeks
1810 Years
(490 Years)

<------------------------------2300 Years ------------------------------------->

Step 4
Sometimes, an answer to a prophetic question can be given with few
words. However, there are segments of Bible prophecy that require
a lot of background information before an answer will make much
sense. The timing of the 2,300 years is such an issue. We have
examined a lot of details in this study, and it is possible to miss
seeing the forest when studying a tree. In this light, the following
216 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

observation is offered for your consideration. Remember, that the

book of Daniel contains a set of non-conditional prophecies. In other
words, everything given to Daniel is an outline of God’s pre-
determined plans for Earth. For example, God determined that
Babylon would fall to the Medes and Persians and Medo-Persia
would fall to the Greeks, and it was predicted the saints would be
handed over to the little horn power for 1,260 years, etc. All of the
predicted events in Daniel are non-conditional.
While Daniel was receiving visions of non-conditional events,
Ezekiel was receiving a series of conditional visions from God. The
visions given to Ezekiel are very different than the visions given to
Daniel. The visions given to Ezekiel were conditional. Ezekiel is in
Babylon just like Daniel, but God told this prophet that 1) He
destroyed Jerusalem and the temple because Israel violated Plan A.
However, God also told Ezekiel that He has a redemptive plan for
Israel (Plan B). The fulfillment of Plan B requires Israel’s full
cooperation. God will give Israel one more chance to accomplish all
that He wanted! Looking at the visions given to both prophets, we
find that God places two conditions on Plan B. First, the time
allotted is seventy weeks – counting from the decree of Artaxerxes
in 457 B.C. Second, Plan B can be accomplished only if a majority of
people in Israel experience the miracle of being born again. (Ezekiel
36:25-27)
Consider the contrast between Daniel’s prophecies and Ezekiel’s
prophecies. God told Daniel what would be if Israel failed to
cooperate. God told Ezekiel what would be if Israel cooperated. The
point is that God cuts off seventy weeks from the 2,300 years to give
Israel a chance to terminate (seal up) Daniel’s visions and prophecy!
If Israel had cooperated with God, the prophecies of Daniel would
not have come to pass. The prophecies of Daniel would have
remained a secret forever. We have seen God do this before. If
Israel had cooperated with God at the time of the Exodus, the first
generation would not have had to die in the wilderness. God was
willing to put the children of Israel in the Promised Land within two
years of leaving Egypt!
When the 2,300 years are seen in this light, it makes sense that a
benevolent God would cut off seventy weeks from the beginning of a
longer prophecy to allow time for Israel to cooperate. Even though
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 217

God told Daniel that Israel would fail and that the city and the
temple would be destroyed again, God was willing to give Israel one
more chance. What a patient God! What a wonderful Savior! It is
so amazing to realize that God does not treat us according to His
perfect foreknowledge. He compassionately treats us according to
His marvelous love. When we begin to see these elements of God’s
character unfold from prophecy, we know we are on the right track.
Step 5
Because God is the architect of Bible prophecy, perfect harmony is
found in the sum of all the parts. Remember, none of the seventeen
prophecies in Daniel and Revelation stand alone. Each prophecy
contributes something very important to a much larger picture that
spans many centuries. The seventy weeks in Daniel 9 are not
isolated from the prophecies in Daniel 2, 7, 8 and elsewhere! Each
of the seventeen prophecies reveals a piece of the big picture. God is
the designer of this great matrix, which means the outcome will be
harmonious. Each prophecy requires the others to be present, and
in turn, supports those around it. I have often remarked, “A person
has to understand the whole thing before he can appreciate
anything!”
At the end of Chapter 1, I wrote that a person needs to have a
working knowledge of four rules before all of the pieces in both
Daniel and Revelation will come together and align harmoniously.
Misplacing 2.3 millennia (2,300 years), or even 2,300 days, can
create problems that cannot be solved later on. This point was
demonstrated in our study on Antiochus IV. If we follow valid rules,
the sum of all the prophetic parts will produce one harmonious
truth. The most compelling reason for interpreting the 2,300 days
as 2,300 years and beginning this time-period with the seventy
weeks of Daniel 9 is the harmony that it produces. Of course, it
takes awhile to discover and understand this harmony because
there is no substitute for knowledge and understanding. Carefully
read the following statements and refer to Chart 6.11 to see if you
can identify the timing of each statement:
A. (Find 457 B.C. in the Daniel 9 row.) The decree of
Artaxerxes in 457 B.C. marks the beginning of the
seventy weeks. Notice that this event begins during the
218 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

Relationships between Daniel 7, Daniel 8, Daniel 9

and Revelation 6

Rev 6 Seven Seals 123 4 5 6

457 B.C. A.D. 33

Daniel 9 |---Seventy Weeks ---| 1798 |

Daniel 8 |---457 B.C.------------- 2300 Day/Years -----------1844 ---| The Time of the End

Horn
Goat with Power
Ram
One Great Judgment Judgment Fromthe
with
Horn -- of the of the North:
Two
Then Four Dead Living Stern
Horns
Horns Faced
King
|-------1,260 Years ----|
A.D. 538 to 1798 Beasts are
Bear
Leopard Monster Little Horn Persecutes Little Horn Burned
with Books
Daniel 7 with Four with 10 Heard Up in the
Three Jesus Found Worthy to Opened
Heads Horns Boasting Fire at the
Ribs Receive the Kingdomin End
1798

Medo
Grecia Rome Many Kings 10 Kings
Persia

Chart 6.11
time of the ram, which was discussed in Daniel 8.
B. (Find 457 B.C. in the Daniel 8 row.) If the 2,300 days of
Daniel 8:14 are interpreted as 2,300 years, the seventy
weeks can be “cut off” from this larger time period. Even
though the Bible does not explicitly say the seventy weeks
are cut off from the beginning of the 2,300 years, the
matrix resolves this question. Daniel viewed the
cleansing of Heaven’s temple. (Daniel 7:9,10) We know
this event has to occur after 1798, when the Ancient of
Days took His seat. Even though we have not examined
the seven seals of Revelation, the opening of the third seal
harmoniously aligns with 1844. The 2,300 years began in
Chapter 6 – Daniel 9 219

the Spring of 457 B.C. and they terminated in the Spring of

1844. Jesus began cleansing Heaven’s temple in the
Spring of 1844.
C. (Find the end of the seventy weeks in the Daniel 9 row.)
The public ministry of Jesus (A.D. 27-30) affirms the
location of the seventieth week and the accuracy of the
457 B.C. decree. According to Daniel 9, Jesus died in the
middle of the seventieth week. The synchrony of the Sun
and moon, and the presence of two different calendars in
Israel harmoniously align, and altogether they confirm
the date of His death, April 7, A.D. 30. The certainty of
457 B.C. as a starting date for the seventy weeks also
insures the certainty of the termination of the 2,300 years
in 1844.
D. (Locate 1798 in the Daniel 7 row.) The little horn of
Daniel 7 persecuted the saints for 1,260 years. As
predicted, the persecution of the saints ended in 1798
because the Ancient of Days issued a judgment (a
restraining order) on behalf of the saints from His throne
in Heaven. (Daniel 7:21,22) This event in Heaven is
directly linked with the fall of the papacy on Earth.
Generals Waller and Berthier captured the pope and
placed him in exile in February 1798. At that time, the
Roman Catholic Church’s control over Europe was almost
fatally wounded. (Daniel 7:26) Since the signing of the
Lateran treaty on February 11, 1929, this fatal wound has
been healing. (Revelation 13:1-3)
E. (Find 1798 in the Daniel 7 row.) Jesus was found worthy
to receive Earth as His kingdom in 1798. (Daniel 7:13,14)
F. (Find 1798 in the Revelation 6 row.) Even though the
seven seals of Revelation have not been examined, the
following statement is presented to help you see an ever-
widening matrix. In Revelation 4-6, Jesus was found
worthy to receive the book sealed with seven seals in
1798. Jesus began opening the seals. He opened the
third seal in 1844. As a result, people on Earth came to
understand the cleansing of Heaven’s temple. Christ’s
judgment bar has been underway since 1844. (2 Corin-
220 Chapter 6 – Daniel 9

thians 5:10)
G. (Find 1844 in the Daniel 8 row.) At the end of the 2,300
years, in the spring of 1844, Jesus began going through
the books of record and passing judgment on those who
have died. Jesus is judging the dead to see who will live
in His kingdom. If a person is found to be rebellious,
Jesus assigns the guilt of the sinner upon his own head.
If a person is found to be submissive to the Holy Spirit,
the sinner’s guilt is assigned to Lucifer, the scapegoat.
Ultimately, Heaven’s temple will be cleansed of sin when
the seventh trumpet of Revelation 11 sounds. (Revelation
15:7,8)
H. (Find 1844 in the Revelation 6 row.) The world’s
inhabitants began to hear about the cleansing of Heaven’s
temple because the third seal was opened in 1844. The
fourth seal will open soon. It will happen suddenly and
unexpectedly. When it does, the Great Tribulation and
the judgment of the living begins.
Summary
This chapter has covered many issues. Although this has been an
involved study, hopefully you can see how the seventy weeks of
Daniel 9 and the 2,300 years of Daniel 8 have been fulfilled. God’s
timing is perfect. Because of God’s generous grace to Israel (the
offer of Plan B), the seventy weeks were “cut off” from the 2,300
years. God was willing to abort all of the visions given to Daniel if
Israel would cooperate with Him. Unfortunately, Israel did not
cooperate with God and the “rebuilt” Jerusalem and temple were
totally destroyed in A.D. 70. We could say that “Plan C” is now
underway, and in the Spring of 1844, the cleansing process of
Heaven’s temple began. This means that Jesus is currently going
through the Books of Record to determine who will live in His
coming kingdom. Very soon, Jesus will turn His attention to
judging the living in a sequence of events known as the Great
Tribulation.
 Chapter 7
Daniel 10:1 - 11:35 – Israel’
Israel’ss Prophetic Destiny
Prophetic

“So when you see standing in the holy place ‘the

abomination that causes desolation,’ spoken of
through the prophet Daniel – let the [Gentile] reader
[also] understand – then let those who are in Judea flee
to the mountains. Let no one on the roof of his house
go down to take anything out of the house. Let no one
in the field go back to get his cloak. How dreadful it will
be in those days for pregnant women and nursing
mothers! Pray that your flight will not take place in
winter or on the Sabbath.”
– Matthew 24:15-20, insertions mine
Introduction
About 534 B.C., God gave Daniel a compelling vision that came in
two installments. The first installment contained scenes from a
protracted series of wars and the second consisted of another visit
with the angel, Gabriel. Gabriel was sent to Daniel, who was
nearing eighty years of age, to explain certain things about the wars
which he saw in the first installment. Daniel received these
installments about three weeks apart. When Daniel put the vision
in written form, he, like all other Bible writers, did not divide his
report into the chapters and verses that are found in our Bibles
today. This point is made because Daniel 10 through 12 should be
understood as one vision, even though it covers three chapters. A
similar situation occurred in Daniel 8 and 9. Daniel 8 contains a
ram, goat and horn power. Later, Gabriel was sent to Daniel with
more information about Daniel 8. (Daniel 9:21)
Today, few religious leaders speak about the last chapters of Daniel.
This is unfortunate because this particular vision contains valuable
information for the final generation. God does not give visions to His
prophets without revealing important information. As we examine
this vision, keep four issues in mind:
222 Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35

1. Two Groups of Beneficiaries

God gave this vision to Daniel to benefit two groups of people who
would live in the future. The first group lived about 600 years after
this vision was given. This group consisted of Christians who lived
in Jerusalem at the time of its destruction in A.D. 70. The second
group of people for which this vision was given are those Christians
who will live on Earth during the Great Tribulation. This vision
benefits both groups because they will share a common experience.
Early Christians experienced the destruction of Jerusalem, and
Great Tribulation Christians will experience the destruction of
Earth. Because there are distinct parallels in these two events, God
gave one vision for the benefit of two groups of people. This is not
unusual, because Jesus, in Matthew 24 and elsewhere in the Bible,
compared the destruction of Jerusalem with the end of the world.
For example, Jesus told His disciples, “Then you will be handed
over to be persecuted and put to death, and you will be hated
by all nations because of me. At that time many will turn
away from the faith and will betray and hate each other, and
many false prophets will appear and deceive many people. . . .
They will put you out of the synagogue; in fact, a time is
coming when anyone who kills you will think he is offering a
service to God. They will do such things because they have
not known the Father or me.” (Matthew 24:9-11, John 16:2,3)
History reveals that many of the early Christians, like Stephen,
were martyrs for their faith. (Acts 6 and 7) The Jews, including
Saul of Tarsus, thought they were doing God a service by killing
Christians! (See Deuteronomy 13 and 1 Timothy 1:13.) People living
during the Great Tribulation will see similar parallels. Soon, God’s
people will be persecuted, even martyred for their faith, and
amazingly, people who persecute and martyr God’s people will think
they are doing God a service! (Revelation 6:9-11; 13:1-10; 14:12,13;
16:4-7)
Other parallels in Matthew 24 merit our attention. For example,
Jesus said, “As it was in the days of Noah, so it will be at the
coming of the Son of Man. For in the days before the flood,
people were eating and drinking, marrying and giving in
marriage, up to the day Noah entered the ark; and they knew
nothing about what would happen until the flood came and
took them all away. That is how it will be at the coming of
Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35 223

the Son of Man.” (Matthew 24:37-39) Jesus compared the disbelief

and ignorance of the people who lived before the flood with the
people who will be living at the end of time. Of course, ignorance is
not limited to people living in Noah’s day nor at the end of the
world. This is why Jesus warned His listeners to anticipate
Jerusalem’s destruction, “ ‘Do you see all these things [the
temple complex]?’ he asked. ‘I tell you the truth, not one stone
here will be left on another; every one will be thrown down...
So when you see standing in the holy place ‘the abomination
that causes desolation,’ spoken of through the prophet
Daniel – let the [Gentile] reader [also] understand – then let
those who are in Judea flee to the mountains.’ ” (Matthew
24:2,15,16; Luke 21:22, insertions mine.) Jesus quoted Daniel 11:31,
because the vision in Daniel 10-12 lays out a historical sequence of
events that includes the destruction of Jerusalem! Not only did
early Christians benefit from Jesus’ remarks, but the final
generation will also benefit from this amazing vision. Remember,
God gave this vision to Daniel about 540 B.C., and it was meant to
benefit two groups of people who would be separated by almost 2,000
years!
2. God’s Foreknowledge
The vision of Daniel 10-12, like that of Daniel 8-9, predicted Israel’s
failure long before the seventy weeks began. One of God’s most
amazing qualities is His ability to treat His children according to
the principle of love, even though He knows our choices before we
make them. Think this through. If you knew your child would flunk
out of college, would you spend $50,000 on his or her college
education anyway? If you knew your upcoming marriage was going
to end in a bitter divorce, would you still get married? God is all-
knowing (omniscient). He knows everything in the past, present and
future. Even more, He is also omnipotent, which means He has the
power to manipulate everyone and everything in the universe to His
satisfaction. However, God does not use His foreknowledge or His
omnipotence to manipulate His creatures for His benefit. If He
manipulated us according to His desires, He would not be a God of
love; instead, He would be a self-serving God. The only way God’s
creatures can live at peace with God is through trust. We have to
believe that He will not violate the principle of love even though we
cannot understand His ways at times. God does not ask us to trust
224 Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35

Him with these incredible powers without giving us good reason to

trust Him. Calvary proves the Father and the Son are worthy of
complete trust.
Here is a profound point. God uses His mighty powers (omnipotence,
omniscience and omnipresence) to insure the principle of love will be
exalted throughout the universe. God does not use His incredible
powers to keep Himself on the throne! The principle of love is
essential for eternal happiness (there is no alternative). The
humiliation and death of Jesus assures every created being that the
principle of love will forever be the basis of God’s government. In
other words, if God could have resolved the sin problem without
Jesus’ death, He would have done so. But, “God so loved the
world that He gave His only begotten Son. . . . ” This is why
John wrote, “God is love.” (1 John 4:8) What a marvelous God!
God deals with us according to His great love, even though He
knows our choices may not be good. In other words, God is not like
us. A selfish heart will use manipulation, deceit and any other
means at its disposal to satisfy its selfish desires! God does not
work this way. He is motivated by pure love. God is selfless. The
vision recorded in Daniel 11 reveals Israel’s failure long before the
seventy weeks began. If God foreknew their failure, why did God
give Israel 490 years of probationary time? (For that matter, God
foreknew the failure of Lucifer and Adam and Eve, yet He gave
them life and probationary time.) These examples highlight what is
so amazing about God. Even though He foreknew Israel’s failure,
God granted seventy weeks of grace because He wanted Israel to
have the opportunity to succeed or fail. The potential was awesome.
If Israel chose a life of faith and submission to God, God was ready
and willing to establish His kingdom on Earth at the end of the 490
years decreed in Daniel 9. If Jesus had been able to establish His
kingdom on Earth, Israel would have become a kingdom of priests
who served the Lord on behalf of all the nations of Earth. (Exodus
19:5,6) However, we now know that Israel chose the way of
rebellion, and God abandoned the nation of Israel and destroyed
Jerusalem. If the Jews had experienced God’s love and properly
understood Daniel 10-12 before Jesus came to Earth, world history
would have been so different.
Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35 225

3. Caught in the Middle

The Daniel 10-12 vision tells the story of a series of protracted wars
fought over several centuries. In a geographical, religious and
political sense, Israel was trapped in the middle of endless wars
between nations from the north and the south. Israel’s unique
position mirrors the general experience of God’s people in a fallen
world. Many times God’s people are “caught in the middle” between
opposing forces. Moreover, God forbade Israel from taking sides or
making alliances for protection (Isaiah 30), because He wanted
Israel to understand that they were only safe if they remained allied
with Him.
Keep three entities in mind as you study this vision: the kingdom of
the north, the kingdom of the south and the kingdom of God. God
placed the ancient nation of Israel geographically “in the middle of
the nations.” (Ezekiel 5:5) He deliberately placed Israel in this
strategic location to be representatives of His love and truth. God
wanted the nations of the world to become acquainted with a special
group of people. However, a prominent position can have adverse
consequences, too. When Israel failed to honor God, He humiliated
them by making them a reproach to all of the surrounding nations.
(Ezekiel 5:14) God displayed His wrath against Jerusalem two
times; first in 605 B.C., and again in A.D. 70.
Israel’s prominent location was to be an asset or a liability,
depending on their relationship with God. The vision given in
Daniel 10-12 proves that God deliberately restored tiny Israel to
their homeland at the end of seventy years in Babylon, but their
return home put them between two huge warring forces If Israel
had cooperated with God, they would have had a powerful impact on
the nations to the north and to the south. Israel could have used
this prophecy to demonstrate the superiority of their God above the
gods of the pagans, because this vision discloses the outcome of
numerous wars before they happened! God wanted His people to be
informed about His larger plans, and He wanted Israel to tell the
nations that other than Jehovah, there are no other gods. (Isaiah 44)
God did not want Israel to be afraid of the larger nations, but God’s
plans were not realized because of Israel’s rebellion. As a result, the
only group that has benefitted from this vision thus far was early
Christians.
226 Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35

Caught Between Two Groups of People

Since we are considering Israel being caught in the middle of a series
of wars, a few comments about this concept is necessary. Several
parallels can be made of ancient Israel’s position between the kings of
the north and the kings of the south. For example, after Jesus went
to Heaven, early Christians found themselves caught between Rome’s
hatred for the Jews and the Jew’s hatred for the Romans. The
Romans viewed Christians as an offshoot sect of the Jews, and the
Jews viewed Christians as traitors worthy of death. Both groups
hated the Christians! What a terrible place to be. God’s people will
have a similar experience during the Great Tribulation. As the Great
Tribulation unfolds, three groups of people will appear:
1. Religious wicked. These will be people like the Pharisees of old.
They will devise and endorse the false doctrines of Babylon. This
group of people will embrace the Antichrist when he appears
because they will believe that he is God. These people are
identified in Daniel 11 as followers of the king of the north
(Lucifer).
2. Non-religious wicked. These people will be like the Moabites
of old. The Moabites did not worship Jehovah; they had their
own gods. These people will rebel against the laws imposed by
Babylon. They will refuse to submit to the laws and authority of
Lucifer, the Antichrist. This group of people is described in
Daniel 11 as the followers of the king of the south. Wicked
people of Earth will be divided in their loyalties – the north
versus the south.
3. Saints. The saints will make up a third group of people during
the Great Tribulation. They are identified as “the holy people”
mentioned in Daniel 12:7 and Revelation 11:2. The saints will
oppose the false doctrines of Babylon and they will refuse to
submit to the laws of Babylon because of their faith in Jesus and
obedience to His commandments. Because the saints will not
join either group, the groups in the north and in the south will
both hate the saints. (See also Revelation 12:17; 13:7; 14:12.)
Lucifer and his angels will eliminate the kingdom of the south by
killing its people. (Revelation 9:15) Many saints will also be
martyred during this time. (Revelation 6:9) The net effect is that
Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35 227

when Jesus appears at the Second Coming, two groups of people will
remain: one-third of the world’s population worshiping the Lamb of
God, and two-thirds of the world worshiping the Antichrist, Lucifer.
(Zechariah 13:8,9)
Remember, God gave this vision to benefit two groups of people. The
first section of this vision (Daniel 10:1-11:35) lays out a chronological
sequence of historical events for the benefit of early Christians. By
following the sequence of events in this vision, they could determine
and anticipate the outcome of Jerusalem’s fate. The second section
of the vision (Daniel 11:26-12:13) belongs to Great Tribulation
Christians. For them, this vision describes the future actions of the
stern-faced King from the North (Daniel 8), as well as some
information about the persecution of the saints during the
Tribulation. If you understand the first section of this vision
(pertaining to early Christians), the second section will make a lot
more sense because there are parallels between the two sections.
4. The Region of the North
The title, “The king of the north,” is used nine times, and the title,
“The king of the south,” is used ten times in this vision. These titles
have geographic value, as well as figurative value, because the kings
of the south and the north stand in opposition. Because the devil
will appear as the king of the north during the Great Tribulation,
review the following points about him (the Horn Power) in Daniel 8
before we proceed:
Horn Power from the North
1. The Horn Power will come out of one of the four
winds.
2. The Horn Power will come out of the north, but will grow
toward the south, east and west.
3. Divine destruction in the Old Testament consistently
comes out of the north.
4. God’s throne is located on the north side of His temple.
You may recall that King Nebuchadnezzar came out of “the north” to
implement divine judgment against Jerusalem. (Jeremiah 6:1,22;
25:9) Likewise, divine judgment against Babylon came out of “the
228 Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35

north.” (Jeremiah 50:2,3) When the Antichrist appears, he will also

come out of the north. (Daniel 8:9; 11:36-40) Finally, when Jesus
returns, He will come out of the north with divine destruction. (Job
37:22; Daniel 11:44) Of course, from our point of view on Earth,
which rotates in a counter-clockwise direction, Jesus will physically
show up in the East!
Initial Summary
Try to keep the following four issues in mind as you examine this
vision: (1) It was given for the benefit of two groups of Christians;
(2) God has perfect foreknowledge, but He does not use His fore-
knowledge to manipulate the outcome of events; (3) God’s people will
be caught in the middle of opposing forces; and (4) God will empower
the Antichrist, the stern-faced king that comes out of the north, to
cause great destruction because of the world’s rebellion. (2 Thessa-
lonians 2:11,12)
What Did Jesus Mean?
Before we examine the details of Daniel 10-12, one more point needs
to be presented. Jesus warned His disciples, “So when you see
standing in the holy place ‘the abomination that causes
desolation,’ spoken of through the prophet Daniel – let the
reader understand – then let those who are in Judea flee to
the mountains.” (Matthew 24:15:16) When Jesus spoke these
words, He knew that Daniel 11:31 would be fulfilled forty years
later. According to Webster, an abomination is “a despicable act, an
insult having no equal, a defiant act of insolence and total disdain.”
The highest insult or abomination that anyone can commit is to
insult or defy God. Consider the following texts taken from the
Kings James Version and notice how the Bible defines an
abomination:
1. Exodus 8:25, 26 “And Pharaoh called for Moses and for
Aaron, and said, Go ye, sacrifice to your God in the land. And
Moses said, It is not meet so to do; for we shall sacrifice the
abomination of the Egyptians to the Lord our God: lo, shall
we sacrifice the abomination of the Egyptians before their
eyes, and will they not stone us?” The ancient Egyptians
believed in the transmigration of the soul. They considered the
slaughter of animals to be a grave insult to their ancestors (who
Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35 229

might be living in an animal). They also considered the killing of

animals an abomination to their gods. Knowing this, Moses wanted
to leave Egypt and offer animal sacrifices to God in the wilderness to
avoid agitating the Egyptians with inflammatory behavior.
2. Leviticus 18:20-22 “Moreover thou shalt not lie carnally with
thy neighbor’s wife, to defile thyself with her. And thou shalt
not let any of thy seed pass through the fire to Molech,
neither shalt thou profane the name of thy God: I am the
Lord. Thou shalt not lie with mankind, as with womankind:
it is abomination.” God considers a homosexual relationship to be
an abomination. He created us in His image (Genesis 1:26) and is
insulted when we debase His image. God also considers a sexual
relationship with an animal to be an abomination. (Leviticus 20:15)
3. Deuteronomy 17:1 “Thou shalt not sacrifice unto the Lord
thy God any bullock, or sheep, wherein is blemish, or any
evilfavouredness: for that is an abomination unto the Lord
thy God.” When God established the ritual of animal sacrifices, He
forbade anyone from presenting an offering that was considered a
“second” or that had a known blemish on it. Each sacrificial animal
represented the perfect “Lamb of God” who would take away the
sins of the world. If any flaw was found in Jesus, He could not be
man’s perfect substitute! Therefore, presenting a blemished
sacrifice was an insult or abomination to God.
4. Proverbs 6:16-19 “These six things doth the Lord hate: yea,
seven are an abomination unto him: A proud look, a lying
tongue, and hands that shed innocent blood, An heart that
deviseth wicked imaginations, feet that be swift in running
to mischief, a false witness that speaketh lies, and he that
soweth discord among brethren.” God hates these seven things
because they destroy love. God will not tolerate these forms of
behavior in His coming kingdom because they ruin life, and this is
an insult to the Author of Life.
These few verses (and there are many others in the Bible) define
certain actions that God considers an abomination. An abomination
is a despicable act directed towards God. As you might expect, God
may wink at our ignorance, but He does not tolerate insults very
long. King Sennacherib insulted God and an angel struck 185,000 of
230 Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35

his soldiers dead in a single night! (2 Kings 19:35)

“. . . .That Causes Desolation”
Now that we know that an abomination is a great insult toward God,
it should be easier to make sense of the prophetic phrase, “the
abomination that causes desolation.” This phrase comes from a
Jewish mindset because the Jews regarded their homeland as the
“holy land,” that is, land set apart or separated from other nations
for Abraham’s descendants. They also considered their homeland to
be God’s “holy land” because God dwelt in their land; at the temple
in Jerusalem. Notice King David’s song of praise: “He struck down
all the firstborn of Egypt, the firstfruits of manhood in the
tents of Ham. But he brought his people out like a flock; he
led them like sheep through the desert. He guided them
safely, so they were unafraid; but the sea engulfed their
enemies. Thus he brought them to the border of His holy
land, to the hill country his right hand had taken. He drove
out nations before them and allotted their lands to them as
an inheritance; He settled the tribes of Israel in their
homes.” (Psalm 78:51-55, italics mine)
The word holy means “set apart” from the common or usual. The
term “holy land” defines land as that which is set apart from all
other lands. God set Israel apart from Egypt as a holy nation of
people. (Exodus 19:4-6) He placed Israel in the center of the
nations, at a special location, called “His holy land.” (Ezekiel 5:5)
The Levites and Their Pastureland
You may recall that God did not give a share of the Promised Land
to the tribe of Levi when Israel entered Canaan. “The Lord said to
Aaron, ‘You will have no inheritance in their land, nor will
you have any share among them; I am your share and your
inheritance among the Israelites. I give to the Levites all the
tithes in Israel as their inheritance in return for the work
they do while serving at the Tent of Meeting.’ ” (Numbers
18:20,21) God did this because He wanted to tie the prosperity of the
tribe of the Levites to their effectiveness as teachers and pastors of
His flock. If the priests were faithful and taught the people the
ways of the Lord, the nation would prosper, and the Levites would
prosper from the increase in tithe! If the priests failed to teach the
Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35 231

people the ways of the Lord, the nation would suffer, and the Levites
would suffer because of Israel’s economic failures.
When the time came for Israel to possess the holy land, God gave
Moses certain instructions about the Levites. Notice the size, place
and role of the pasturelands that were set apart for the priests: “On
the plains of Moab by the Jordan across from Jericho, the
Lord said to Moses, ‘Command the Israelites to give the
Levites towns to live in from the inheritance the Israelites
will possess. And give them pasturelands around the towns.
Then they will have towns to live in and pasturelands for
their cattle, flocks and all their other livestock. The
pasturelands around the towns that you give the Levites will
extend out fifteen hundred feet from the town wall. Outside
the town, measure three thousand feet on the east side, three
thousand on the south side, three thousand on the west and
three thousand on the north, with the town in the center.
They will have this area as pastureland for the towns. Six of
the towns you give the Levites will be cities of refuge, to
which a person who has killed someone may flee. In
addition, give them forty-two other towns. In all you must
give the Levites forty-eight towns, together with their
pasturelands. The towns you give the Levites from the land
the Israelites possess are to be given in proportion to the
inheritance of each tribe: Take many towns from a tribe that
has many, but few from one that has few.” (Numbers 35:1-8,
italics mine)
When the Israelites finally possessed the land, Joshua sanctified, or
“made holy,” Bezer, Ramoth, and Golan as cities of refuge on the
east side of the Jordan River, and Kedesh, Shechem and Kiriath
Arba on the west side of the Jordan River. (Joshua 20:7,8) These six
cities became known as “holy cities” because they were set apart as
cities of refuge. If a murder was committed, the murderer could seek
refuge by fleeing to one of these cities for either temporary or
permanent safety from the avenger of blood. About four hundred
years after Israel occupied the Promised Land, King David
overthrew the city of Jebus and established his throne there. David
renamed Jebus, “Jerusalem” (city of peace), and it became the
seventh (and last) of the holy cities. After Solomon’s death, the
kingdom of Israel was divided into two states and in 722 B.C., the
232 Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35

northern kingdom was destroyed. At that time, Jerusalem became

the only holy city remaining for the tribes in the south, Benjamin
and Judah.
When each “holy city” was established, the nearby pastureland
around the walls of the city was “set apart” for the Levites as a place
for their gardens and flocks. They called the pastureland around
the walls of each city “the holy place” or “holy ground” because it
was set apart for the Levites. When Jerusalem became a holy city,
the pastureland just outside the city was also set apart for the
priests to use exclusively. Even after the Babylonians destroyed
Jerusalem, God planned for the rebuilt city to have “holy ground”
surrounding its walls. (Ezekiel 45:1-6) Now that you know how the
language is used to describe the pastureland around the walls of the
holy cities, closely examine these two texts:
1. Jesus said, “So when you see standing in the holy place ‘the
abomination that causes desolation,’ spoken of through the
prophet Daniel – let the [Gentile] reader understand – then let
those who are in Judea flee to the mountains. Let no one on
the roof of his house go down to take anything out of the
house. Let no one in the field go back to get his cloak. How
dreadful it will be in those days for pregnant women and
nursing mothers! Pray that your flight will not take place in
winter or on the Sabbath.” (Matthew 24:15-20, insertion mine)
2. Jesus said, “When you see Jerusalem being surrounded by
armies, you will know that its desolation is near. Then let
those who are in Judea flee to the mountains, let those in the
city get out, and let those in the country not enter the city.
For this is the time of punishment in fulfillment of all that
has been written. How dreadful it will be in those days for
pregnant women and nursing mothers! There will be great
distress in the land and wrath against this people.” (Luke
21:20-23)
There is an interesting difference between these two texts. Both
Matthew and Luke heard Jesus give the same discourse. Years
later, when the gospels were written, Matthew, the Jew, wrote as a
Jew would have remembered Jesus’ prediction. Luke, a Gentile
Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35 233

converted to Christianity, wrote according to what he understood

Jesus to mean. Both men understood the meaning of Christ’s words.
In the Jewish mind, the city of Jerusalem was an object of highest
adoration and exaltation. Jerusalem was the hub of Judaism.
Jehovah’s temple was located on Mount Moriah, and the Jews
regarded Jerusalem as the invincible City of God. Given this
ideology, the Jews considered the presence of an uncircumcised
Gentile army standing in the land dedicated to the Levites to be an
insult to God. Luke confirms this understanding. He interprets
Jesus’ words to mean “when you see Jerusalem being surrounded by
foreign armies, you will know that its desolation is near.” Jesus was
trying to warn His followers about a future event that was
something unbearable to hear! Why would God allow His holy city
and His temple to be subjected to barbarians bent on destruction?
His justification for destroying Jerusalem a second time was the
same as the first destruction of the city and temple by
Nebuchadnezzar. God destroyed Israel because of defiant apostasy.
Jesus quoted Daniel 11:31 saying, “So when you see standing in
the holy place ‘the abomination that causes desolation,’
spoken of through the prophet Daniel . . .” because the first
section of the prophecy in Daniel 10-12 was about to reach
fulfillment in A.D. 70. This portion of Daniel’s prophecy was
fulfilled when Vespesian set siege to Jerusalem in A.D. 68. He
surrounded Jerusalem so that no one could enter or leave the city.
However, Nero died shortly after the siege began, and Vespasian
ordered his troops to return to Rome to secure his position on the
throne. The following year, the siege was renewed under the
leadership of Vespesian’s son, Titus. In A.D. 70, the city of
Jerusalem fell and was totally destroyed. When Vespasian lifted the
siege on Jerusalem and returned to Rome because of Nero’s death, a
short window of time opened up. The retreat gave believers enough
time to escape the city of Jerusalem. Early Christians understood
Daniel’s words, as well as Jesus’ warning. When Titus destroyed
Jerusalem the following year, few, if any, Christians perished.
Thousands of Christians survived because Jesus pointed them to
Daniel 11:31! Incidentally, the dispersion of thousands of Christians
from Jerusalem in A.D. 69 forced the gospel into many places where
it had not gone before.
A Different Commentary Style
234 Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35

Because the vision in Daniel 10-12 has one section applying to early
Christians and a second section applying to Great Tribulation
Christians, I have divided this vision into two sections. This chapter
deals with early Christians and the next chapter deals with Great
Tribulation Christians.
Because this vision presents several wars that can be somewhat
complicated to follow, a different style of commentary will be used.
According to the dictionary, a paraphrase is an attempt to clarify
the meaning of an author’s words by restating his or her original
idea using different words. On the other hand, a translation is a
direct conversion of words or their equivalent sense from one
language to another. The commentary style that follows is neither a
paraphrase nor a translation. The following commentary style
should be called interlacing. The text from Scripture will be
presented first, then my commentary will be interlaced with
Scripture so you can follow the vision as it moves back and forth
between the armies of the north and the south.
Daniel 10:1-6 (KJV) – Part I
“In the third year of Cyrus king of Persia a thing was
revealed unto Daniel, whose name was called Belteshazzar;
and the thing was true, but the time appointed was long: and
he understood the thing, and had understanding of the
vision. In those days I Daniel was mourning three full weeks.
I ate no pleasant bread, neither came flesh nor wine in my
mouth, neither did I anoint myself at all, till three whole
weeks were fulfilled. And in the four and twentieth day of
the first month, as I was by the side of the great river, which is
Hiddekel; Then I lifted up mine eyes, and looked, and behold a
certain man clothed in linen, whose loins were girded with fine
gold of Uphaz: His body also was like the beryl, and his face as
the appearance of lightning, and his eyes as lamps of fire, and
his arms and his feet like in colour to polished brass, and the
voice of his words like the voice of a multitude.”
Interlaced Commentary on Part I
“During the third year of Cyrus (534 B.C.), king of Persia, I, Daniel –
also called Belteshazzar by the Babylonians, received a vision. This
vision contained scenes of a great war and I did not understand the
Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35 235

vision. When the vision ended, I was sad and distressed for three
weeks because of what I had seen. I petitioned the Most High God
for understanding. I ate no delicious food; no meat or wine touched
my lips; and I used no cologne until the three weeks were over.
Then, on Nisan 24, I had another vision to help me understand the
vision of the great war. I was standing on the banks of the Tigris. I
looked up toward the sky and there I saw a glorious man dressed in
linen, wearing around his waist a belt of the finest gold. His body
was as bright as sunlight shining on gold, his face was brighter than
lightning, his eyes were like flaming torches, his arms and legs had
the gleam of polished bronze, and his voice could be heard for miles,
like the sound of a great multitude.”
Daniel 10:7-14 (KJV) – Part II
“And I Daniel alone saw the vision: for the men that were
with me saw not the vision; but a great quaking fell upon
them, so that they fled to hide themselves. Therefore I was
left alone, and saw this great vision, and there remained no
strength in me: for my comeliness was turned in me into
corruption, and I retained no strength. Yet heard I the voice
of his words: and when I heard the voice of his words, then
was I in a deep sleep on my face, and my face toward the
ground. And, behold, an hand touched me, which set me
upon my knees and upon the palms of my hands. And he said
unto me, O Daniel, a man greatly beloved, understand the
words that I speak unto thee, and stand upright: for unto
thee am I now sent. And when he had spoken this word unto
me, I stood trembling. Then said he unto me, Fear not,
Daniel: for from the first day that thou didst set thine heart
to understand, and to chasten thyself before thy God, thy
words were heard, and I am come for thy words. But the
prince of the kingdom of Persia withstood me one and
twenty days: but, lo, Michael, one of the chief princes, came
to help me; and I remained there with the kings of Persia.
Now I am come to make thee understand what shall befall
thy people in the latter days: for yet the vision is for many
days.”
Interlaced Commentary on Part II
236 Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35

“I, Daniel, was the only one who saw the glorious man. The men with
me did not see Him, but when they saw His glory, they were filled
with terror and fled for refuge. So, I was left alone, gazing at the
glorious man; my body had no strength, my face turned deathly pale
and I was utterly helpless. Then I heard him speak, and as I listened,
I fell unconscious and I crumbled to the ground. An angel, Gabriel,
came to me and helped me up on my hands and knees. He said,
‘Daniel, you are highly esteemed; carefully consider the words I am
about to speak to you. So, stand up, for God has sent me to you.’ After
he said this to me, I stood up even though I was trembling. Then
Gabriel said, ‘Do not be afraid, Daniel. Since the day you received the
vision and began humbling yourself with fasting and prayer –
requesting understanding, the Lord heard your words, and has sent
me to you. I would have come sooner, but a conflict over the king of
Persia thwarted my efforts for the past twenty-one days. Then
Michael Himself, the archangel, came to my aid because I could not
overcome the prince of darkness. Now that this crisis has passed, I
have come to explain what will happen in the future, for this vision
reaches far beyond the expiration of the seventy weeks.’ ”
Daniel 10:15-21 (KJV) – Part III
“And when he had spoken such words unto me, I set my face
toward the ground, and I became dumb. And, behold, one
like the similitude of the sons of men touched my lips: then I
opened my mouth, and spake, and said unto him that stood
before me, O my lord, by the vision my sorrows are turned
upon me, and I have retained no strength. For how can the
servant of this my lord talk with this my lord? for as for me,
straightway there remained no strength in me, neither is
there breath left in me. Then there came again and touched
me one like the appearance of a man, and he strengthened
me, And said, O man greatly beloved, fear not: peace be unto
thee, be strong, yea, be strong. And when he had spoken unto
me, I was strengthened, and said, Let my lord speak; for thou
hast strengthened me. Then said he, Knowest thou
wherefore I come unto thee? and now will I return to fight
with the prince of Persia: and when I am gone forth, lo, the
prince of Grecia shall come. But I will show thee that which
is noted in the scripture of truth: and there is none that
holdeth with me in these things, but Michael your prince.”
Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35 237

Interlaced Commentary on Part III

“While Gabriel was saying this to me, I bowed with my face toward
the ground and was speechless. Then the angel touched my lips,
and I opened my mouth and began to speak. I said to the angel, ‘I
am overcome with anguish because of the vision, my lord, and have
no strength; I am helpless. How can I, your servant, talk with you,
my lord? My strength is gone and I can hardly breathe.’ So the angel
touched me, and instantly I received strength. ‘Do not be afraid, O
man highly esteemed,’ he said. ‘Peace! Be strong now; be strong.’
When he spoke to me, I was strengthened and said, ‘Speak, my lord,
since you have given me strength.’ Gabriel continued, ‘I have come
to explain things that will help God’s people in days to come. Soon,
destruction will overtake Persia, and the kingdom of Greece will rise
to power. First, however, I will tell you some secrets that are written
in the Book of Truth containing God’s master plan for Earth. No one
else has access to these secrets except Michael, the Prince of
Heaven.’ ”
Daniel 11:1-4 (KJV) - Part IV
“In the first year of Darius the Mede, even I, stood to confirm
and to strengthen him. And now will I show thee the truth.
Behold, there shall stand up yet three kings in Persia; and
the fourth shall be far richer than they all: and by his
strength through his riches he shall stir up all against the
realm of Grecia. And a mighty king shall stand up, that shall
rule with great dominion, and do according to his will. And
when he shall stand up, his kingdom shall be broken, and
shall be divided toward the four winds of heaven; and not to
his posterity, nor according to his dominion which he ruled:
for his kingdom shall be plucked up, even for others beside
those.
Interlaced Commentary on Part IV
“Gabriel said, ‘According to God’s will, I began to support and
protect the conquests of Darius the Mede in the first year of his
reign, but due to illness, his kingdom did not last long. Three more
kings will rule over Persia after the present king, Cyrus, dies.
Cambyses, False Smerdis and Darius I will become kings and rule
over Persia. Then a fourth king, far richer than the others, will come
238 Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35

to power. When Xerxes has gained much power from his wealth, he
will militarily resist the developing kingdom of Grecia. Later, a
mighty king, Alexander the Great, from Grecia, will ascend and
rapidly gain control of the world. He will rule with astonishing
power and do as he pleases. After he reigns about ten years, he will
die an untimely death and God will divide his great empire into
smaller kingdoms in the north, south, east and west. Alexander’s
empire will not go to his descendants, nor will his successors have
the sweeping power he exercised. In time, God will dissolve
Alexander’s empire and pass the government of the world to the
Romans.’ ”
Historical Note: After Alexander’s death, the Grecian empire was
eventually divided into four kingdoms, and four generals from
Alexander’s empire ruled over them. Ptolemy ruled in the south,
Cassander in the west, Lysimachus in the north and Seleucus in the
east. After Greece was divided, the empire experienced many
changes, including national borders (the four generals fought each
other continuously over their borders); however, most of the border
wars did not drastically affect the tiny nation of Israel. When Grecia
fell in 331 B.C., Israel had completed most of its post-Babylonian
restoration of Jerusalem. Naturally, the Jews in Jerusalem were
concerned about the tensions that existed between the nations,
because Israel occupied a strip of strategic land that served as a
“land bridge” between the nations in the north and south. (Ezekiel
5:5) Because the Great Sea to the west and the Great Desert to the
east were natural geographical barriers, large armies from the north
or the south had no option but to march directly through Judea in
their attempts to defeat each other. As a result of Israel’s geographic
location and the titles of the kings used in this prophecy, we can
identify the kings of the north and the south without too much
difficulty.
Daniel 11:5,6 (KJV) - Part V
“And the king of the south shall be strong, and one of his
princes; and he shall be strong above him, and have
dominion; his dominion shall be a great dominion. And in the
end of years they shall join themselves together; for the
king’s daughter of the south shall come to the king of the north
to make an agreement: but she shall not retain the power of
Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35 239

the arm; neither shall he stand, nor his arm: but she shall be
given up, and they that brought her, and he that begat her, and
he that strengthened her in these times.”
Interlaced Commentary on Part V
“Gabriel said, ‘One of Alexander’s generals, Ptolemy I Soter, will
become the king of Egypt. As king of the south, he will become
strong, but a second general from Alexander’s empire, Seleucus I
Nicator, will become even greater than Ptolemy. Seleucus I will
extend his dominion and eventually rule over the north. After a few
years, these two kings will die, but their descendants will seek peace
through marriage. Bernice, the daughter of Ptolemy II, the king of
the south, will go to Antiochus II, the king of the north, to make an
alliance. Antiochus II will divorce his wife, Laodice, to marry
Bernice and they will produce an heir. However, the new marriage
will not last long. The vacillating Antiochus II will eventually
divorce Bernice, and reconcile with his first wife, Laodice. After
Antiochus II and Laodice reconcile, Laodice will kill Bernice, her
royal escort, and her son by Antiochus II. Laodice will then kill
Antiochus II because he divorced her to marry Bernice.’ ”
Daniel 11:7-10 (KJV) - Part VI
“But out of a branch of her roots shall one stand up in his
estate, which shall come with an army, and shall enter into
the fortress of the king of the north, and shall deal against
them, and shall prevail: And shall also carry captives into
Egypt their gods, with their princes, and with their precious
vessels of silver and of gold; and he shall continue more
years than the king of the north. So the king of the south
shall come into his kingdom, and shall return into his own
land. But his sons shall be stirred up, and shall assemble a
multitude of great forces: and one shall certainly come, and
overflow, and pass through: then shall he return, and be
stirred up, even to his fortress.”
Interlaced Commentary on Part VI
“Gabriel continued, ‘After Bernice’s death, her brother in Egypt,
Ptolemy III, will come to the throne in the south. To avenge
Bernice’s death, he will attack the army of Seleucus II, the king that
took the place of Antiochus II. Ptolemy III will be victorious. He will
240 Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35

seize their gods of metal images and valuable articles of silver and
gold and take them to Egypt. For some years, Ptolemy III will leave
the king of the north alone. After several years pass, Seleucus II will
invade the domain of the king of the south to retrieve the gold and
silver that Ptolemy III took from him. However, Seleucus II will be
defeated again and will return to his own country empty-handed. To
avenge the defeat of their father, Seleucus III and Antiochus III, the
two sons of Seleucus II, will prepare for war and assemble a great
army. They will sweep through the land of the king of the south and
cause damage that is like the devastation caused by an irresistible
flood. The two sons will carry the battle as far as the area of
Transjordan, which will be the fortress of the next king of the south,
Ptolemy IV.’ ”
Daniel 11:11-13 (KJV) - Part VII
“And the king of the south shall be moved with choler, and
shall come forth and fight with him, even with the king of
the north: and he shall set forth a great multitude; but the
multitude shall be given into his hand. And when he hath
taken away the multitude, his heart shall be lifted up; and he
shall cast down many ten thousands: but he shall not be
strengthened by it. For the king of the north shall return,
and shall set forth a multitude greater than the former, and
shall certainly come after certain years with a great army
and with much riches.”
Interlaced Commentary on Part VII
“Gabriel continued, ‘Then Ptolemy IV will march out in a rage and
fight against Antiochus III, the king of the north, at Raphia, and the
large army of Antiochus III will be defeated. The army from the
north will be humiliated and Ptolemy IV, the king of the south, will
become full of arrogance and continue his mighty conquests. He will
slaughter thousands as his army moves as far as the border of India,
yet he will not remain triumphant. Both he and his wife will die
mysteriously. In their place, Ptolemy V Ephiphanes, their five-year-
old son, will ascend to the throne of the south. Meanwhile,
Antiochus III, the king of the north, will muster another army,
larger than the first. After several years, his forces will plunder
Jerusalem and advance toward Egypt with a huge, well-equipped
army.’ ”
Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35 241

Daniel 11:14,15 (KJV) - Part VIII

“And in those times there shall many stand up against the king
of the south: also the robbers of thy people shall exalt
themselves to establish the vision; but they shall fall. So the
king of the north shall come, and cast up a mount, and take
the most fenced cities: and the arms of the south shall not
withstand, neither his chosen people, neither shall there be
any strength to withstand.”
Interlaced Commentary on Part VIII
“Gabriel continued, ‘Daniel, understand that during the reign of
Ptolemy IV, many people will try to rebel against this arrogant king
of the south. Even some of the zealots and violent men among your
own people will rebel against him in fulfillment of this vision, but
they will not succeed. However Antiochus III, the king of the north,
will come and build siege ramps and will capture the fortified city of
Sidon. The forces of the king of the south will not be able to resist;
even their best troops will not have the strength to resist.’ ”
Daniel 11:16,17 (KJV) - Part IX
“But he that cometh against him shall do according to his
own will, and none shall stand before him: and he shall stand
in the glorious land, which by his hand shall be consumed.
He shall also set his face to enter with the strength of his
whole kingdom, and upright ones with him; thus shall he do:
and he shall give him the daughter of women, corrupting
her: but she shall not stand on his side, neither be for him.”
Interlaced Commentary on Part IX
“Gabriel continued, ‘Many years later, a new group of invaders from
the north will appear and they will do as they please for a long time;
no one will be able to resist them. They will eventually establish
themselves as a military force all over the world, including the
Beautiful Land, Israel. They will have power to destroy anyone who
rebels against them. These invaders from the north will be called
Romans. As ruler of the north, Julius Caesar, will come with the
might of many legions and make an alliance with Ptolemy XI, the
king of the south. The two children of Ptolemy XI, Cleopatra and
Ptolemy XII, will be placed under the guardianship of Rome. In the
242 Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35

years to come, Cleopatra and Ptolemy XII, who are heirs to the throne
in the south, will try to eliminate Roman control over Egypt.
Cleopatra will conduct illicit love affairs with Julius Caesar and
Mark Antony to gain power. But later, Julius Caesar will be
assassinated and Mark Antony will be killed in battle. So her plans
will not succeed or help Egypt.’ ”
Daniel 11:18-20 (KJV) - Part X
“After this shall he turn his face unto the isles, and shall take
many: but a prince for his own behalf shall cause the
reproach offered by him to cease; without his own reproach
he shall cause it to turn upon him. Then he shall turn his
face toward the fort of his own land: but he shall stumble
and fall, and not be found. Then shall stand up in his estate
a raiser of taxes in the glory of the kingdom: but within few
days he shall be destroyed, neither in anger, nor in battle.”
Interlaced Commentary on Part X
“The angel then told me more about Julius Caesar. ‘After an alliance
is made with Ptolemy XI, Julius Caesar will make war against the
people living on the islands of the coastlands of Africa and will
subdue them. Thus, Julius Caesar will end the rebellion of Scipio
and turn his rebellion into defeat. Julius Caesar will then return
home and receive many honors and titles, but he is mortal. An
assassin will kill him and he will be seen no more. Caesar’s
successor, Octavius – later named Augustus – will send tax
collectors all over the kingdom to maintain his royal splendor. After
reigning 40 years, he too will die, not in anger or in battle, but of
natural causes.’ ”
Daniel 11:21,22 (KJV) - Part XI
“And in his estate shall stand up a vile person, to whom they
shall not give the honour of the kingdom: but he shall come
in peaceably, and obtain the kingdom by flatteries. And with
the arms of a flood shall they be overflown from before him,
and shall be broken; yea, also the prince of the covenant.”
Interlaced Commentary on Part XI
“Gabriel continued, ‘Tiberius, a contemptible person who will not
Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35 243

come through the royal line, will succeed Augustus Caesar. This is
possible because Augustus Caesar will adopt Tiberius, making
Tiberius the legal heir to the throne. Tiberius will take the throne of
the kingdom without open conflict. He will seize it through intrigue
and the help of his manipulating mother, Livia. Tiberius Caesar will
prove to be a brilliant general. He will be eminently successful
against powerful armies that oppose him in Germany, Armenia and
Parthia. During his reign, the Holy One, the anticipated Messiah,
will be baptized, but Israel will reject Him. He will be cut off from
His people as a criminal. The great Prince of God’s everlasting
covenant, the Messiah, will be murdered.’ ”
Daniel 11:23,24 (KJV) - Part XII
“And after the league made with him he shall work
deceitfully: for he shall come up, and shall become strong
with a small people. He shall enter peaceably even upon the
fattest places of the province; and he shall do that which his
fathers have not done, nor his fathers’ fathers; he shall
scatter among them the prey, and spoil, and riches: yea, and
he shall forecast his devices against the strong holds, even
for a time.”
Interlaced Commentary on Part XII
“Gabriel continued, ‘Daniel, this is a summary of Rome’s rise to
power and how that kingdom will specifically affect Israel in those
days. During its rise to power, Rome will offer treaties and pacts to
various kingdoms throughout the world. After these kingdoms have
reached a friendly agreement with Rome and spared themselves
from deadly conflict, Rome will act deceitfully and betray them.
With only a few people controlling its great army, the Romans will
become dominant over the world and no one will be able to defend
themselves against them. When the richest provinces feel secure,
Rome will invade them and either destroy or dominate them. Rome’s
authority will extend far beyond that of earlier kingdoms. Rome will
finance its conquests by distributing the spoils of war to mercenary
soldiers. Consequently, its army will become large and powerful.
Rome will plot the overthrow of kingdoms everywhere, but only for a
time. As with all other nations, Rome’s dominion will come to an end.’
”
244 Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35

Daniel 11:25-28 (KJV) - Part XIII

“And he shall stir up his power and his courage against the
king of the south with a great army; and the king of the
south shall be stirred up to battle with a very great and
mighty army; but he shall not stand: for they shall forecast
devices against him. Yea, they that feed of the portion of his
meat shall destroy him, and his army shall overflow: and
many shall fall down slain. And both these kings’ hearts shall
be to do mischief, and they shall speak lies at one table; but
it shall not prosper: for yet the end shall be at the time
appointed. Then shall he return into his land with great
riches; and his heart shall be against the holy covenant; and
he shall do exploits, and return to his own land.”
Interlaced Commentary on Part XIII
“Gabriel continued, ‘The Roman ruler, Augustus Caesar, will raise a
large army with strength and courage to attack Antony, the king of
the south. At the Battle of Actium (31 B.C.), Antony will wage war
with a large and powerful army, but will not be able to endure the
plots devised against him. Some people who are very close to
Antony, even the ones who eat with him, will attempt to destroy
him. Antony’s army will be ruined. However, Antony will remain in
power for a little longer. Augustus and Antony, with evil in their
hearts, will sit at the same table and lie to each other, but to no
avail. Both men want to control the world, but neither of them will
attain world dominion.
Daniel, the Most High God has a great plan to exalt Jerusalem
during the Roman rule. He will fulfill “Plan B” at the end of the
seventy weeks if Israel honors His covenant. Kingdoms and empires
will come and go, but the nation whose God is the Lord will remain
forever. Augustus Caesar, the king of the north, will return to his
own country after the Battle of Actium with great wealth from
Egypt. Years later, the Jews, who are trustees of God’s holy
covenant, will anger Caesar. Vespasian will be sent to attack many
cities and he will specifically target Jerusalem for destruction.
However, news about the death of Nero will cause him to lift the
siege and return to his own country without subduing Jerusalem.
This will be the sign to flee Jerusalem.’ ”
Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35 245

Daniel 11:29-31 (KJV) - Part XIV

“At the time appointed he shall return, and come toward the
south; but it shall not be as the former, or as the latter. For
the ships of Chittim shall come against him: therefore he
shall be grieved, and return, and have indignation against
the holy covenant: so shall he do; he shall even return, and
have intelligence with them that forsake the holy covenant.
And arms shall stand on his part, and they shall pollute the
sanctuary of strength, and shall take away the daily
sacrifice, and they shall place the abomination that maketh
desolate.”
Interlaced Commentary on Part XIV
“Gabriel continued, ‘At the appointed time, Titus, the son of
Vespasian, will invade the south again with a different result.
Countries with many ships from the western coastlands of Africa
and Egypt will fight Titus, but he will lose his desire to fight them.
Instead of retreating, Titus will turn his frustration and fury
towards the rebellious city of Jerusalem, because of his hatred for
the Jews. When Titus resumes the siege of Jerusalem which his
father began, he will spare the lives of the Jews who will forsake
their religion and join forces with him against Israel. Eventually,
the forces of Titus will level the city and completely destroy the
temple complex which the Jews think is impregnable. The Jews will
not be able to conduct the daily temple services again after Titus
destroys the temple in A.D. 70.
These things are revealed so that God’s people can know that wrath
is determined upon Israel unless Israel cooperates with God. Rome
will execute the wrath of God on Israel. This future desolation will
occur and be fulfilled in A.D. 70, because your people will violate the
covenant, and consequently, negate the grace which God granted to
them.’ ”
Daniel 11:32-35 (KJV) - Part XV
“And such as do wickedly against the covenant shall he
corrupt by flatteries: but the people that do know their God
shall be strong, and do exploits. And they that understand
among the people shall instruct many: yet they shall fall by the
sword, and by flame, by captivity, and by spoil, many days.
246 Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35

Now when they shall fall, they shall be holpen with a little
help: but many shall cleave to them with flatteries. And some
of them of understanding shall fall, to try them, and to purge,
and to make them white, even to the time of the end: because it
is yet for a time appointed.”
Interlaced Commentary on Part XV
“Gabriel continued, ‘The Romans will corrupt the people of God with
flattery and false ideas. However, a few people will resist
compromise with Rome. People filled with the Holy Spirit will keep
the truth about the Most High God alive in their hearts. In time,
Christianity will become popular and many insincere people will
become part of the church. As a result, Christianity will become
corrupt. The true people of God will be persecuted with sword,
flame, captivity and forfeiture of their property for a predetermined
period of time – 1,260 years. Even though many people will die for
the Word of God, God’s people will not entirely perish. God will give
them strength to keep the torch of truth burning. Some of God’s
people will stumble because they lack faith, but their failures will be
lessons of refinement and purification for those who live at the time
of the end. Be patient, Daniel, for the end does not come until
Earth’s history reaches the appointed year set by the Most High
God.’ ”
Summary
After reading this far, it is easy to see why Daniel described this
vision as “a great war.” (Daniel 10:1) Several points in this vision
warrant our consideration. First, early Christians understood the
first portion of this vision well enough to escape Jerusalem when
Vespesian lifted his siege in A.D. 68 and returned to Rome. Second,
the predicted failure of Israel to meet God’s requirements during the
seventy weeks comes as no surprise. Even though this vision
mentions Israel’s failure, it also contains a much larger story that
demonstrates how God uses one nation to destroy another whose
cup of iniquity has been filled. This vision emphatically
demonstrates why the perpetual destruction of degenerate rulers
and governments never ends. God is Sovereign. He sets up kings
and takes them down when they become decadent and arrogant.
(Daniel 2:21; 5:20-24) Historians may report the actions of the kings
of the north and south, but God manages the governments of Earth
Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35 247

through a phenomenon called war. (Ecclesiastes 3:8) Much could be

written about this subject, but in a nutshell, God originates “the
spirit of war” from time to time to accomplish His larger purposes.
(Leviticus 26; Deuteronomy 32; Ecclesiastes 3; Isaiah 45:7) When a
nation fills its cup of iniquity, God arouses and empowers another
nation to destroy the decadent one. This process cauterizes the
malignancy of sin. Eventually, the destroying nation also becomes
decadent and is destroyed for the same reason it destroyed the
earlier nation. This cathartic process explains why Jerusalem and
pagan nations have been destroyed. This limiting process never
ends in a fallen world! This is the core message in Daniel 10-12 for
all generations to study.
The third point in this vision is that God’s people are frequently
caught in the middle of political and military forces that are much
greater than themselves. The world always considers God’s people
to be weak, but He deliberately designed this. God knows that it is
impossible for a Christian government to function in a world of sin!
If a Christian government had been possible, Jesus would have set
up His kingdom on Earth when He came the first time. Do not
misunderstand the point. It is possible for a government to espouse
and defend Christian principles. In fact, as long as a nation does
this, God prospers such a nation! However, Bible history confirms
that Israel was unable to sustain a Godly government because a
majority of Israel’s population did not become born-again people!
Let’s face it – this world is not our home! Christians are
represented as pilgrims passing through a foreign land. Yet, we
have hope. We look forward to a city whose foundation is
righteousness and whose walls of love are built by God. (Psalm
89:14) Therefore, this continual and perpetual conflict between
nations should not discourage God’s people. Jesus said, “You will
hear of wars and rumors of wars, but see to it that you are not
alarmed. Such things must happen, but the end is still to
come. Nation will rise against nation, and kingdom against
kingdom. There will be famines and earthquakes in various
places. All these are the beginning of birth pains.” (Matthew
24:6-8, italics mine) Unfortunately, wars are a necessity in a sinful
world. God causes war when He wants to “purify” various parcels of
His Earth so that future inhabitants may have a chance to satisfy His
purposes. (See Jeremiah 25:15-17; 27:6,7; 50:1-3; Ezekiel 38; Matthew
248 Chapter 7 – Daniel 10:1 - 11:35

10:34) In this light, it is no mystery that Earth itself ends with the
battle of Armageddon.
 Chapter 8
Daniel 11:36 - 12:13 – The King of the North

“At that time Michael, the great prince who protects

your people, will arise. There will be a time of distress
such as has not happened from the beginning of
nations until then. But at that time your people—
everyone whose name is found written in the book [of
life] – will be delivered.”
– Daniel 12:1, insertion mine
Introduction
Remember, I have divided the vision of Daniel 10:1-12:13 into two
segments for clarity. Even though Daniel 10-12 is one vision, there
is a natural divide at Daniel 11:35, because the vision makes a
transition from the destruction of Jerusalem in A.D. 70 to the
destruction of the world during the Great Tribulation. This
transition parallels Daniel 8. You may recall how the ram and the
goat were part of ancient history, but the horn power will appear
during the time of the end. In the previous chapter, we saw how the
first portion of this vision benefited early Christians. In this
chapter, you should discover why the last segment of this vision will
benefit Christians who live during the Great Tribulation.
Conflicts between the kings of the north and the south continued
long after the Romans destroyed Jerusalem in A.D. 70. In fact, as
the Christian church increased in popularity, theological battles
between the Church of Rome (on the north side of the Mediter-
ranean) and the Church of Alexandria (on the south side of the
Mediterranean) began to occur. The Church of Rome strongly
opposed the doctrine, “Christ was created by the Father,” which the
Church of Alexandria supported. In this controversy, one could say
“Rome, the religious king of the north” eventually uprooted “Arius,
the religious king of the south.” You may recall from Daniel 7 that
three nations were plucked up by their roots by the little horn power
(Roman Catholic Church). These tribal nations have been identified
as the Ostrogoths, Heruli and Vandals.
250 Chapter 8 – Daniel 11:36 - 12:13

In Daniel 11:36, Gabriel made a transition from ancient times to end

times, but continues to use the same language throughout the
vision, that is, the king of the north versus the king of the south.
The chronological sequence also continues without interruption.
Gabriel uses the same language so that the final generation can see
parallels from centuries past and better understand the course of
coming events.
This is a key point: The forthcoming actions of Lucifer, represented
as the “king of the north” in the last segment of this vision, have no
historical equal. The behavior of the Antichrist during the Great
Tribulation will be off the scale of human expectations. This is why
parallel language from the past is so helpful. If you have a basic
understanding of Daniel 8 and Revelation 9, 13 and 17, this
transition is not hard to follow or understand. Unfortunately, most
people do not have this understanding, so Daniel 11:36 and onward
is difficult for many people to decipher.
The Antichrist
The king of the north mentioned in verses Daniel 11:36-45 is the
same King from the North (also known as the stern-faced king or
the horn power) that was introduced in Daniel 8. Notice how this
point is demonstrated. Verse 35 points to the appointed time of the
end, and verse 36 describes a king who will be successful until the
time of wrath is completed. “Some of the wise will stumble, so
that they may be refined, purified and made spotless until
the time of the end, for it will still come at the appointed
time. The king will do as he pleases. He will exalt and
magnify himself above every god and will say unheard-of
things against the God of gods. He will be successful until
the time of wrath is completed, for what has been
determined must take place.” (Daniel 11:35,36)
1. Who is the “king” in verse 36? Part of the answer is found in
the timing of this verse. The king to whom this verse applies
is the king who “is successful until the time of wrath is
completed . . .” When does the time of wrath occur? We
learned from Daniel 8 that the horn power from the north
(the stern-faced king) will appear during the appointed time of
the end, which is a time of wrath. “He [Gabriel] said: ‘I am
going to tell you what will happen later in the time of
Chapter 8 – Daniel 11:36 - 12:13 251

wrath, because the vision concerns the appointed time of

the end.’ ” (Daniel 8:19, italics mine) Revelation indicates the
Great Tribulation will be a time of wrath for everyone. People
who obey God’s Word will suffer persecution from Babylon.
(Revelation 13:5) People who obey Babylon’s laws and the
Antichrist will suffer God’s wrath. (Revelation 14:9,10)
Therefore, the appointed time of the end is a time of wrath for
everyone. The Great Tribulation consists of two segments of
time. The seven trumpets will last 1,260 days. The seven-
trumpet judgments of Revelation will be a time of invitation
and mercy for those who have not heard the gospel of Jesus
Christ. The seven bowls will follow the seven trumpets. They
will last for seventy-five days and will contain no mercy.
During the seven bowls, God’s wrath will be poured out upon
all who receive the mark of the beast. When the seven last
plagues are completed, God’s wrath will end. “I saw in
heaven another great and marvelous sign: seven angels
with the seven last plagues – last, because with them
God’s wrath is completed.” (Revelation 15:1) When these
facts are aligned, we are left with one conclusion. The king
mentioned in Daniel 11:36 must be the horn power of Daniel 8
(the Antichrist), because he will be successful until the time of
wrath is completed. The time of wrath occurs during the
appointed time of the end, which is also called the Great
Tribulation. (Daniel 12:1)
2. The king of the north will be successful even though he
demands obedience to religious beliefs that are contrary to
every religion on Earth! Remember, God empowers the stern-
faced king, allowing him to have a moment of glorious
deception. (Daniel 8:24; Revelation 13:14) Daniel 11:36 says,
“The king will do as he pleases. He will exalt and
magnify himself above every god and will say unheard-
of things against the God of gods. . . .” Compare Daniel’s
words with those of the apostle Paul: “Don’t let anyone
deceive you in any way, for that day will not come until
the rebellion occurs and the man of lawlessness is
revealed, the man doomed to destruction. He will
oppose and will exalt himself over everything that is
called God or is worshiped, so that he sets himself up
252 Chapter 8 – Daniel 11:36 - 12:13

in God’s temple, proclaiming himself to be God.”

(2 Thessalonians 2:3,4, italics mine) The Antichrist is called
“the man of lawlessness” or “the man of sin” (KJV) because
the Bible says, “The king will do as he pleases.” He will be
accountable to no one! He will be capricious, temperamental
and arbitrary. No one can stop him or prevent him from
saying or doing the evil he wants. The devil will stand in
opposition to all religions of the world. Daniel says, “He will
exalt and magnify himself above every god and will say
unheard-of things against the God of gods.” Paul says,
“He will oppose and will exalt himself over everything
that is called God or is worshiped, so that he sets
himself up in God’s temple, proclaiming himself to be
God.” (Italics mine) Remember the comments about the
stern-faced king in Daniel 8:24. “He will become very
strong, but not by his own power. He will cause
astounding devastation and will succeed in whatever
he does. He will destroy the mighty men and the holy
people.” The coming Antichrist has no equal in past history.
He will appear during the time of wrath, the Great
Tribulation. This modern king of Babylon will successfully
oppose the religions of the world because God will empower
him (just as He empowered the ancient king of Babylon,
Nebuchadnezzar) to establish a one-world government. This
coming king can be none other than the Antichrist, the devil
masquerading as God.
3. If there is any doubt remaining on the identity of this king,
notice this verse: “At the time of the end the king of the
south will engage him in battle, and the king of the
north will storm out against him with chariots and
cavalry and a great fleet of ships. He will invade many
countries and sweep through them like a flood.”
(Daniel 11:40, italics mine) The king of the north will gain
control over all of his adversaries at the time of the end. We
know the horn power in Daniel 8 will come from the north,
will appear during the appointed time of the end, will destroy
many people, will exalt and magnify himself above every god,
and will blaspheme the God of Heaven. Only one being can
meet these specifications. That being is Lucifer, the Antichrist.
Chapter 8 – Daniel 11:36 - 12:13 253

A New Series of Wars

We know this vision covers a series of great wars. The last segment
of this vision focuses on the wars that will occur during the time of
wrath (the Great Tribulation). The Bible predicts the king of the
north will wage war against the saints and will conquer them.
(Revelation 13:7) The devil will be invincible for a period of time. He
will destroy those who oppose him (the kingdom of the south). God
grants this authority to Lucifer for two reasons. First, God raises up
a destroyer to destroy those who pass the point of no return.
Second, God empowers Lucifer for a season because He wants a
watching universe to see what dominion under a sinful being like
Lucifer would be like. God wants the universe to see how sin affects
authority. Because Lucifer is the embodiment of sin, his actions
will demonstrate what any sinner would do if given enough time and
power. The contrast will be profound. If God were not a God of love,
His reign over the universe would resemble Lucifer’s horrible reign
on Earth. If we ponder this thought for just a moment, every
Christian should rejoice to know that God is nothing like Lucifer.
God is love! With these things said, my commentary begins with
verse 36:
Daniel 11:36-39 (KJV) - Part I
“And the king [of the North] shall do according to his will; and
he shall exalt himself, and magnify himself above every god,
and shall speak marvelous things against the God of gods,
and shall prosper till the indignation be accomplished: for
that that is determined shall be done. Neither shall he
regard the God of his fathers, nor the desire of women, nor
regard any god: for he shall magnify himself above all. But
in his estate shall he honour the God of forces: and a god
whom his fathers knew not shall he honor with gold, and
silver, and with precious stones, and pleasant things. Thus
shall he do in the most strong holds with a strange god,
whom he shall acknowledge and increase with glory: and he
shall cause them to rule over many, and shall divide the land
for gain.” (Insertion mine)
Interlaced Commentary on Part I
“Gabriel said, ‘Daniel, I must tell you more about the stern-faced
king from the north; the horn power you saw in the earlier vision of
254 Chapter 8 – Daniel 11:36 - 12:13

Daniel 8. When the devil physically appears on Earth personating

Christ, he will claim to be God. Masquerading as God, he will
receive honor from the religions of the world. They will believe that
he is God. [Note: Lucifer is called the king of the north in this
section of the vision for two reasons. First, as a point on the
compass, north symbolizes God’s dwelling place – on the sides of the
north. (Isaiah 14:13, KJV) North also represents the direction from
which divine destruction comes. Like Nebuchadnezzar, the ancient
king of Babylon, Lucifer, the modern king of Babylon, will inflict
destruction on those people who have rejected God’s truth. Second,
in the first portion of this prophecy, Israel was caught between two
great rivals – the kings from the north and south. In the last days,
God’s people will again be caught between two great rivals; the
people who believe the devil is God (followers of the king of the
north) and people who refuse to submit to the demands of Lucifer
(followers of the king of the south).] The opposition of men will not
slow Lucifer for long. The devil will do as he pleases, for no one can
stop him. He will exalt and magnify himself above every god known
to man and will say unheard-of things against the Most High God.
He will succeed mightily until the seven bowls are completed, for
what has been predetermined by the Most High God will occur.
Daniel, because of apostasy, Israel rebelled against the God of their
forefathers, the God of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob. Similarly, when
Lucifer appears, the religious wicked will do the same thing. They
will abandon the gods of their fathers and worship this new “living”
god. The devil will have no regard for Christ, the Holy One of Israel,
which every virgin in Israel hopes to bear. The devil will exalt
himself above them all. Be warned. The king of the north will
appear as a glorious god-man – subject to no law or authority
created by man. He is called the man of lawlessness because he will
not be subject to any law and will demand that people obey his
commandments. Instead of respecting the gods of the religions that
people know and trust, he will demand the establishment of a new,
one-world religion. He will exalt himself as lord of lords and king of
kings. He will use force when and where necessary to consolidate
the world under his authority. He will demand that all people obey
his laws or be killed. A one-world religion has not existed since
Adam and Eve sinned, but it will come. Everyone who refuses to
submit to the demands of the devil will be targets of persecution. Be
Chapter 8 – Daniel 11:36 - 12:13 255

prepared. At the appointed time (fifth trumpet), the devil will appear
on Earth and consolidate the world’s seven religious systems into one
colossal organization. He will exalt and honor himself by receiving
gold and silver, precious stones, and costly gifts.
When Lucifer has gained a great following, he will fiercely attack the
brave people who have remained faithful to the Most High. The
144,000 and their disciples will resist the devil’s schemes. Great
numbers of people will be deceived and join the devil in rebellion
against the clearest evidence of God’s truth. The world has not seen
anything like this since the time of Noah’s flood. The devil will
bestow great honor on the leaders of Earth who acknowledge him to
be God. The devil and his angels will slaughter a third of mankind
during the sixth trumpet war. When the devil dissolves the political
and religious boundaries of the world, he will set up ten puppet
kings over the people of Earth. Lucifer will honor people who
participate in his evil ways by distributing the land to the highest
bidder.’ ”
Daniel 11:40-43 (KJV) - Part II
“And at the time of the end shall the king of the south push
at him: and the king of the north shall come against him like
a whirlwind, with chariots, and with horsemen, and with
many ships; and he shall enter into the countries, and shall
overflow and pass over. He shall enter also into the glorious
land, and many countries shall be overthrown: but these
shall escape out of his hand, even Edom, and Moab, and the
chief of the children of Ammon. He shall stretch forth his
hand also upon the countries: and the land of Egypt shall not
escape. But he shall have power over the treasures of gold
and of silver, and over all the precious things of Egypt: and
the Libyans and the Ethiopians shall be at his steps.”
Interlaced Commentary on Part II
“Gabriel said, ‘When the sixth trumpet sounds (Revelation 9:13-21),
the devil will attack his adversaries by land, air, and with a great
fleet of ships. He will invade and destroy many countries, and his
forces will sweep through the nations like an irresistible and
devastating flood. Lucifer’s angels will kill one-third of mankind.
The devil will invade the homeland of Israel and many countries
256 Chapter 8 – Daniel 11:36 - 12:13

around will fall, but throughout the world, a remnant of people will
remain faithful. Remember how some of your people escaped
Nebuchadnezzar’s destruction by fleeing to the remote areas of
Edom and Moab? God will sustain His people in the same way
during the end time. Like the leaders of Ammon, who protected
your people when Nebuchadnezzar destroyed Jerusalem (Jeremiah
40:11,12), God will deliver His people from the devil’s hand. As the
ruler of Earth, the devil will extend his power over many countries.
Egypt, which represents Pharaoh’s opposition to God (the king of the
south), will not escape Lucifer’s dominion. The devil will control all
of the treasures of gold and silver. All of the riches of the world will
be his. No person will be able to buy or sell unless he obeys the
devil’s laws and submits to his beastly government.’ ”
Daniel 11:44-12:1 (KJV) - Part III
“But tidings out of the east and out of the north shall trouble
him: therefore he shall go forth with great fury to destroy,
and utterly to make away many. And he shall plant the
tabernacles of his palace between the seas in the glorious
holy mountain; yet he shall come to his end, and none shall
help him. And at that time shall Michael stand up, the great
prince which standeth for the children of thy people: and
there shall be a time of trouble, such as never was since
there was a nation even to that same time: and at that time
thy people shall be delivered, every one that shall be found
written in the book.”
Interlaced Commentary on Part III
“Gabriel said, ‘Near the end of the Great Tribulation, people
throughout the Earth will hear peals of loudest thunder. At that
time, Jesus will announce that the king of the north is to be
destroyed. The devil will be alarmed when he hears this thunder
because he will know that his rule has ended. In a rage, he will
attempt to annihilate all of God’s people by setting up a universal
death decree, but God’s people will be delivered.
The devil will establish a palace in Jerusalem. He will sit enthroned
as though he were Almighty God. Jerusalem will serve as one of the
palaces of Babylon, that great city that rules over the nations of
Earth. The devil will consolidate the world into one empire and he
Chapter 8 – Daniel 11:36 - 12:13 257

will have undisputed rule over the world for a short time. Yet, the
devil will come to his end and no human being will be able to
prevent these things from happening. When the devil implements
the mark of the beast (a tattoo showing allegiance to Lucifer), he
will take his seat on his throne to rule over Earth. He will claim to
be lord of lords and king of kings. At that very moment Michael/
Jesus, the great Prince of Heaven who protects His people, will arise
from His seat at the right hand of God’s throne. Jesus will bring His
intercessory work on behalf of the human race to a close. At that
time, Jesus will send the seven last plagues upon His enemies. The
distress and suffering caused by the plagues will be terrible. Never,
since the history of humankind, has such suffering covered the face
of the Earth. But your people – everyone whose name is found
written in the Book of Life – will be delivered from death and these
plagues.’ ”
Daniel 12:2-4 (KJV) - Part IV
“And many of them that sleep in the dust of the earth shall
awake, some to everlasting life, and some to shame and
everlasting contempt. And they that be wise shall shine as
the brightness of the firmament; and they that turn many to
righteousness as the stars for ever and ever. But thou, O
Daniel, shut up the words, and seal the book, even to the
time of the end: many shall run to and fro, and knowledge
shall be increased.”
Interlaced Commentary on Part IV
“Gabriel said, ‘A few days before the Second Coming, Jesus will
resurrect multitudes of martyrs who died during the fifth seal in a
special resurrection. He will also resurrect those who crucified
Jesus, so that they can see the Son of Man coming in clouds of glory.
Their shame and contempt will remain on them until Jesus destroys
them at the Second Coming. On that glorious day, the 144,000 will
be declared victorious. They will shine with the brightness of
Heaven because they led many people to righteousness, and the
144,000 will be the “movie stars” in the new Earth. But you, Daniel,
close up and seal the words of this vision. This information is
reserved for the time of the end. Many generations will try to
understand these prophecies; they will go here and there to increase
258 Chapter 8 – Daniel 11:36 - 12:13

knowledge, but the Most High God has sealed this book until the final
generation arrives.’ ”
Daniel 12:5-9 (KJV) - Part V
“Then I Daniel looked, and, behold, there stood other two, the
one on this side of the bank of the river, and the other on that
side of the bank of the river. And one said to the man clothed
in linen, which was upon the waters of the river, How long
shall it be to the end of these wonders? And I heard the man
clothed in linen, which was upon the waters of the river, when
he held up his right hand and his left hand unto heaven, and
sware by him that liveth for ever that it shall be for a time,
times, and an half; and when he shall have accomplished to
scatter the power of the holy people, all these things shall be
finished. And I heard, but I understood not: then said I, O my
Lord, what shall be the end of these things? And he said, Go
thy way, Daniel: for the words are closed up and sealed till the
time of the end.”
Interlaced Commentary on Part V
“Then I, Daniel, looked up and saw two glorious angels. One angel
stood on this side of the river and the other stood on the opposite
bank. One of the angels said to Jesus, the Man who was clothed in
linen and was standing above the waters of the Tigris, ‘How long
will it be before the astonishing events in these visions are fulfilled?’
Jesus lifted His right and left hand toward Heaven, and I heard him
swear by the Most High God who lives forever, saying, ‘The gospel of
salvation will be preached throughout the whole world during 1,260
days. When the power given to the 144,000 has come to an end, all
these things will be completed.’ I heard these words, but I did not
understand their meaning. So I asked, ‘Lord, what will be the
outcome of all these events?’ He replied, ‘Do not worry about this
Daniel, because the words of this prophecy are closed up and sealed
until the final generation arrives. The righteous who live during
those days will understand this vision.’ ”
Daniel 12:10-13 (KJV) - Part VI
“Many shall be purified, and made white, and tried; but the
wicked shall do wickedly: and none of the wicked shall
understand; but the wise shall understand. And from the
Chapter 8 – Daniel 11:36 - 12:13 259

time that the daily sacrifice shall be taken away, and the
abomination that maketh desolate set up, there shall be a
thousand two hundred and ninety days. Blessed is he that
waiteth, and cometh to the thousand three hundred and five
and thirty days. But go thou thy way till the end be: for thou
shalt rest, and stand in thy lot at the end of the days.”
Interlaced Commentary on Part VI
“Gabriel said, ‘God’s people must be refined, purified, and made
spotless. The wicked will continue to be wicked. None of the wicked
will understand these things, but at the appointed time of the end,
the people who are wise in spiritual matters, the ones who are
listening for my voice through the Spirit, will understand the
importance of these things. Daniel, write the following things down
because God’s people will need to know them when the appointed
time arrives. A time is coming when Jesus will end His intercession
on behalf of the world. At that time, Jesus will cease from the daily
work He has been doing on behalf of humanity ever since sin began.
He will no longer stand between God’s wrath and a guilty world.
When He steps aside, a great earthquake will shake the Earth. This
event will mark the end of Christ’s corporate ministry in the
Heavenly sanctuary. From the day that Christ’s daily intercession
ceases until the devil establishes a universal death decree for God’s
people, there will be 1,290 days. Blessed are the saints who
patiently endure the Great Tribulation to reach the end of the 1,335
days.’ “Then the King will say to those on his right, ‘Come,
you who are blessed by my Father; take your inheritance, the
kingdom prepared for you since the creation of the world.”
(Matthew 25:34) ‘As for you Daniel, go on with your business until
the end of your life. Then, you will rest with your fathers in sleep. At
the end of Earth’s days, you will be resurrected to receive your
allotted inheritance. The Lord will surely reward you for your
faithfulness.’ ”
Summary
Even though the information in Daniel is very important, the book
of Daniel does not tell us everything we need to know about the end-
time. This is why God gave John the vision recorded in Revelation.
When the prophecies in the two books of Daniel and Revelation are
properly related, the alignment of details and the harmony of facts
260 Chapter 8 – Daniel 11:36 - 12:13

are astounding! So, after my commentary on Revelation becomes

available, please review this chapter.
The prophecy in Daniel 10-12 contains a warning message for those
who will live during the Great Tribulation. Man’s great adversary is
coming and will crush every religion and government. He will
destroy hundreds of millions of people and will establish himself as
Almighty God on Earth. He will do everything in his power to
destroy the people of God. The Great Tribulation will last a
maximum of 1,335 days, and the final abomination that causes
desolation (a universal death decree upon God’s people) will occur on
the 1,290th day. For 1,335 days, God’s people will be caught in the
middle of a series of wars. Many of God’s people will perish.
Christians need to know these facts now. Christians need to
understand God’s plans; otherwise, the horrors of tomorrow could
overpower our faith in God. Most Christians have no idea about the
events that are coming. They are like the Jews living inside ancient
Jerusalem. Vespesian’s departure did not mean an end to Rome’s
hostilities against Jerusalem, as the Jews mistakenly presumed. It
was merely a signal of a reprieve – a window of opportunity to
escape. Christian believers who understood Jesus’ words knew what
was coming next and fled the doomed city. In our day, people who
understand Daniel’s words can know what is coming next and when
the time becomes appropriate, they will flee from Babylon and
separate themselves from this horrible system that will form. God
wants His people to understand the big picture before it happens.
He wants His people to know His plans so they will not be
overwhelmed with loss, disappointment and depression. Therefore,
God had the book of Daniel written for our generation so that coming
events will confirm our faith instead of destroying our faith. What a
thoughtful and caring God.
Epilogue
Gabriel told Daniel that his visions were sealed up until the time of
the end. (Daniel 12:4,9) Has the time of the end arrived? Has the
book of Daniel been unsealed with the discovery of the four rules
that govern the interpretation of apocalyptic prophecy? Time will
soon tell. Now that the four rules of Daniel are known, and the
books of Daniel and Revelation interlock into one comprehensive
harmonious story, we better understand the plans of God. We have
Chapter 8 – Daniel 11:36 - 12:13 261

carefully examined the contents of Daniel and we now know several

things that previous generations could not have known.
1. We found in Daniel 2 that our current generation is living
during the time period of the feet which are composed of iron
and clay. When the Antichrist appears, he will gain control
of the world and will appoint ten puppet kings to be
responsible for administrative details. (Revelation 17:12)
The toes of Daniel’s metal man represent these ten kings.
(Daniel 2:42) During the days of these ten kings, Jesus will
return to Earth and destroy all of the wicked. (Daniel
2:34,35) Daniel 2 indicates that the kingdom of God will not
coexist with the kingdoms of sinful men.
2. We found in Daniel 7 that Heaven’s court convened in 1798
and billions of angels were summoned to attend. Shortly
after the court convened, Jesus began to review the books of
record and decide the eternal fate of every person who has
ever lived. We also found that the little horn power in Daniel
7 represents the Roman Catholic Church, and we know that
the deadly wound inflicted on the church in 1798 will be
healed on or about the time the Great Tribulation begins.
3. We found in Daniel 8 that Jesus began reviewing the books of
record in 1844 – at the end of the 2,300 day/years mentioned
in Daniel 8:14. We also found that the horn power coming
from the north in Daniel 8 will be the Antichrist. He is the
stern-faced king who will bring destruction upon the whole
world. He will cause evil to prosper and will inflict
astounding devastation on Earth. He will take away the daily
from Jesus, man’s intercessor. Many of God’s people will
perish because of his actions. From a human perspective, he
will be invincible. The devil’s personation of Christ (a
physical body) will be destroyed when Jesus arrives in clouds
of glory. Lucifer is not annihilated until he is destroyed at
the end of the 1,000 years.
4. We found in Daniel 9 that Jesus came to Earth and died on
time – April 7, A.D. 30. God’s original plan (“Plan A”) to
establish His kingdom on Earth at the end of the seventy
weeks was not fulfilled because Israel rejected the Messiah.
262 Chapter 8 – Daniel 11:36 - 12:13

Jerusalem and the temple were destroyed in A.D. 70 as

predicted.
5. We found in Daniel 10-12 that Israel’s unbelief led to
Jerusalem’s destruction by the Romans. Through Daniel, God
warned early Christians to escape this destruction. In a
similar manner, people who live during the Great Tribulation
will be caught in the middle of a great war. Christians will
be on Earth during the world’s destruction and God has
included clues in the final prophecy of Daniel describing the
actions, identity and objectives of the Antichrist. This vision
tells us that the Great Tribulation will last a maximum of
1,335 days, and the vision indicates there will be a universal
death decree for the saints which occurs on the 1,290th day of
the Great Tribulation.
6. We find in Daniel a prophetic architecture that conforms to
four rules. This architecture is a framework that enables us
to understand God’s plans in advance. God has hidden the
knowledge of this framework for twenty-six centuries. Now
that this architecture has been discovered, the book of
Revelation becomes an extension of the book of Daniel. The
two books combine to form one comprehensive story. The
book of Daniel provides the final generation with advanced
information about God’s plans for terminating the sin
problem. This is not a casual matter. Given what is coming
upon Earth, this knowledge is of greater value than anything
the world can offer. The present Heaven and Earth will soon
pass away, but God’s Word will never fail.
7. The book of Daniel declares that God rules and overrules.
God is eternal and God is sovereign. He manages the nations
of Earth and He knows the hairs on each of our heads. This
scope of knowledge is hard to comprehend. God deals with
macro issues (the rise and fall of empires) and yet, He deals
with His children on the micro level. He treats each one of us
with the tenderest care. The book of Daniel demonstrates
these things. Whether God is destroying one empire or
delivering one man from a lion’s den, the message of Daniel
is clear: God rules and overrules. The book of Daniel makes
it clear that God overrules events on Earth from time to time
Chapter 8 – Daniel 11:36 - 12:13 263

so that He can produce the best possible outcome. He manages

to do this even within the chaos and suffering that sin has
caused without violating the will of men.
The book of Daniel has taught me a sublime lesson: If I surrender my
will to God, to go, to be and to do according to all that He has
commanded (go-be-do), I have a place within His plans. Whether His
plans mandate life or death for me in a temporal sense does not
matter, for with God, death is nothing. What really matters is that
each of us finds our place within His plans. When Daniel went to
the lion’s den, he did not know ahead of time what the outcome
would be. Yet, he willingly went to the lion’s den because he knew
he was within God’s plans. This is total trust in God. May God
grant within each of us total trust and complete peace!
At the end of his last vision, Gabriel told Daniel that he was going to
die and that at the end of Earth’s history, he would live again.
Daniel was told that he would “stand in his lot at the end of the
days.” This phrase means that Daniel will serve in his appointed
place in God’s kingdom when Jesus resurrects the saints at the
Second Coming. Think about it. What greater honor is there than to
serve in an appointed position throughout eternity? This outcome is
possible if we live a life of faith in God. Daniel’s visions and
experiences are evidences of this truth: God rules. The good news is
that God uses His incredible powers, omnipotence, omniscience, and
omnipresence, not to secure His position on the throne of the
universe, but to insure that the law of love is eternally exalted
throughout His universe. No wonder He is called the King of Love,
whose dwelling is on the sides of the north, and He will forever rule
over His children with love. They will have peace and joy and
endless happiness because “. . . . The government will be on His
shoulders.” (Isaiah 9:6, insertion mine)
Note: Revelation’s commentary will be available soon.
 Bible Cross Refer
Cross ence
Reference
Gen 1 .…………….... 200 Lev 23:32 ……. 124, 200 1 Kin 17:6 …………. 138
Gen 1:5 …………….. 124 Lev 24:18-24 ……….. 12 1 Kin 18:19 …………. 34
Gen 1:26 ………....... 229 Lev 25 …… 85, 146, 168 1 Kin 18:22 …………. 36
Gen 2:17 …………… 134 Lev 25:1-4 …………. 185
2 Kin 3 ………………. 36
Gen 6 ………………. 135 Lev 25:1-5 …………. 146
2 Kin 17:16 ………... 109
Gen 6:7 …………….... 12 Lev 25:4 ……………. 180
2 Kin 19:25 …………. 17
Gen 15:16 ……... 12, 135 Lev 25:8 ……… 178, 180
2 Kin 19:29 ………... 180
Gen 18:22 ………..... 104 Lev 25:18 ………….. 169
2 Kin 19:35 ………... 230
Gen 40:12,13 …….... 197 Lev 25:20-22 ………. 146
2 Kin 21:3-5 ……….. 109
Gen 41:46 ………….. 193 Lev 25:23 ……. 147, 170
2 Kin 23:5 …………. 109
Lev 26 ………... 146, 247
Exo 2:11-14 ...……… 150
Lev 26:12 ………….. 167 1 Chr 23:3 …………. 193
Exo 4:27 …………...... 20
Lev 26:14-39 ………. 167 2 Chr 6:36-39 ... 165-166
Exo 5:5 …………….. 150
Lev 26:25 ………….. 184 2 Chr 16:9 …………... 62
Exo 8:25,26 ……….. 228
Lev 26:27-28 2 Chr 36:17-21 ……. 149
Exo 11:4 ……………. 201
………... 146, 147, 169 2 Chr 36:21 ……….. 184
Exo 12 .. 84, 177, 198, 205
Lev 26:31-35 … 146, 147 2 Chr 36:21,22 ……. 161
Exo 12:6 ………….... 201
Lev 26:34 ………….. 184
Exo 12:41 ……. 123, 148 Ezr 1 ……………….. 189
Lev 26:34,35 …. 148-149
Exo 12:42 ……. 123, 164 Ezr 1:1,2 …………….. 13
Lev 26:38-42 ………. 166
Exo 13:4 …………… 179 Ezr 1:1-3 …………… 159
Exo 16 ……….. 146, 178 Num 4 ……………… 193 Ezr 2 ……………….. 151
Exo 19:3-7 …………. 173 Num 14 ……………. 167 Ezr 6 ……………….. 189
Exo 19:4-6 …… 164, 230 Num 14:34 ……. 85, 197 Ezr 6:15 …………….. 162
Exo 20:3-17 …………. 88 Num 18:20,21 …….. 230 Ezr 7 .. 124, 131, 189, 190
Exo 20:4-6 …………... 46 Num 22 ……………… 35 Ezr 8:31 ……………. 190
Exo 20:8-11 ………... 180 Num 28:14 ………… 198
Neh 2 ………………. 189
Exo 21:2 ……… 150, 209 Num 28:16,17 …….. 198
Neh 2:1 …………….. 179
Exo 23:16 ………….. 179 Num 35:1-8 ……….. 231
Neh 8:2,3 ………….. 180
Exo 26:35 ………….. 104
Deu 2:14 …………… 197 Neh 9:6 …………….. 109
Exo 29:21 ………….. 187
Deu 4:19 ……… 109-110
Exo 32:10 ………….. 168 Job 36:4 ……………. 104
Deu 6:5 …………….. 167
Exo 40:22 ………….. 104 Job 37:22 …….. 104, 228
Deu 8:11-14 ………… 82
Lev 4:3 ……………... 187 Deu 13 ……………... 222 Psa 2:7-12 ………. 68, 69
Lev 4:13,14 ………... 135 Deu 17:1 …………… 229 Psa 15:1 ……………... 20
Lev 8:30 ……………. 187 Deu 28 …. 147, 168, 170 Psa 34:15 ……………. 62
Lev 16 ………... 125, 127 Deu 28:49 …………… 55 Psa 51:17 ………….. 171
Lev 18 ………... 147, 170 Deu 31:10,11 …….... 180 Psa 66:18 ………….. 171
Lev 18:20-22 ………. 229 Deu 32 ……………... 247 Psa 78:51-55 ………. 230
Lev 18:24-28 ………. 135 Psa 89:14 ………….. 247
Jos 20:7,8 ………….. 231
Lev 18:28 ……………. 31 Psa 90:10 ………….. 184
Lev 19:18 ………….. 167 1 Sam 13:1 ………… 193
Pro 6:16-19 ………... 229
Lev 20 ……………… 129 1 Sam 20:24-27 …… 198
Pro 15:8 ……………. 171
Lev 20:15 ………….. 229
2 Sam 5:4 ………….. 193
Lev 23:5,6 …………. 198 Ecc 3 ……………….. 247
Lev 23:15,16 ………. 180 1 Kin 6:1 …………… 180 Ecc 3:8 ……………... 247
Bible Cross Reference 265

Ecc 9:5,6 …………… 135 Jer 34:13-16 ………. 209 Dan 2:39 …………….. 14
Ecc 12:13 ………….. 130 Jer 34:13-17 ………. 180 Dan 2:42 ………. 14, 261
Ecc 12:14 ……… 62, 130 Jer 34:14 ……... 161, 180 Dan 2:44
Jer 34:14-16 ………. 150 …... 14, 19, 20, 76, 96
Isa 8:6,7 ……………. 211
Jer 40:11,12 ………. 256 Dan 2:45 …………….. 21
Isa 9:6 …………. 21, 263
Jer 43:10 …………… 31 Dan 2:46-48 ……. 37, 38
Isa 14:13 …….. 104, 254
Jer 46:13,20,21 …… 103 Dan 3 ………... 24, 31-48
Isa 14:14 …………… 104
Jer 50:1-3 …………. 248 Dan 3:3-8 ……………. 42
Isa 16:6-14 ………….. 12
Jer 50:2,3 …… 103, 228 Dan 3:9-14 ………….. 43
Isa 19:1-12 ………….. 12
Dan 3:15 ………... 43, 44
Isa 26:3 …………….. 171 Eze 4:3,6 …………... 148
Dan 3:16-18 …….. 44-45
Isa 26:4 ……………… 11 Eze 4:5,6 ……………. 85
Dan 3:19-21 ………… 45
Isa 30 ………………. 225 Eze 5:5 ……….. 225, 230
Dan 3:22-27 ………… 46
Isa 36:1 …………….. 180 Eze 5:8-10 …………... 32
Dan 3:28-30 ………… 47
Isa 37:30 …….. 180, 190 Eze 5:11,12 ………... 170
Dan 4 ………………… 56
Isa 42:6 ………... 11, 164 Eze 5:14 …………… 225
Dan 4:16 …………….. 38
Isa 42:7 ……………… 11 Eze 6:13 …………….. 20
Dan 4:30 …………….. 40
Isa 44 ………………. 225 Eze 11:21 ………….. 129
Dan 5 …….. 39, 136, 170
Isa 45:1-4 ……… 57, 159 Eze 13 ……………….. 35
Dan 5:18-28 ………… 56
Isa 45:7 …………….. 247 Eze 14 ……………….. 31
Dan 5:20-24 ……….. 247
Isa 45:13 …………… 159 Eze 14:12-21 ……….. 12
Dan 5:21 …………….. 38
Isa 45:21 ………. 49, 163 Eze 18 ……………… 168
Dan 5:22 …………….. 56
Isa 57:15 …………… 171 Eze 18:1-24 ………... 129
Dan 5:28 …………….. 95
Isa 59:19 …………… 211 Eze 22:26 …………… 32
Dan 5:31 ……………. 162
Isa 66:2 …………….. 171 Eze 22:31 ………….. 129
Dan 6 …………. 143-161
Isa 66:23 …………… 198 Eze 28:17 ………….. 169
Dan 6:1 …………….. 162
Eze 36:25-27 ……… 216
Jer 3:6 ……………….. 20 Dan 6:3 …………….. 152
Eze 38 ……………… 248
Jer 3:19 ……………. 102 Dan 6:4,5 ………….. 153
Eze 38:14-16 ……… 103
Jer 5:15-19 ………….. 12 Dan 6:6-9 ………….. 154
Eze 45:1-6 …………. 232
Jer 6:1 ……………… 227 Dan 6:10-14 ……….. 155
Jer 6:22,23 …... 102, 227 Dan 1:20 …………… 145 Dan 6:16-18 ……….. 156
Jer 19:15 …………… 12 Dan 2 Dan 6:19-28 ……….. 157
Jer 20:4 ……………… 12 … 11-30, 49-51, 57, 58, Dan 6:26,27 ……….. 143
Jer 23:14 ……………. 32 … 64, 75, 77, 93, 107, Dan 6:28 …………… 161
Jer 25 ……. 31, 135, 147 ……….. 140, 145, 261 Dan 7
Jer 25:9 Dan 2:2-9 ……….. 33-34 … 7, 49-90, 91, 93,97,
… 12, 31, 102, 211,228 Dan 2:10-12 ………… 36 ….. 98, 101, 107, 122,
Jer 25:9-12 ………… 147 Dan 2:11,28 ……….. 108 ………. 125, 126, 129,
Jer 25:11 ……… 161, 183 Dan 2:18,49 ………… 41 …. 131-133, 140, 141,
Jer 25:12 ……………. 31 Dan 2:21 …………… 247 ……….. 142, 218, 261
Jer 25:15-17 ………. 248 Dan 2:28-35 ………… 15 Dan 7:1-4 ……………. 55
Jer 27:6 ……….. 31, 248 Dan 2:34,35 …... 19, 261 Dan 7:4 ……………… 40
Jer 27:7 ……………. 248 Dan 2:35 …………….. 65 Dan 7:5 …………. 57, 95
Jer 29:13 …………... 194 Dan 2:36-47 ………… 16 Dan 7:6 ……………… 57
Jer 29:23 ……………. 32 Dan 2:38 …………….. 56 Dan 7:7 ……………… 58
Jer 34:12-21 ………. 149 Dan 7:8 ………... 58, 132
266 Bible Cross Reference

Dan 7:9 Dan 8:19 Dan 11:5,6 ………… 238

…. 59, 61, 63, 91, 218 ….. 96, 101, 131, 213, Dan 11:7-10 ……….. 239
Dan 7:10 .. 59-61, 63, 218 ……………………. 251 Dan 11:11-13 ……… 240
Dan 7:11 ……. 64, 92, 96 Dan 8:20,21 ... 51, 95, 98 Dan 11:14,15 ……… 241
Dan 7:12 …………….. 64 Dan 8:22 ……... 101, 116 Dan 11:16,17 ……… 241
Dan 7:13 Dan 8:23 Dan 11:18-20 ……… 242
…. 8, 66, 67, 129, 219 …….. 31, 95, 101, 116 Dan 11:21,22 ……… 242
Dan 7:14 Dan 8:24 Dan 11:23,24 ……… 243
… 8, 66, 67, 70, 129, 219 ….. 117, 173, 251, 252 Dan 11:25-28 ……… 244
Dan 7:15,16 ………… 55 Dan 8:25 .. 117, 138, 139 Dan 11:26-12:13 ….. 227
Dan 7:15-18 ………… 72 Dan 8:26 …………… 139 Dan 11:29-31 ……… 245
Dan 7:17 …………….. 66 Dan 8:27 …………… 140 Dan 11:31 . 223, 228, 233
Dan 7:19 …………….. 72 Dan 9 Dan 11:32-35 ……… 245
Dan 7:20 ………... 72, 86 …….. 31, 85, 122-125, Dan 11:35 . 105, 249, 250
Dan 7:21-23 ………… 85 … 127, 131, 141, 144, Dan 11:36
Dan 7:21,22 .. 87, 91, 219 …. 150, 160, 163-220, … 32, 95, 96, 105, 106,
Dan 7:23 ………... 66, 72 ……………………. 261 …. 107, 110, 133, 138,
Dan 7:24 ………... 59, 87 Dan 9:1-3 …….. 163-164 ……….. 139, 250, 251
Dan 7:25 Dan 9:2 …………….. 149 Dan 11:36-39 ……… 253
….. 80, 82, 84, 86, 87, Dan 9:4-13 …… 164-165 Dan 11:36-40 ……… 228
………………. 91, 121 Dan 9:11 …………… 166 Dan 11:36-12:3 . 133, 137
Dan 7:26 …………… 219 Dan 9:14-19 …. 170-171 Dan 11:36-12:13
Dan 7:26-28 ………… 89 Dan 9:20-23 …. 172, 213 ……………… 249-263
Dan 11:36-12:3 …… 133 Dan 9:21 …………… 221 Dan 11:37 ………….. 110
Dan 8 Dan 9:22-23 ……….. 174 Dan 11:40 . 105, 106, 252
……… 32, 51, 91-142, Dan 9:24 Dan 11:40-43 ……… 255
….. 172-174, 213-215, … 121, 122, 176, 183, Dan 11:41 ……. 105, 106
……………… 218, 261 ……………… 186, 214 Dan 11:44 …………. 228
Dan 8:1-12 ……… 94-95 Dan 9:24-27 …. 175, 180 Dan 11:44-12:1 …… 256
Dan 8:3 ……………… 95 Dan 9:25 …………… 189 Dan 11:45 …………. 138
Dan 8:8 …………….. 100 Dan 9:26 …….. 195, 210 Dan 12 ………….. 7, 121
Dan 8:9 … 100, 101, 228 Dan 9:27 Dan 12:1 …….. 249, 251
Dan 8:10 ……... 108, 110 …. 150, 195, 196, 212 Dan 12:2-4 ………… 257
Dan 8:11 Dan 10-12 .. 25, 133, 262 Dan 12:4 …………… 4, 5
…... 95, 111, 112, 115, Dan 10:1-6 ………… 234 Dan 12:4,9
….. 116, 134, 135, 138 Dan 10:1 …………… 246 ……….. 100, 115, 260
Dan 8:12 .. 135, 137, 138 Dan 10:1-11:35 Dan 12:5-9 ………… 258
Dan 8:13 .. 118, 133, 135 ……………… 221-248 Dan 12:7 …………… 226
Dan 8:14 Dan 10:7-14 ………. 235 Dan 12:9 …………….. 22
…. 118, 119, 121, 122, Dan 10:15-21 ……... 236 Dan 12:10-13 … 258-259
…. 124-126, 130, 213, Dan 11 ……. 51, 52, 105 Dan 12:11 ……. 116, 135
……………………. 261 Dan 11:1-4 ………… 237 Dan 12:12 ……... 10, 116
Dan 8:16-17 Dan 11:2,3 ………….. 52
Hos 5:10 …………… 211
…………. 96, 134, 213 Dan 11:2-4 ………….. 93
Dan 8:18 ………. 96, 213 Dan 11:2-35 ……….. 107 Mic 5:2 ……………... 194
Bible Cross Reference 267

Zec 13:8,9 ………….. 227 Mar 15:33 …………. 203 Joh 13 ……………… 198
Mar 15:34 …… 203, 204 Joh 13:16 ……………. 67
Mal 3:16 …………….. 62
Mar 16:1 …………… 204 Joh 13:30 ………….. 202
Mat 2:2 ………... 23, 194 Joh 13:36-16:33 …... 203
Luk 1:17 ……... 191, 207
Mat 5:5 …………. 72, 87 Joh 14:1-3 ………. 20, 63
Luk 1:34,35 ……….. 110
Mat 10:34 …………. 248 Joh 14:6 ……………. 205
Luk 3 …………. 207, 209
Mat 12:31,32 ... 135, 136 Joh 14:27 ………….. 171
Luk 3:1 … 180, 191, 197
Mat 12:40 …………. 197 Joh 16:2,3 …………. 222
Luk 3:15 …………… 191
Mat 18:21,22 ……… 184 Joh 16:11 ……………... 9
Luk 3:21-23 ……….. 191
Mat 22:36-40 ……… 167 Joh 16:13 ……………. 10
Luk 4 ………………. 209
Mat 23 ……………... 202 Joh 16:33 ……………. 71
Luk 4:16-21 ….. 208-209
Mat 23:37 .. 35, 211, 212 Joh 17 ………... 171, 203
Luk 4:18 …………… 187
Mat 23:38 . 169, 211, 212 Joh 18:28 ………….. 203
Luk 8:10 …………….. 30
Mat 24:2 ……... 210, 223 Joh 18:39 ………….. 203
Luk 20:9-19 ……….. 188
Mat 24:6-8 ………… 247 Joh 19:14-31 … 199, 206
Luk 21:20-23 ……… 232
Mat 24:9-11 ……….. 222 Joh 19:15 ………….. 154
Luk 21:22 …………. 223
Mat 24:15,16 ... 223, 228 Joh 19:31 ……. 204, 206
Luk 21:36 …………….. 6
Mat 24:15-20 ... 221, 232 Joh 20:1 ……………. 206
Luk 22:1 …………… 202
Mat 24,25 …………. 202 Joh 20:1-5 …………. 197
Luk 22:1-8 ………… 198
Mat 24:36 …………… 97
Luk 22:15 …………. 202 Act 6,7 ……………... 222
Mat 24:37 …………. 135
Luk 22:44-47 ……… 203 Act 10:34 ……….. 12, 31
Mat 24:37-39 ……… 223
Luk 22:60,61 ……… 203 Act 10:40 …….. 197, 206
Mat 25:34 …………. 259
Luk 22:66 …………. 203 Act 14:12 …………... 110
Mat 26:3-5 ………… 202
Luk 23:7 …………… 203 Act 17:26 …………... 170
Mat 26:17 ……. 202, 205
Luk 23:12 …………. 203 Act 17:31 ……… 62, 130
Mat 26:20,21 ……… 202
Luk 23:55 ………….. 204 Act 24:25 ……… 62, 130
Mat 26:30 …………. 203
Luk 24:13 ………….. 204
Mat 26:31,32 ……… 203 Rom 1:18-32 ………. 136
Mat 26:36 …………. 203 Joh 1 ……………….. 188 Rom 5:6 ……………. 195
Mat 26:64 …………….. 8 Joh 1:1-14 ……………. 8 Rom 5:18 …………... 170
Mat 27:1 …………… 203 Joh 1:11 ……… 187, 212 Rom 6:23 …………... 128
Mat 27:46 …………. 203 Joh 2:13-21 ………... 129 Rom 8 ………………. 168
Mat 27:62 …………. 204 Joh 3:16 ……….. 67, 127 Rom 8:7 ……………. 169
Mat 28:18-20 …... 70, 71 Joh 4:23 ……………... 73 Rom 9-11 …………... 188
Joh 4:25 ……………. 194 Rom 10:9 …………... 154
Mar 1:10 …………… 187
Joh 5:22,23 ………... 130
Mar 14 ……….. 198, 205 1 Cor 1:27 …………… 37
Joh 5:23 ………….. 8, 71
Mar 14:1 …………… 202 1 Cor 2:12 …………… 10
Joh 6:38 ……………... 68
Mar 14:10 …………. 202 1 Cor 6:1-3 ………….. 20
Joh 6:39-54 …………. 62
Mar 14:12 …… 202, 205 1 Cor 15:24-28 …. 69, 71
Joh 10:18 ……………. 68
Mar 14:14-16 ……… 199
Joh 10:22,23 ………. 114 2 Cor 5:10 .. 62, 130, 220
Mar 14:16 …………. 204
Joh 10:30 ……………. 67 2 Cor 11:14 …………. 96
Mar 14:17,18 ……… 202
Joh 11 ……………….. 44
Mar 14:26 …………. 204 Gal 3 ……………….. 188
Joh 12 ………... 196, 205
Mar 14:32 …………. 204 Gal 3:28, 29 ……….. 168
Joh 12:12-16 ………. 202
Mar 15:25 …… 203, 204 Gal 4:4 ……….. 123, 195
Joh 12:31 ……………. 71
268 Bible Cross Reference

Eph 1:4,5 ……………. 62 1 Joh 1:9 …………… 171 Rev 13:8-18 ……….. 154
Eph 1:9-23 ………….. 68 1 Joh 2:18 …………… 91 Rev 13:11-18 …. 96, 133
Eph 2 ………… 168, 188 1 Joh 4:8 …………… 224 Rev 13:13 ………….. 110
Eph 3:2-6 ……………. 23 Rev 13:14
Rev 1:4,5,8 …………… 8
…. 108, 110, 132, 139,
Phi 2:6 ………………. 68 Rev 1:7 ………………. 99
…………………... 251
Rev 1:9 ………………. 10
Col 2 ………………... 195 Rev 13:15 .. 24, 108, 136
Rev 3:14-22 …………. 48
Col 3:5, 6 ……………. 97 Rev 14:9,10 …. 108, 251
Rev 3:17-20 …………. 31
1 The 4:15-17 ………. 62 Rev 14:12 ……. 222, 226
Rev 4,5
1 The 4:16 ……… 63, 96 Rev 14:13 ………….. 222
…… 61, 128, 129, 131
1 The 4:17 ……… 20, 63 Rev 15 ……………… 140
Rev 4-6 ………… 67, 219
1 The 5:9 ……………… 6 Rev 15:1 …………… 251
Rev 6 ……… 7, 125, 218
Rev 15:1-8 …………. 130
2 The 2 …………….. 136 Rev 6:9 …………….. 227
Rev 15:7,8 …………. 220
2 The 2:3 …….. 111, 252 Rev 6:9-11 …………. 222
Rev 16 …………. 97, 140
2 The 2:4 Rev 7:1-4 …………... 135
Rev 16:4-7 …………. 222
….. 111, 132, 139, 252 Rev 8:2-5 …….. 116, 135
Rev 16:12-21 ……… 106
2 The 2:8 Rev 8:2-13 …………. 135
Rev 17 …………... 75, 77
……. 20, 117-118, 138 Rev 8:5 ………………... 7
Rev 17:8 ………….. 9, 99
2 The 2:9 …………... 110 Rev 9 ... 96, 99, 133, 137
Rev 17:11 ……………. 76
2 The 2:10 …………. 106 Rev 9:13-21
Rev 17:12
2 The 2:11-12 ….. 106, 137-138, 255
… 14, 17, 19, 76, 185,
……….. 106, 136, 228 Rev 9:15 ………. 97, 226
……………………. 261
Rev 11 …………. 66, 220
1 Tim 1:13 …………. 222 Rev 17:13 …... 14, 17, 19
Rev 11:2 …………… 226
Rev 17:14 …... 14, 19, 76
Heb 1:1 ……………… 69 Rev 11:15-19 … 130, 135
Rev 19 ……………….. 66
Heb 1:2 …………. 67, 69 Rev 11:19 ………….. 137
Rev 19:10 …………… 10
Heb 3:10, 11 ………. 167 Rev 12 …….. 84, 86, 185
Rev 19:11-21
Heb 5:7 ………... 68, 171 Rev 12:6 ………. 84, 121
…………. 9, 17, 96, 99
Heb 5:8 ……………… 68 Rev 12:7-9 …….. 71, 169
Rev 19:15,21 …………. 9
Heb 5:11-6:1 …………. 6 Rev 12:10 …………… 71
Rev 19:15-21 …… 65, 96
Heb 7:16 …………….. 71 Rev 12:13 …………… 71
Rev 19:19-21 ……….. 20
Heb 7:25 …………… 134 Rev 12:14 ……... 84, 121
Rev 19:20 ………. 35, 64
Heb 7:25-27 ……….. 116 Rev 12:17 ……. 106, 226
Rev 19:21 ………. 64, 96
Heb 8:1-5 .. 112, 125, 126 Rev 13
Rev 20
Heb 9:15 …………….. 67 ….. 48, 75, 76, 77, 87,
… 7, 20, 63, 121, 128,
Heb 9:24-26 …. 125, 127 ……………………. 185
……………………. 185
Heb 10:26 ……. 135, 136 Rev 13:1 …………….. 64
Rev 20:1-3 …………... 20
Heb 10:29 …………. 136 Rev 13:1-3 …….. 65, 219
Rev 20:4 …………….. 20
Heb 10:30,31 ……… 129 Rev 13:1-5 …………. 132
Rev 20:5,9 …………... 63
Heb 11:6 …………… 172 Rev 13:1-8 …………... 87
Rev 20:14,15 ……….. 66
Heb 11:10 …………… 21 Rev 13:1-10 ……….. 222
Rev 21:1-4 …………... 20
Rev 13:3 …………….. 92
Jam 2:26 …………….. 62 Rev 21:2 …………… 188
Rev 13:5 … 27, 121, 251
Rev 21:22 ………….. 188
1 Pet 2:22 …………… 67 Rev 13:7 .. 138, 226, 253
Rev 22:12 ………….. 130
Rev 13:7-10 …………. 97
2 Pet 1:20 …………… 115 Rev 22:15 …………… 63
Rev 13:8 …………… 105
Supplemental Helps Page 269

Recorded Seminar Series

Many seminar series have been recorded on CD and DVD. Call for a
free catalog from the Wake Up America Seminars office at (800) 475-
0876. Many subjects are available including righteousness by faith,
the sanctuary, the plan of salvation, the book of Hebrews, God’s
justice and mercy, and great clocks of God.
A special video series is available using this book as a study guide.
Call the office at (800) 475-0876 for more details.

The Book of Revelation

The Book of Revelation video presentation by Larry
W. Wilson, is a comprehensive, chapter by chapter
study on the last book of the Bible. It contains 34 seg-
ments, each 90-minutes in length, recorded in broad-
cast quality. This presentation represents Mr. Wilson’s
conclusions on apocalyptic prophecy gathered from over
30 years years of study. The series can be purchased as
a complete set or single topics as you can afford.
• The Seven Churches
• The Seven Seals-Book of Life
• The 144,000
• The Two Witnesses
• The Seven Trumpets
• The Four Beasts of Revelation (includes Mark of the Beast)
• The 3 Angel’s Messages
• 7 Last Plagues
• Revelation 17-21

We would like to receive comments about this book or

questions you may have. Please send your comments to
us at the address below. Thank you.
Wake Up America Seminars, Inc.
P.O. Box 273
Bellbrook, OH 45305
http://www.wake-up.org
email: [email protected]
Page 270 Supplemental Helps

Books
Warning! Revelation is about to be fulfilled
What do the books of Daniel and Revelation have to
say about soon coming events? Warning!
Revelation is about to be fulfilled outlines
Revelation’s story in an easy to read format.
Revelation predicts and describes many
incredible events that will soon occur. These
events will not happen in random order nor
will they be freak manifestations of violent
weather. The coming events predicted in
Revelation are carefully designed and executed
by the Creator of Heaven and Earth.
To learn more about what the prophecies of
Daniel and Revelation have to say about coming
events, contact the Wake Up America Seminars office at (800) 475-
0876 or access the web site at http://www.wake-up.org.

A Study on the
Seven Seals and the 144,000

Every Bible prophecy student should consider

the introductory chapter of this book. Why
A Stu
do we have so many interpretations of proph- Seven dy on the
S
ecy? Because the importance of valid rules the 14eals and
4,000
or methods of interpretation are often over-
looked. This book demonstrates how valid
rules of intrepretation allow the Bible to
speak for itself. Larry
W. Wi
lso n
Supplemental Helps Page 271

Jesus
The Alpha and The Omega

Jesus, The Alpha and The Omega provides a basic framework

to understand Bible prophecy. This frame-
work, based on five essential Bible doc-
trines, helps the serious student of Bible
prophecy appreciate the prophecies of
Daniel and Revelation. This compelling
book examines Jesus’ character, minis-
try, and example. Cross-references to
Bible texts provide a basis for in-depth
Bible study. This 280 page book can be
yours by contacting Wake Up America
Seminars at (800) 475-0876.

Coming Soon . . .
If you enjoyed Daniel – Unlocked for the Final Generation, you will
appreciate the upcoming studies on the book of Revelation. Apply-
ing the foundation and rules of apocalytic prophecy developed in
the study of the book of Daniel, Larry Wilson will lead you through
a study of the amazing prophecies of Revelation. These books will
show God’s plans for Earth’s final generation.

Other Books by Larry Wilson. . .

17 End-Time Bible Prophecies
A Study on the Seven Trumpets, Two Witnesses, and Four
Beasts

Wake Up America Seminars, Inc.

P.O. Box 273
Bellbrook, OH 45305
(800) 475-0876
http://www.wake-up.org
 About the Author
Larry Wilson, Director of Wake Up America Seminars, became a
born again Christian after returning from a tour of duty in Vietnam.
The understanding of the gospel, the plan of salvation, and the
atonement of Jesus Christ has thrilled his soul for the past 30 years.
Since his conversion, he has spent over 25 years intensely studying
the prophecies of Daniel and Revelation.
In 1988, he published the book Warning! Revelation is about to be
fulfilled and since then, he has written several books (over 800,000
books in circulation throughout the world in more than 60 coun-
tries). He gives seminar presentations, produces video programs
which have been broadcast from various locations throughout the
United States, and is a guest on radio talk shows.

About the Or
Orgganization
Wake Up America Seminars (WUAS) is both a non-profit and a non-
denominational organization. With God’s blessings and the
generosity of many people, WUAS has distributed millions of
pamphlets, books and tapes around the world since it began in 1988.
WUAS is not a church, nor is it affiliated or sponsored by any
religious organization. WUAS does not offer membership of any
kind. Its mission is not to convert the world to a point of view.
Although WUAS has well defined views on certain biblical matters,
its mission is primarily “seed sowing.” It promotes the primacy of
salvation through faith in Jesus Christ, His imminent return, and is
doing its best to encourage people with the good news of the gospel.
People of all faiths are invited to study the materials produced by
WUAS.